Remove whitespace at EOL.

437 files changed, 1754 insertions, 1754 deletions

diff --git a/bin/chio/chio.1 b/bin/chio/chio.1
index 020963e..0ce507f 100644
--- a/bin/chio/chio.1
+++ b/bin/chio/chio.1
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ is only supported by few media changers.  If it is not supported by a
 device, using this command will usually result in a "Invalid Field in
 CDB" error message on the console.
 .Pp
-If the 
+If the
 .Fl c
 flag is specified, the volume tag of the specified element is
 cleared.  If the
diff --git a/bin/chmod/chmod.1 b/bin/chmod/chmod.1
index fe0a640..3fb03ca 100644
--- a/bin/chmod/chmod.1
+++ b/bin/chmod/chmod.1
@@ -113,42 +113,42 @@ one or more of the following values:
 .Pp
 .Bl -tag -width 6n -compact -offset indent
 .It Li 4000
-(the set-user-ID-on-execution bit) Executable files with this bit set 
+(the set-user-ID-on-execution bit) Executable files with this bit set
 will run with effective uid set to the uid of the file owner.
-Directories with the set-user-id bit set will force all files and 
-sub-directories created in them to be owned by the directory owner 
-and not by the uid of the creating process, if the underlying file 
-system supports this feature: see 
+Directories with the set-user-id bit set will force all files and
+sub-directories created in them to be owned by the directory owner
+and not by the uid of the creating process, if the underlying file
+system supports this feature: see
 .Xr chmod 2
-and the 
+and the
 .Ar suiddir
 option to
 .Xr mount 8 .
 .It Li 2000
-(the set-group-ID-on-execution bit)  Executable files with this bit set 
-will run with effective gid set to the gid of the file owner.  
+(the set-group-ID-on-execution bit)  Executable files with this bit set
+will run with effective gid set to the gid of the file owner.
 .It Li 1000
-(the sticky bit)  
+(the sticky bit)
 When set on a directory, unprivileged users can delete and rename
-only those files in the directory that are owned by them, regardless of 
+only those files in the directory that are owned by them, regardless of
 the permissions on the directory.  Under
 .Fx ,
-the sticky bit is 
-ignored for executable files and may only be set for directories (see 
+the sticky bit is
+ignored for executable files and may only be set for directories (see
 .Xr sticky 8 ) .
 .It Li 0400
 Allow read by owner.
 .It Li 0200
 Allow write by owner.
 .It Li 0100
-For files, allow execution by owner.  For directories, allow the owner to 
+For files, allow execution by owner.  For directories, allow the owner to
 search in the directory.
 .It Li 0040
 Allow read by group members.
 .It Li 0020
 Allow write by group members.
 .It Li 0010
-For files, allow execution by group members.  For directories, allow 
+For files, allow execution by group members.  For directories, allow
 group members to search in the directory.
 .It Li 0004
 Allow read by others.
@@ -159,9 +159,9 @@ For files, allow execution by others.  For directories allow others to
 search in the directory.
 .El
 .Pp
-For example, the absolute mode that permits read, write and execute by 
-the owner, read and execute by group members, read and execute by 
-others, and no set-uid or set-gid behaviour is 755 
+For example, the absolute mode that permits read, write and execute by
+the owner, read and execute by group members, read and execute by
+others, and no set-uid or set-gid behaviour is 755
 (400+200+100+040+010+004+001).
 .Pp
 The symbolic mode is described by the following grammar:
diff --git a/bin/cp/cp.1 b/bin/cp/cp.1
index f49b44b..130eeed 100644
--- a/bin/cp/cp.1
+++ b/bin/cp/cp.1
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Cause
 to write a prompt to the standard error output before copying a file
 that would overwrite an existing file.
 If the response from the standard input begins with the character
-.Sq Li y 
+.Sq Li y
 or
 .Sq Li Y ,
 the file copy is attempted.
@@ -168,12 +168,12 @@ ID are unchanged unless the
 .Fl p
 option was specified.
 .Pp
-In the second synopsis form, 
-.Ar target_directory 
+In the second synopsis form,
+.Ar target_directory
 must exist unless there is only one named
 .Ar source_file
-which is a directory and the 
-.Fl R 
+which is a directory and the
+.Fl R
 flag is specified.
 .Pp
 If the destination file does not exist, the mode of the source file is
@@ -192,12 +192,12 @@ conditions must be fulfilled or both bits are removed.
 .Pp
 Appropriate permissions are required for file creation or overwriting.
 .Pp
-Symbolic links are always followed unless the 
-.Fl R 
+Symbolic links are always followed unless the
+.Fl R
 flag is set, in which case symbolic links are not followed, by default.
 The
 .Fl H
-or 
+or
 .Fl L
 flags (in conjunction with the
 .Fl R
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ option is non-standard and its use in scripts is not recommended.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr mv 1 ,
 .Xr rcp 1 ,
-.Xr umask 2 , 
+.Xr umask 2 ,
 .Xr fts 3 ,
 .Xr symlink 7
 .Sh STANDARDS
diff --git a/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.1 b/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.1
index db6d468..bcc5724 100644
--- a/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.1
+++ b/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.1
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ for it in the glossary.
 Acknowledgements
 .PP
 Numerous people have provided good input about previous versions
-of 
+of
 .I csh
 and aided in its debugging and in the debugging of its documentation.
 I would especially like to thank Michael Ubell
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ is to be read ``control-\fIx\fR'' and represents the striking of the \fIx\fR
 key while the control key is held down.)
 The mail program
 then echoed the characters `EOT' and transmitted our message.
-The characters `% ' were printed before and after the mail command 
+The characters `% ' were printed before and after the mail command
 by the shell to indicate that input was needed.
 .PP
 After typing the `% ' prompt the shell was reading command input from
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ rather than having a large number of hard to remember options.
 .NH 2
 Output to files
 .PP
-Commands that normally read input or write output on the terminal 
+Commands that normally read input or write output on the terminal
 can also be executed with this input and/or output done to
 a file.
 .PP
@@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ beginning are treated specially.
 Neither `*' or `?' or the `[' `]' mechanism will match it.
 This prevents accidental matching of the filenames `.' and `..'
 in the working directory which have special meaning to the system,
-as well as other files such as 
+as well as other files such as
 .I \&.cshrc
 which are not normally
 visible.
@@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ as it is used less frequently.
 Quotation
 .PP
 We have already seen a number of metacharacters used by the shell.
-These metacharacters pose a problem in that we cannot use them directly 
+These metacharacters pose a problem in that we cannot use them directly
 as parts of words.
 Thus the command
 .DS
@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ will not echo the character `*'.
 It will either echo an sorted list of filenames in the
 current
 .I "working directory,"
-or print the message `No match' if there are 
+or print the message `No match' if there are
 no files in the working directory.
 .PP
 The recommended mechanism for placing characters which are neither numbers,
@@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ The shell also terminates when it gets an end-of-file printing `logout';
 \s-2UNIX\s0 then logs you off the system.
 Since this means that typing too many ^D's can accidentally log us off,
 the shell has a mechanism for preventing this.
-This 
+This
 .I ignoreeof
 option will be discussed in section 2.2.
 .PP
diff --git a/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.2 b/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.2
index 043b73f..d9e8001 100644
--- a/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.2
+++ b/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.2
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ We will later see what kinds of commands are usefully placed there.
 For now we need not have this file and the shell does not complain about
 its absence.
 .PP
-A 
+A
 .I "login shell" ,
 executed after you login to the system,
 will, after it reads commands from
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ processing my
 .I \&.login
 file and begin reading commands from the terminal, prompting for each with
 `% '.
-When I log off (by giving the 
+When I log off (by giving the
 .I logout
 command) the shell
 will print `logout' and execute commands from the file `.logout'
@@ -328,11 +328,11 @@ main()
 	printf("hello);
 }
 % cc !$
-cc bug.c 
+cc bug.c
 "bug.c", line 4: newline in string or char constant
 "bug.c", line 5: syntax error
 % ed !$
-ed bug.c 
+ed bug.c
 29
 4s/);/"&/p
         printf("hello");
@@ -340,10 +340,10 @@ w
 30
 q
 % !c
-cc bug.c 
+cc bug.c
 % a.out
 hello% !e
-ed bug.c 
+ed bug.c
 30
 4s/lo/lo\e\en/p
         printf("hello\en");
@@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ cc bug.c \-o bug
 a.out: 2784+364+1028 = 4176b = 0x1050b
 bug: 2784+364+1028 = 4176b = 0x1050b
 % ls \-l !*
-ls \-l a.out bug 
+ls \-l a.out bug
 \(mirwxr\(mixr\(mix 1 bill       3932 Dec 19 09:41 a.out
 \(mirwxr\(mixr\(mix 1 bill       3932 Dec 19 09:42 bug
 % bug
@@ -364,14 +364,14 @@ hello
 % num bug.c | spp
 spp: Command not found.
 % ^spp^ssp
-num bug.c | ssp 
+num bug.c | ssp
     1	main()
     3	{
     4		printf("hello\en");
     5	}
 % !! | lpr
 num bug.c | ssp | lpr
-% 
+%
 .DE
 .KE
 In this example we have a very simple C program which has a bug (or two)
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ EOT
 .DE
 If the job did not terminate normally the `Done' message might say
 something else like `Killed'.
-If you want the 
+If you want the
 terminations of background jobs to be reported at the time they occur
 (possibly interrupting the output of other foreground jobs), you can set
 the
@@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ job \- identified by a `\-' in the output of
 .I jobs.
 When the current job terminates, the previous job becomes the current job.
 When given, the argument is either `%\-' (indicating
-the previous job); `%#', where # is the job number; 
+the previous job); `%#', where # is the job number;
 `%pref' where pref is some unique prefix of the command name
 and arguments of one of the jobs; or `%?' followed by some string found
 in only one of the jobs.
@@ -859,7 +859,7 @@ text editor might take a long time.
 Stopped
 % bg
 [1] ed bigfile &
-% 
+%
  . . .  some foreground commands
 .ta 1.75i
 [1] Stopped (tty input)	ed bigfile
@@ -868,7 +868,7 @@ ed bigfile
 w
 120000
 q
-% 
+%
 .so tabs
 .DE
 So after the `s' command was issued, the `ed' job was stopped with ^Z
diff --git a/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.3 b/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.3
index 083fbcc..4f6e1b7 100644
--- a/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.3
+++ b/bin/csh/USD.doc/csh.3
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ of the shell and some of its control structure follows:
 # already in ~/backup
 #
 set noglob
-foreach i ($argv) 
+foreach i ($argv)
 
         if ($i !~ *.c) continue  # not a .c file so do nothing
 
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ for each of the values given between `(' and `)' with the named
 variable, in this case `i' set to successive values in the list.
 Within this loop we may use the command
 .I break
-to stop executing the loop 
+to stop executing the loop
 and
 .I continue
 to prematurely terminate one iteration
diff --git a/bin/date/date.1 b/bin/date/date.1
index 0dc116a..a8a1203 100644
--- a/bin/date/date.1
+++ b/bin/date/date.1
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Set the system's value for minutes west of
 .Tn GMT .
 .Ar minutes_west
 specifies the number of minutes returned in
-.Fa tz_minuteswest  
+.Fa tz_minuteswest
 by future calls to
 .Xr gettimeofday 2 .
 .It Fl u
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Display or set the date in
 Adjust (i.e., take the current date and display the result of the
 adjustment; not actually set the date) the second, minute, hour, month
 day, week day, month or year according to
-.Ar val .  
+.Ar val .
 If
 .Ar val
 is preceded with a plus or minus sign,
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ An operand with a leading plus
 sign signals a user-defined format string
 which specifies the format in which to display the date and time.
 The format string may contain any of the conversion specifications
-described in the 
+described in the
 .Xr strftime 3
 manual page, as well as any arbitrary text.
 A newline
diff --git a/bin/domainname/domainname.1 b/bin/domainname/domainname.1
index 5f40980..9a67bda 100644
--- a/bin/domainname/domainname.1
+++ b/bin/domainname/domainname.1
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ convenience.
 .Xr getdomainname 3
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 command appeared in
 .Fx
 1.1, based on a similar command in
diff --git a/bin/ed/ed.1 b/bin/ed/ed.1
index 003b28b..50df103 100644
--- a/bin/ed/ed.1
+++ b/bin/ed/ed.1
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ The next line.
 This is equivalent to
 .Em +1
 and may be repeated with cumulative effect.
-.It +n 
+.It +n
 The
 .Em n Ns th
 next line, where
@@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ and
 .Em V .
 A newline alone in
 .Ar command-list
-is equivalent to a 
+is equivalent to a
 .Em p
 command.
 .It (1,$)G/re/
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Interactively edit the addressed lines matching a regular expression
 For each matching line,
 the line is printed,
 the current address is set,
-and the user is prompted to enter a 
+and the user is prompted to enter a
 .Ar command-list .
 At the end of the
 .Em G
@@ -576,11 +576,11 @@ deleted or otherwise modified.
 .It (.,.)l
 Print the addressed lines unambiguously.
 If a single line fills for than one screen (as might be the case
-when viewing a binary file, for instance), a `--More--' 
-prompt is printed on the last line. 
+when viewing a binary file, for instance), a `--More--'
+prompt is printed on the last line.
 .Nm Ed
 waits until the RETURN key is pressed
-before displaying the next screen. 
+before displaying the next screen.
 The current address is set to the last line
 printed.
 .It (.,.)m(.)
@@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ printed with the
 .Em h
 (help) command.
 .Pp
-Since the 
+Since the
 .Em g
 (global) command  masks any errors from failed searches and substitutions,
 it can be used to perform conditional operations in scripts; e.g.,
diff --git a/bin/expr/expr.1 b/bin/expr/expr.1
index 523cd1f..9da5269 100644
--- a/bin/expr/expr.1
+++ b/bin/expr/expr.1
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Nm
-utility evaluates 
+utility evaluates
 .Ar expression
 and writes the result on standard output.
 .Pp
@@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ Operators are listed below in order of increasing precedence.
 Operators with equal precedence are grouped within { } symbols.
 .Bl -tag -width indent
 .It Ar expr1 Li | Ar expr2
-Return the evaluation of 
-.Ar expr1 
+Return the evaluation of
+.Ar expr1
 if it is neither an empty string nor zero;
 otherwise, returns the evaluation of
 .Ar expr2 .
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Return the evaluation of
 if neither expression evaluates to an empty string or zero;
 otherwise, returns zero.
 .It Ar expr1 Li "{=, >, >=, <, <=, !=}" Ar expr2
-Return the results of integer comparison if both arguments are integers; 
+Return the results of integer comparison if both arguments are integers;
 otherwise, returns the results of string comparison using the locale-specific
 collation sequence.
 The result of each comparison is 1 if the specified relation is true,
@@ -76,23 +76,23 @@ Return the results of addition or subtraction of integer-valued arguments.
 .It Ar expr1 Li "{*, /, %}" Ar expr2
 Return the results of multiplication, integer division, or remainder of integer-valued arguments.
 .It Ar expr1 Li : Ar expr2
-The 
+The
 .Dq \&:
-operator matches 
-.Ar expr1 
-against 
+operator matches
+.Ar expr1
+against
 .Ar expr2 ,
 which must be a regular expression.  The regular expression is anchored
-to the beginning of  the string with an implicit 
+to the beginning of  the string with an implicit
 .Dq ^ .
 .Pp
 If the match succeeds and the pattern contains at least one regular
-expression subexpression 
-.Dq "\e(...\e)" , 
-the string corresponding to 
+expression subexpression
+.Dq "\e(...\e)" ,
+the string corresponding to
 .Dq "\e1"
 is returned;
-otherwise the matching operator returns the number of characters matched. 
+otherwise the matching operator returns the number of characters matched.
 If the match fails and the pattern contains a regular expression subexpression
 the null string is returned;
 otherwise 0.
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ otherwise 0.
 Parentheses are used for grouping in the usual manner.
 .Sh EXAMPLES
 .Bl -enum
-.It 
+.It
 The following example adds one to the variable a.
 .Dl a=`expr $a + 1`
 .It
diff --git a/bin/hostname/hostname.1 b/bin/hostname/hostname.1
index 5251b3a..b83d534 100644
--- a/bin/hostname/hostname.1
+++ b/bin/hostname/hostname.1
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Trim off any domain information from the printed
 name.
 .El
 .Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr gethostname 3 , 
+.Xr gethostname 3 ,
 .Xr rc.conf 5
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
diff --git a/bin/ln/ln.1 b/bin/ln/ln.1
index 8c6ba5c..d651b98 100644
--- a/bin/ln/ln.1
+++ b/bin/ln/ln.1
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Cause
 .Nm
 to write a prompt to standard error if the target file exists.
 If the response from the standard input begins with the character
-.Sq Li y 
+.Sq Li y
 or
 .Sq Li Y ,
 then unlink the target file so that the link may occur.
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ operation using the two passed arguments.
 .Xr symlink 2 ,
 .Xr symlink 7
 .Sh COMPATIBILITY
-The 
+The
 .Fl h ,
 .Fl i ,
 .Fl n
diff --git a/bin/ln/symlink.7 b/bin/ln/symlink.7
index 3e74454..0e7384b 100644
--- a/bin/ln/symlink.7
+++ b/bin/ln/symlink.7
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ name arguments, to commands which are not traversing a file tree.
 .Pp
 Except as noted below, commands follow symbolic links named as command
 line arguments.
-For example, if there were a symbolic link 
+For example, if there were a symbolic link
 .Dq Li slink
 which pointed to a file named
 .Dq Li afile ,
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ command is also an exception to this rule.
 The
 .Xr file 1
 command does not follow symbolic links named as argument by default.
-The 
+The
 .Xr file 1
 command does follow symbolic links named as argument if
 .Fl L
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ walk (where symbolic links referencing directories are followed).
 As consistently as possible, you can make commands doing a file tree
 walk follow any symbolic links named on the command line, regardless
 of the type of file they reference, by specifying the
-.Fl H 
+.Fl H
 (for
 .Dq half\-logical )
 flag.
diff --git a/bin/ls/ls.1 b/bin/ls/ls.1
index 1076a37..8728d7a 100644
--- a/bin/ls/ls.1
+++ b/bin/ls/ls.1
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Display whiteouts when scanning directories.
 Include directory entries whose names begin with a
 dot (.).
 .It Fl b
-As 
+As
 .Fl B ,
 but use C escape codes whenever possible.
 .It Fl c
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Directories are listed as plain files (not searched recursively).
 Output is not sorted.
 .It Fl g
 This option is deprecated and is only available for compatibility
-with 
+with
 .Bx 4.3 ;
 it was used to display the group name in the long
 .Pq Fl l
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ format output.
 .It Fl i
 For each file, print the file's file serial number (inode number).
 .It Fl k
-If the 
+If the
 .Fl s
 option is specified, print the file size allocation in kilobytes,
 not blocks.  This option overrides the environment variable BLOCKSIZE.
diff --git a/bin/mv/mv.1 b/bin/mv/mv.1
index c76c69b..6c1cab6 100644
--- a/bin/mv/mv.1
+++ b/bin/mv/mv.1
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Cause
 to write a prompt to standard error before moving a file that would
 overwrite an existing file.
 If the response from the standard input begins with the character
-.Sq Li y 
+.Sq Li y
 or
 .Sq Li Y ,
 the move is attempted.
diff --git a/bin/pax/pax.1 b/bin/pax/pax.1
index cdbb6d8..cf3849f 100644
--- a/bin/pax/pax.1
+++ b/bin/pax/pax.1
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@
 .Nm Pax
 will read, write, and list the members of an archive file,
 and will copy directory hierarchies.
-.Nm Pax 
+.Nm Pax
 operation is independent of the specific archive format,
 and supports a wide variety of different archive formats.
 A list of supported archive formats can be found under the description of the
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ and is written using single line buffering.
 .Nm Pax
 extracts the members of the archive file read from the
 .Dv standard input ,
-with pathnames matching the specified 
+with pathnames matching the specified
 .Ar patterns .
 The archive format and blocking is automatically determined on input.
 When an extracted file is a directory, the entire file hierarchy
@@ -229,16 +229,16 @@ option.
 .It Fl w
 .Em Write .
 .Nm Pax
-writes an archive containing the 
+writes an archive containing the
 .Ar file
 operands to
 .Dv standard output
 using the specified archive format.
-When no 
+When no
 .Ar file
-operands are specified, a list of files to copy with one per line is read from 
+operands are specified, a list of files to copy with one per line is read from
 .Dv standard input .
-When a 
+When a
 .Ar file
 operand is also a directory, the entire file hierarchy rooted
 at that directory will be included.
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ copies the
 .Ar file
 operands to the destination
 .Ar directory .
-When no 
+When no
 .Ar file
 operands are specified, a list of files to copy with one per line is read from
 the
@@ -306,10 +306,10 @@ operand is used to select one or more pathnames of archive members.
 Archive members are selected using the pattern matching notation described
 by
 .Xr fnmatch 3 .
-When the 
+When the
 .Ar pattern
 operand is not supplied, all members of the archive will be selected.
-When a 
+When a
 .Ar pattern
 matches a directory, the entire file hierarchy rooted at that directory will
 be selected.
@@ -347,11 +347,11 @@ If any intermediate directories are needed in order to extract an archive
 member, these directories will be created as if
 .Xr mkdir 2
 was called with the bitwise inclusive
-.Dv OR 
+.Dv OR
 of
 .Dv S_IRWXU , S_IRWXG ,
 and
-.Dv S_IRWXO 
+.Dv S_IRWXO
 as the mode argument.
 When the selected archive format supports the specification of linked
 files and these files cannot be linked while the archive is being extracted,
@@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ If an archive format is not specified with a
 .Fl x
 option, the format currently being used in the archive will be selected.
 Any attempt to append to an archive in a format different from the
-format already used in the archive will cause 
+format already used in the archive will cause
 .Nm
 to exit immediately
 with a non-zero exit status.
@@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ can be separated by
 to indicate a product.
 A specific archive device may impose additional restrictions on the size
 of blocking it will support.
-When blocking is not specified, the default 
+When blocking is not specified, the default
 .Ar blocksize
 is dependent on the specific archive format being used (see the
 .Fl x
@@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ If this line consists of a single period, the
 file or archive member is processed with no modification to its name.
 Otherwise, its name is replaced with the contents of the line.
 .Nm Pax
-will immediately exit with a non-zero exit status if 
+will immediately exit with a non-zero exit status if
 .Dv <EOF>
 is encountered when reading a response or if
 .Pa /dev/tty
@@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ No more than one archive member is matched for each
 .Ar pattern .
 When members of type directory are matched, the file hierarchy rooted at that
 directory is also matched (unless
-.Fl d 
+.Fl d
 is also specified).
 .It Fl o Ar options
 Information to modify the algorithm for extracting or writing archive files
@@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ and
 .Cm p .
 Multiple characteristics can be concatenated within the same string
 and multiple
-.Fl p 
+.Fl p
 options can be specified.
 The meaning of the specification characters are as follows:
 .Bl -tag -width 2n
@@ -535,10 +535,10 @@ This is intended to be used by
 .Em root ,
 someone with all the appropriate privileges, in order to preserve all
 aspects of the files as they are recorded in the archive.
-The 
+The
 .Cm e
 flag is the sum of the
-.Cm o 
+.Cm o
 and
 .Cm p
 flags.
@@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ Preserve the user ID and group ID.
 .Sq Preserve
 the file mode bits.
 This intended to be used by a
-.Em user 
+.Em user
 with regular privileges who wants to preserve all aspects of the file other
 than the ownership.
 The file times are preserved by default, but two other flags are offered to
@@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ extracted file, subject to the permissions of the invoking
 process.
 Otherwise the attribute of the extracted file is determined as
 part of the normal file creation action.
-If neither the 
+If neither the
 .Cm e
 nor the
 .Cm o
@@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ specification character is specified, or the user ID and group ID are not
 preserved for any reason,
 .Nm
 will not set the
-.Dv S_ISUID 
+.Dv S_ISUID
 .Em ( setuid )
 and
 .Dv S_ISGID
@@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ the output has the format:
 .Dl <ls -l listing> == <link name>
 For pathnames representing a symbolic link, the output has the format:
 .Dl <ls -l listing> => <link name>
-Where <ls -l listing> is the output format specified by the 
+Where <ls -l listing> is the output format specified by the
 .Xr ls 1
 utility when used with the
 .Fl l
@@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ to indicate a product.
 .Em Warning :
 Only use this option when writing an archive to a device which supports
 an end of file read condition based on last (or largest) write offset
-(such as a regular file or a tape drive). 
+(such as a regular file or a tape drive).
 The use of this option with a floppy or hard disk is not recommended.
 .It Fl D
 This option is the same as the
@@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ of
 will cause
 .Nm
 to attempt to recover from read errors forever.
-The default 
+The default
 .Ar limit
 is a small positive number of retries.
 .Pp
@@ -832,7 +832,7 @@ name, or when starting with a
 a numeric gid.
 A '\\' can be used to escape the
 .Cm # .
-Multiple 
+Multiple
 .Fl G
 options may be supplied and checking stops with the first match.
 .It Fl H
@@ -845,12 +845,12 @@ Do not follow symbolic links, perform a physical file system traversal.
 This is the default mode.
 .It Fl T Ar [from_date][,to_date][/[c][m]]
 Allow files to be selected based on a file modification or inode change
-time falling within a specified time range of 
+time falling within a specified time range of
 .Ar from_date
 to
 .Ar to_date
 (the dates are inclusive).
-If only a 
+If only a
 .Ar from_date
 is supplied, all files with a modification or inode change time
 equal to or younger are selected.
@@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ If only a
 .Ar to_date
 is supplied, all files with a modification or inode change time
 equal to or older will be selected.
-When the 
+When the
 .Ar from_date
 is equal to the
 .Ar to_date ,
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ time will be selected.
 .Pp
 When
 .Nm
-is in the 
+is in the
 .Em write
 or
 .Em copy
@@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ The
 .Ar c
 specifies the comparison of inode change time (the time when the file
 inode was last changed; e.g. a change of owner, group, mode, etc).
-When 
+When
 .Ar c
 and
 .Ar m
@@ -925,14 +925,14 @@ The minute field
 is required, while the other fields are optional and must be added in the
 following order:
 .Dl Cm hh , dd , mm , yy .
-The 
+The
 .Cm ss
 field may be added independently of the other fields.
 Time ranges are relative to the current time, so
 .Dl Fl T Ar 1234/cm
 would select all files with a modification or inode change time
 of 12:34 PM today or later.
-Multiple 
+Multiple
 .Fl T
 time range can be supplied and checking stops with the first match.
 .It Fl U Ar user
@@ -943,14 +943,14 @@ name, or when starting with a
 a numeric uid.
 A '\\' can be used to escape the
 .Cm # .
-Multiple 
+Multiple
 .Fl U
 options may be supplied and checking stops with the first match.
 .It Fl X
 When traversing the file hierarchy specified by a pathname,
 do not descend into directories that have a different device ID.
 See the
-.Li st_dev 
+.Li st_dev
 field as described in
 .Xr stat 2
 for more information about device ID's.
@@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ Then the
 and
 .Fl Z
 options will be applied based on the final pathname.
-Finally the 
+Finally the
 .Fl v
 option will write the names resulting from these modifications.
 .Pp
@@ -1021,13 +1021,13 @@ based only on the user specified pathnames as modified by the
 .Fl D ,
 .Fl G ,
 .Fl T ,
-and 
+and
 .Fl U
 options (the
 .Fl D
 option only applies during a copy operation).
 Then any
-.Fl s 
+.Fl s
 and
 .Fl i
 options will modify in that order, the names of these selected files.
@@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ directory hierarchy to
 .Pp
 The command:
 .Dl pax -r -s ',^//*usr//*,,' -f a.pax
-reads the archive 
+reads the archive
 .Pa a.pax ,
 with all files rooted in ``/usr'' into the archive extracted relative to the
 current directory.
@@ -1148,7 +1148,7 @@ will exit with one of the following values:
 .Bl -tag -width 2n
 .It 0
 All files were processed successfully.
-.It 1 
+.It 1
 An error occurred.
 .El
 .Pp
diff --git a/bin/rm/rm.1 b/bin/rm/rm.1
index 7d50274..da13c3b 100644
--- a/bin/rm/rm.1
+++ b/bin/rm/rm.1
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ the exit status to reflect an error.
 The
 .Fl f
 option overrides any previous
-.Fl i 
+.Fl i
 options.
 .It Fl i
 Request confirmation before attempting to remove each file, regardless of
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ terminal.
 The
 .Fl i
 option overrides any previous
-.Fl f 
+.Fl f
 options.
 .It Fl P
 Overwrite regular files before deleting them.
@@ -86,14 +86,14 @@ Files are overwritten three times, first with the byte pattern 0xff,
 then 0x00, and then 0xff again, before they are deleted.
 .It Fl R
 Attempt to remove the file hierarchy rooted in each file argument.
-The 
+The
 .Fl R
 option implies the
 .Fl d
 option.
 If the
 .Fl i
-option is specified, the user is prompted for confirmation before 
+option is specified, the user is prompted for confirmation before
 each directory's contents are processed (as well as before the attempt
 is made to remove the directory).
 If the user does not respond affirmatively, the file hierarchy rooted in
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ utility differs from historical implementations in that the
 .Fl f
 option only masks attempts to remove non-existent files instead of
 masking a large variety of errors.
-The 
+The
 .Fl v
 option is non-standard and its use in scripts is not recommended.
 .Pp
diff --git a/bin/sh/bltin/echo.1 b/bin/sh/bltin/echo.1
index 5d77ff8..c7f0936 100644
--- a/bin/sh/bltin/echo.1
+++ b/bin/sh/bltin/echo.1
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm
 .Op Fl n | Fl e
-.Ar args... 
+.Ar args...
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm
 prints its arguments on the standard output, separated by spaces.
diff --git a/bin/test/test.1 b/bin/test/test.1
index fde8434..cddafd5 100644
--- a/bin/test/test.1
+++ b/bin/test/test.1
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ is a named pipe
 .Po Tn FIFO Pc .
 .It Fl r Ar file
 True if
-.Ar file 
+.Ar file
 exists and is readable.
 .It Fl s Ar file
 True if
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ True if the length of
 .Ar string
 is zero.
 .It Fl L Ar file
-True if 
+True if
 .Ar file
 exists and is a symbolic link.
 .It Fl O Ar file
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ True if
 .Ar \&s\&1
 is not the null
 string.
-.It Ar \&n\&1 Fl \&eq Ar \&n\&2 
+.It Ar \&n\&1 Fl \&eq Ar \&n\&2
 True if the integers
 .Ar \&n\&1
 and
@@ -287,11 +287,11 @@ operator has higher precedence than the
 .Fl o
 operator.
 .Sh GRAMMAR AMBIGUITY
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 grammar is inherently ambiguous.  In order to assure a degree of consistency,
-the cases described in the 
-.St -p1003.2 , 
+the cases described in the
+.St -p1003.2 ,
 section D11.2/4.62.4, standard
 are evaluated consistently according to the rules specified in the
 standards document.  All other cases are subject to the ambiguity in the
diff --git a/games/atc/atc.6 b/games/atc/atc.6
index 335994d..8251371 100644
--- a/games/atc/atc.6
+++ b/games/atc/atc.6
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
 .in +\\n(I\\n(IRu
 .ti -\\n(I\\n(IRu
 ..
-.\" Copyright (c) 1986 Ed James. All rights reserved. 
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986 Ed James. All rights reserved.
 .\"
 .TH ATC 6 "May 31, 1993"
 .UC
@@ -85,14 +85,14 @@ Same as
 .B \-s.
 .TP
 .B \-p
-Print the path to the special directory where 
+Print the path to the special directory where
 .I atc
 expects to find its private files.  This is used during the
 installation of the program.
 .TP
 .B "\-g game"
 Play the named game.  If the game listed is not one of the
-ones printed from the 
+ones printed from the
 .B \-l
 option, the default game is played.
 .TP
@@ -104,37 +104,37 @@ Same as
 Set the random seed.  The purpose of this flag is questionable.
 .SH GOALS
 .LP
-Your goal in 
+Your goal in
 .I atc
-is to keep the game going as long as possible.  
+is to keep the game going as long as possible.
 There is no winning state, except to beat the times of other players.
 You will need to: launch planes at airports (by instructing them to
 increase their altitude); land planes at airports (by instructing them to
 go to altitude zero when exactly over the airport); and maneuver planes
-out of exit points.  
+out of exit points.
 .LP
 Several things will cause the end of the game.
-Each plane has a destination (see information area), and 
+Each plane has a destination (see information area), and
 sending a plane to the wrong destination is an error.
 Planes can run out of fuel, or can collide.  Collision is defined as
 adjacency in any of the three dimensions.  A plane leaving the arena
 in any other way than through its destination exit is an error as well.
 .LP
 Scores are sorted in order of the number of planes safe.  The other
-statistics are provided merely for fun.  There is no penalty for 
+statistics are provided merely for fun.  There is no penalty for
 taking longer than another player (except in the case of ties).
 .LP
 Suspending a game is not permitted.  If you get a talk message, tough.
 When was the last time an Air Traffic Controller got called away to
-the phone? 
+the phone?
 .SH "THE DISPLAY"
 .LP
-Depending on the terminal you run 
+Depending on the terminal you run
 .I atc
-on, the screen will be divided into 4 areas. 
+on, the screen will be divided into 4 areas.
 It should be stressed that the terminal driver portion of the
 game was designed to be reconfigurable, so the display format can vary
-depending the version you are playing.  The descriptions here are based 
+depending the version you are playing.  The descriptions here are based
 on the ASCII version
 of the game.  The game rules and input format, however,
 should remain consistent.
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Control-L redraws the screen, should it become muddled.
 The first screen area is the radar display, showing the relative locations
 of the planes, airports, standard entry/exit points, radar
 beacons, and "lines" which simply serve to aid you in guiding
-the planes. 
+the planes.
 .IP
 Planes are shown as a single letter with an altitude.  If
 the numerical altitude is a single digit, then it represents
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ planes and the jets.  On ASCII terminals, prop planes are
 represented by a upper case letter, jets by a lower case letter.
 .IP
 Airports are shown as a number and some indication of the direction
-planes must be going to land at the airport.  
+planes must be going to land at the airport.
 On ASCII terminals, this is one of '^', '>', '<', and 'v', to indicate
 north (0 degrees), east (90), west (270) and south (180), respectively.
 The planes will also
@@ -164,9 +164,9 @@ Beacons are represented as circles or asterisks and a number.
 Their purpose is to offer a place of easy reference to the plane pilots.
 See 'the delay command' under the input section of this manual.
 .IP
-Entry/exit points are displayed as numbers along the border of the 
+Entry/exit points are displayed as numbers along the border of the
 radar screen.  Planes will enter the arena from these points without
-warning.  These points have a direction associated with them, and 
+warning.  These points have a direction associated with them, and
 planes will always enter the arena from this direction.  On the
 ASCII version of
 .I atc,
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ this direction is not displayed.  It will become apparent
 what this direction is as the game progresses.
 .IP
 Incoming planes will always enter at the same altitude: 7000 feet.
-For a plane to successfully depart through an entry/exit point, 
+For a plane to successfully depart through an entry/exit point,
 it must be flying at 9000 feet.
 It is not necessary for the planes to be flying in any particular
 direction when they leave the arena (yet).
@@ -183,12 +183,12 @@ direction when they leave the arena (yet).
 The second area of the display is the information area, which lists
 the time (number of updates since start), and the number of planes you
 have directed safely out of the arena.
-Below this is a list of planes currently in the air, followed by a 
+Below this is a list of planes currently in the air, followed by a
 blank line, and then a list of planes on the ground (at airports).
-Each line lists the plane name and its current altitude, 
+Each line lists the plane name and its current altitude,
 an optional asterisk indicating low fuel, the plane's destination,
 and the plane's current command.  Changing altitude is not considered
-to be a command and is therefore not displayed.  The following are 
+to be a command and is therefore not displayed.  The following are
 some possible information lines:
 .IP
 	B4*A0: Circle @ b1
@@ -200,11 +200,11 @@ feet.  It is low on fuel (note the '*').  It's destination is
 Airport #0.
 The next command it expects
 to do is circle when it reaches Beacon #1.
-The second example shows a jet named 'g' at 7000 feet, destined for 
+The second example shows a jet named 'g' at 7000 feet, destined for
 Exit #4.  It is just now executing a turn to 225 degrees (South-West).
 .SS "INPUT AREA"
 .IP
-The third area of the display is the input area.  It is here that 
+The third area of the display is the input area.  It is here that
 your input is reflected.  See the INPUT heading of this manual
 for more details.
 .SS "AUTHOR AREA"
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ This area is used simply to give credit where credit is due. :-)
 A command completion interface is built into
 the game.  At any time, typing '?' will list possible input characters.
 Typing a backspace (your erase character) backs up, erasing the last part
-of the command.  When a command is complete, a return enters it, and 
+of the command.  When a command is complete, a return enters it, and
 any semantic checking is done at that time.  If no errors are detected,
 the command is sent to the appropriate plane.  If an error is discovered
 during the check, the offending statement will be underscored and a
@@ -223,25 +223,25 @@ during the check, the offending statement will be underscored and a
 .LP
 The command syntax is broken into two parts:
 .I "Immediate Only"
-and 
+and
 .I Delayable
 commands.
 .I "Immediate Only"
 commands happen on the next
-update.  
+update.
 .I Delayable
 commands also happen on the next update unless they
-are followed by an optional predicate called the 
-.I Delay 
+are followed by an optional predicate called the
+.I Delay
 command.
 .LP
-In the following tables, the syntax 
+In the following tables, the syntax
 .B [0\-9]
-means any single digit, and 
+means any single digit, and
 .B <dir>
 refers to the keys around the 's' key, namely ``wedcxzaq''.
 In absolute references, 'q' refers to North-West or 315 degrees, and 'w'
-refers to North, or 0 degrees.  
+refers to North, or 0 degrees.
 In relative references, 'q' refers to -45 degrees or 45 degrees left, and 'w'
 refers to 0 degrees, or no change in direction.
 .LP
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ line of dashes if there is no command.
 .RE
 .B "\- u Unmark:"
 .RS
-Same as ignore, but if a delayed command is processed, 
+Same as ignore, but if a delayed command is processed,
 the plane will become marked.  This is useful if you want
 to forget about a plane during part, but not all, of its
 journey.
@@ -383,11 +383,11 @@ The airport number.
 .RE
 .SS THE DELAY COMMAND
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B Delay
 (a/@)
-command may be appended to any 
-.B Delayable 
+command may be appended to any
+.B Delayable
 command.  It allows the controller to instruct a plane to do an action
 when the plane reaches a particular beacon (or other objects in future
 versions).
@@ -412,10 +412,10 @@ The beacon number.
 .RE
 .SS "MARKING, UNMARKING AND IGNORING"
 .LP
-Planes are 
+Planes are
 .B marked
 when they enter the arena.  This means they are displayed in highlighted
-mode on the radar display.  A plane may also be either 
+mode on the radar display.  A plane may also be either
 .B unmarked
 or
 .B ignored.
@@ -425,18 +425,18 @@ plane is drawn in unhighlighted mode, and a line of dashes is displayed in
 the command field of the information area.  The plane will remain this
 way until a mark command has been issued.  Any other command will be issued,
 but the command line will return to a line of dashes when the command
-is completed.  
+is completed.
 .LP
 An
 .B ignored
 plane is treated the same as an unmarked plane, except that it will
-automatically switch to 
+automatically switch to
 .B marked
 status when a delayed command has been processed.  This is useful if
 you want to forget about a plane for a while, but its flight path has
 not yet been completely set.
 .LP
-As with all of the commands, marking, unmarking and ignoring will take effect 
+As with all of the commands, marking, unmarking and ignoring will take effect
 at the beginning of the next update.  Do not be surprised if the plane does
 not immediately switch to unhighlighted mode.
 .SS EXAMPLES
@@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Planes flying at an altitude of 0 crash if they are not over an airport.
 Planes waiting at airports can only be told to take off (climb in altitude).
 .SH "NEW GAMES"
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B Game_List
 file lists the currently available play fields.  New field description
 file names must be placed in this file to be 'playable'.  If a player
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ must be set.  These variables are set with the syntax:
 .IP
 variable = number;
 .LP
-Variable may be one of: 
+Variable may be one of:
 .B update,
 indicating the number of seconds between forced updates;
 .B newplane,
@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ line:	[ (x1 y1) (x2 y2) ] ... ;
 .LP
 For beacons, a simple x, y coordinate pair is used (enclosed in parenthesis).
 Airports and exits require a third value, a direction, which is one
-of 
+of
 .B wedcxzaq.
 For airports, this is the direction that planes must be going to take
 off and land, and for exits, this is the direction that planes will going
@@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ when they
 the arena.  This may not seem intuitive, but as there is no restriction on
 direction of exit, this is appropriate.
 Lines are slightly different, since they need two coordinate pairs to
-specify the line endpoints.  These endpoints must be enclosed in 
+specify the line endpoints.  These endpoints must be enclosed in
 square brackets.
 .LP
 All statements are semi-colon (;) terminated.  Multiple item statements
@@ -528,8 +528,8 @@ and terminate with a newline.
 The coordinates are between zero and width-1 and height-1
 inclusive.  All of the exit coordinates must lie on the borders, and
 all of the beacons and airports must lie inside of the borders.
-Line endpoints may be anywhere within the field, so long as 
-the lines are horizontal, vertical or 
+Line endpoints may be anywhere within the field, so long as
+the lines are horizontal, vertical or
 .B "exactly diagonal."
 .SS "FIELD FILE EXAMPLE"
 .RS
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ line:		[ (  1  1 ) (  6  6 ) ]
 .RE
 .SH FILES
 .LP
-Files are kept in a special directory. See the OPTIONS for a way to 
+Files are kept in a special directory. See the OPTIONS for a way to
 print this path out.
 .TP \w'/usr/share/games/atc/Game_List\ \ \ 'u
 /var/games/atc_score
@@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ of a game written for some unknown PC many years ago, maybe.
 The screen sometimes refreshes after you have quit.
 .LP
 Yet Another Curses Bug was discovered during the development of this game.
-If your curses library clrtobot.o is version 5.1 or earlier, 
+If your curses library clrtobot.o is version 5.1 or earlier,
 you will have erase problems with the backspace operator in the input
 window.
 
diff --git a/games/battlestar/battlestar.6 b/games/battlestar/battlestar.6
index 814c299..72f71bf 100644
--- a/games/battlestar/battlestar.6
+++ b/games/battlestar/battlestar.6
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ heavens...
 		One to bring good luck and simple feats of wonder,
 		Two to wash the lands and churn the waves asunder,
 		Three to rule the world and purge the skies with thunder.
-		
+
 .fi
 .PP
 In those times great wizards were known and their powers were beyond
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ fleet of battlestars was reduced to a single ship.
 	throw  <object> <direction>
 
 	!	<shell esc>
-	
+
 .fi
 .SH "IMPLIED OBJECTS"
 .nf
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ fleet of battlestars was reduced to a single ship.
 	>-: get
 	knife:
 	Taken.
-	
+
 .fi
 .PP
 Notice that the "shadow" of the next word stays around if you
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ always printed in R, L, A, & B relative directions.
 I wrote Battlestar in 1979 in order to experiment with the niceties of
 the C Language.
 Most interesting things that happen in the game are hardwired into the
-code, so don't 
+code, so don't
 send me any hate mail about it!  Instead, enjoy art for art's sake!
 .SH AUTHOR
 David Riggle
diff --git a/games/canfield/canfield/canfield.6 b/games/canfield/canfield/canfield.6
index 0d7c7fe..37de31b 100644
--- a/games/canfield/canfield/canfield.6
+++ b/games/canfield/canfield/canfield.6
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ If you have never played solitaire before, it is recommended
 that you consult a solitaire instruction book. In
 Canfield, tableau cards may be built on each other downward
 in alternate colors. An entire pile must be moved as a unit
-in building. Top cards of the piles are available 
+in building. Top cards of the piles are available
 to be played on foundations, but never into empty spaces.
 .PP
 Spaces must be filled from the stock. The top card of
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ available.
 The command 'c' causes
 .I canfield
 to maintain card counting statistics
-on the bottom of the screen. 
-When properly used this can greatly increase one's chances of 
+on the bottom of the screen.
+When properly used this can greatly increase one's chances of
 winning.
 .PP
 The rules for betting are somewhat less strict than
@@ -114,5 +114,5 @@ It is impossible to cheat.
 .SH AUTHORS
 Originally written: Steve Levine
 .br
-Further random hacking by: Steve Feldman, Kirk McKusick, 
+Further random hacking by: Steve Feldman, Kirk McKusick,
 Mikey Olson, and Eric Allman.
diff --git a/games/factor/factor.6 b/games/factor/factor.6
index 576e952..f5e23e5 100644
--- a/games/factor/factor.6
+++ b/games/factor/factor.6
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ utility prints primes in ascending order, one per line, starting at or above
 and continuing until, but not including
 .B stop.
 The
-.B start 
+.B start
 value must be at least 0 and not greater than
 .B stop.\&
 The
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ The input line must not be longer than 255 characters.
 .B \-h
 Print the results in hexadecimal rather than decimal.
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
-Out of range or invalid input results in `ouch' being 
+Out of range or invalid input results in `ouch' being
 written to standard error.
 .SH BUGS
 .I Factor
diff --git a/games/fortune/fortune/fortune.6 b/games/fortune/fortune/fortune.6
index e0bd604..8d16fb6 100644
--- a/games/fortune/fortune/fortune.6
+++ b/games/fortune/fortune/fortune.6
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ fortune 90% funny 10% not-funny
 .Pp
 will pick out 90% of its fortunes from
 .Em funny
-(the 
+(the
 .Dq 10% not-funny
 is unnecessary, since 10% is all that's left).
 The
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ fortune 50% funny 50% not-funny
 .It Pa /usr/games/fortune
 .Pp
 .It Pa /usr/share/games/fortune/*
-the fortunes databases (those files ending 
+the fortunes databases (those files ending
 .Dq -o
 contain the
 .Bf -symbolic
diff --git a/games/fortune/strfile/strfile.8 b/games/fortune/strfile/strfile.8
index 7c715a4..0ac3090 100644
--- a/games/fortune/strfile/strfile.8
+++ b/games/fortune/strfile/strfile.8
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 .\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993
 .\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
 .\" Ken Arnold.
 .\"
diff --git a/games/morse/morse.6 b/games/morse/morse.6
index 9ae31b0..d22e1dd 100644
--- a/games/morse/morse.6
+++ b/games/morse/morse.6
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Not all prosigns have corresponding characters. Use
 for
 .Em AS ,
 .Ql @
-for 
+for
 .Em SK ,
 .Ql *
 for
diff --git a/games/phantasia/phantasia.6 b/games/phantasia/phantasia.6
index 062f449..ceae5a9 100644
--- a/games/phantasia/phantasia.6
+++ b/games/phantasia/phantasia.6
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ They are:
 .PP
 .TP .5i
 .B \-s
-Invokes 
+Invokes
 .I phantasia
 without header information.
 .TP .5i
@@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ but bigger.
 .TP 1.5i
 .B Type six
 .I priest
-\- rests to maximum; adds 
+\- rests to maximum; adds
 .B mana, brains;
 and halves
 .B sin.
@@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ with a
 and gives bearer first hit on all monsters.
 .br
 .I quicksilver
-\- adds to 
+\- adds to
 .B quickness.
 .TP 1.5i
 .B Type ten
@@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ reaches
 are converted to
 .I gold.
 .PP
-Once a player is king, he/she may do certain things while in 
+Once a player is king, he/she may do certain things while in
 the Lord's Chamber (0,0).  These are exercised with the
 .B decree
 ('0') option.
@@ -980,7 +980,7 @@ The king collects the accrued taxes with this option.
 .PP
 The
 .B king
-may also 
+may also
 .B teleport
 anywhere for free by using the origin as a starting place.
 .sh "Council of the Wise, Valar"
@@ -1044,7 +1044,7 @@ who uses them.
 are essentially immortal, but are actually given five lives.
 If these are used up, the player is left to die, and becomes an
 .B ex-valar.
-A 
+A
 .B valar
 cannot
 .I move, teleport,
@@ -1174,7 +1174,7 @@ is always limited to a maximum of 99.
 .I Books
 bought at a
 .B trading post
-increase 
+increase
 .B brains,
 based upon the number bought.
 It is unwise, however to buy more than 1/10 of one's
diff --git a/games/piano/piano.6 b/games/piano/piano.6
index f6813f28..8078b6c 100644
--- a/games/piano/piano.6
+++ b/games/piano/piano.6
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ to generate
 .It Fl V
 The
 .Fl V
-option is for 
+option is for
 .Nm
 usage.
 .It Fl i Ar string
diff --git a/games/pom/pom.6 b/games/pom/pom.6
index 00dae12..1a5325b 100644
--- a/games/pom/pom.6
+++ b/games/pom/pom.6
@@ -42,5 +42,5 @@ pom \- display the phase of the moon
 The
 .I pom
 utility displays the current phase of the moon.
-Useful for selecting software completion target dates and predicting 
+Useful for selecting software completion target dates and predicting
 managerial behavior.
diff --git a/games/sail/sail.6 b/games/sail/sail.6
index 26787c4..14e71de 100644
--- a/games/sail/sail.6
+++ b/games/sail/sail.6
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ players or the computer.  They may re-enact one of the many
 historical sea battles recorded in the game, or they can choose
 a fictional battle.
 .PP
-As a sea captain in the 
+As a sea captain in the
 .I Sail
 Navy, the player has complete control over the workings of his ship.
 He must order every maneuver, change the set of his sails, and judge the
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ must calculate moves for each ship it controls, the
 more ships the computer is playing, the slower the game will appear.
 .PP
 If a player joins a game in progress, he will synchronize
-with the other players (a rather slow process for everyone), and 
+with the other players (a rather slow process for everyone), and
 then he may play along with the rest.
 .PP
 To implement a multi-user game in Version 7 UNIX, which was the operating
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ shared file.  For example,
 .I Sail
 uses a temporary file named /tmp/#sailsink.21 for scenario 21, and
 corresponding file names for the other scenarios.  To provide exclusive
-access to the temporary file, 
+access to the temporary file,
 .I Sail
 uses a technique stolen from an old game called "pubcaves" by Jeff Cohen.
 Processes do a busy wait in the loop
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Processes do a busy wait in the loop
 .br
 .sp
 until they are able to create a link to a file named "/tmp/#saillock.??".
-The "??" correspond to the scenario number of the game.  Since UNIX 
+The "??" correspond to the scenario number of the game.  Since UNIX
 guarantees that a link will point to only one file, the process that succeeds
 in linking will have exclusive access to the temporary file.
 .PP
@@ -147,10 +147,10 @@ The most noticeable effect this communication has on the game is the
 delay in moving.  Suppose a player types a move for his ship and hits
 return.  What happens then?  The player process saves up messages to
 be written to the temporary file in a buffer.  Every 7 seconds or so, the
-player process gets exclusive access to the temporary file and writes 
+player process gets exclusive access to the temporary file and writes
 out its buffer to the file.  The driver, running asynchronously, must
 read in the movement command, process it, and write out the results.  This
-takes two exclusive accesses to the temporary file.  Finally, when the player 
+takes two exclusive accesses to the temporary file.  Finally, when the player
 process gets around to doing another 7 second update, the results of the
 move are displayed on the screen.  Hence, every movement requires four
 exclusive accesses to the temporary file (anywhere from 7 to 21 seconds
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ sail around quite quickly.
 If the player types several movement commands between two 7 second updates,
 only the last movement command typed will be seen by the driver.  Movement
 commands within the same update "overwrite" each other, in a sense.
-.SH THE HISTORY OF SAIL 
+.SH THE HISTORY OF SAIL
 I wrote the first version of
 .I Sail
 on a PDP 11/70 in the fall of 1980.  Needless to say, the code was horrendous,
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ tremendous rewrite from the top down, I got the first working version up by
 1981.  There were several annoying bugs concerning firing broadsides and
 finding angles.
 .I Sail
-uses no floating point, by the way, so the direction routines are rather 
+uses no floating point, by the way, so the direction routines are rather
 tricky.
 Ed Wang rewrote my angle() routine in 1981 to be more correct (although
 it still doesn't work perfectly), and he added code to let a player select
@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ result was very much cleaner and (?) faster.  He added window movement
 commands and find ship commands.
 .SH HISTORICAL INFO
 Old Square Riggers were very maneuverable ships capable of intricate
-sailing.  Their only disadvantage was an inability to sail very 
+sailing.  Their only disadvantage was an inability to sail very
 close to the wind.  The design of a wooden ship allowed only for the
 guns to bear to the left and right sides.  A few guns of small
 aspect (usually 6 or 9 pounders) could point forward, but their
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ or boat actions.  They could hit hard and get away fast.
 Lastly, there were the corvettes, sloops, and brigs.  These were smaller
 ships mounting typically fewer than 20 guns.  A corvette was only slightly
 smaller than a frigate, so one might have up to 30 guns.  Sloops were used
-for carrying dispatches or passengers.  Brigs were something you built for 
+for carrying dispatches or passengers.  Brigs were something you built for
 land-locked lakes.
 .SH SAIL PARTICULARS
 Ships in
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ the ship, and the other represents the stern.  Ships have nationalities
 and numbers.  The first ship of a nationality is number 0, the second
 number 1, etc.  Therefore, the first British ship in a game would be
 printed as "b0".  The second Brit would be "b1", and the fifth Don
-would be "s4".  
+would be "s4".
 .PP
 Ships can set normal sails, called Battle Sails, or bend on extra canvas
 called Full Sails.  A ship under full sail is a beautiful sight indeed,
@@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ be it 0,1,2,3,4, or 5.  E.g., the "b0" captured by an American becomes the
 The ultimate example is, of course, an exploding Brit captured by an
 American: "#&".
 .SH MOVEMENT
-Movement is the most confusing part of 
+Movement is the most confusing part of
 .I Sail
 to many.  Ships can head in 8 directions:
 .nf
@@ -339,15 +339,15 @@ at all for two turns, it will begin to drift.  If a ship has begun to
 drift, then it must move forward before it turns, if it plans to do
 more than make a right or left turn, which is always possible.
 .PP
-Movement commands to 
+Movement commands to
 .I Sail
 are a string of forward moves and turns.  An example is "l3".  It will
 turn a ship left and then move it ahead 3 spaces.  In the drawing above,
-the "b0" made 7 successive left turns.  When 
+the "b0" made 7 successive left turns.  When
 .I Sail
-prompts you for a move, it prints three characters of import.  E.g., 
+prompts you for a move, it prints three characters of import.  E.g.,
 .nf
-	move (7, 4): 
+	move (7, 4):
 .fi
 The first number is the maximum number of moves you can make,
 including turns.  The second number is the maximum number of turns
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ if you turn closer to the wind, you most likely won't be able to sail the
 full allowance printed in the "move" prompt.
 .PP
 Old sailing captains had to keep an eye constantly on the wind.  Captains
-in 
+in
 .I Sail
 are no different.  A ship's ability to move depends on its attitude to the
 wind.  The best angle possible is to have the wind off your quarter, that is,
@@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ sail speeds are given first, and full sail speeds are given in parenthesis.
 				-^-3(6)
 				/|\\
 				 | 4(7)
-				3(6)  
+				3(6)
 
 .fi
 Pretend the bow of your ship (the "^") is pointing upward and the wind is
@@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ The number of fouls and grapples you have are displayed on the upper
 right of the screen.
 .SH BOARDING
 Boarding was a very costly venture in terms of human life.  Boarding parties
-may be formed in 
+may be formed in
 .I Sail
 to either board an enemy ship or to defend your own ship against attack.
 Men organized as Defensive Boarding Parties fight twice as hard to save
@@ -447,10 +447,10 @@ number of men sent.
 .SH CREW QUALITY
 The British seaman was world renowned for his sailing abilities.  American
 sailors, however, were actually the best seamen in the world.  Because the
-American Navy offered twice the wages of the Royal Navy, British seamen 
+American Navy offered twice the wages of the Royal Navy, British seamen
 who liked the sea defected to America by the thousands.
 .PP
-In 
+In
 .I Sail,
 crew quality is quantized into 5 energy levels.  "Elite" crews can outshoot
 and outfight all other sailors.  "Crack" crews are next.  "Mundane" crews
@@ -483,10 +483,10 @@ ship:
 .nf
 
 			Load  D! R!
-			Hull  9  
+			Hull  9
 			Crew  4  4  2
-			Guns  4  4  
-			Carr  2  2 
+			Guns  4  4
+			Carr  2  2
 			Rigg  5 5 5 5
 
 .fi
@@ -508,14 +508,14 @@ mere opportunity to fire them does not guarantee any hits.  Many factors
 influence the destructive force of a broadside.  First of all, and the chief
 factor, is distance.  It is harder to hit a ship at range ten than it is
 to hit one sloshing alongside.  Next is raking.  Raking fire, as
-mentioned before, 
+mentioned before,
 can sometimes dismast a ship at range ten.  Next, crew size and quality affects
 the damage done by a broadside.   The number of guns firing also bears on the
 point,
 so to speak.  Lastly, weather affects the accuracy of a broadside.  If the
 seas are high (5 or 6), then the lower gunports of ships of the line can't
 even be opened to run out the guns.  This gives frigates and other flush
-decked vessels an advantage in a storm.  The scenario 
+decked vessels an advantage in a storm.  The scenario
 .I Pellew vs. The Droits de L'Homme
 takes advantage of this peculiar circumstance.
 .SH REPAIRS
@@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ Repairs may be made to your Hull, Guns, and Rigging at the slow rate of
 two points per three turns.  The message "Repairs Completed" will be
 printed if no more repairs can be made.
 .SH PECULIARITIES OF COMPUTER SHIPS
-Computer ships in 
+Computer ships in
 .I Sail
 follow all the rules above with a few exceptions.  Computer ships never
 repair damage.  If they did, the players could never beat them.  They
@@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ A.I. distance function and a depth first search to find the maximum "score."
 It seems to work fairly well, although I'll be the first to admit it isn't
 perfect.
 .SH HOW TO PLAY
-Commands are given to 
+Commands are given to
 .I Sail
 by typing a single character.  You will then be prompted for further
 input.  A brief summary of the commands follows.
@@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ input.  A brief summary of the commands follows.
     'f'  Fire broadsides if they bear
     'l'  Reload
     'L'  Unload broadsides (to change ammo)
-    'm'  Move 
+    'm'  Move
     'i'  Print the closest ship
     'I'  Print all ships
     'F'  Find a particular ship or ships (e.g. "a?" for all Americans)
@@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ input.  A brief summary of the commands follows.
 .fi
 .br
 .SH SCENARIOS
-Here is a summary of the scenarios in 
+Here is a summary of the scenarios in
 .I Sail:
 
 .br
@@ -868,7 +868,7 @@ has been a group effort.
 .SH AUTHOR
 Dave Riggle
 .SH CO-AUTHOR
-Ed Wang 
+Ed Wang
 .SH REFITTING
 Craig Leres
 .SH CONSULTANTS
diff --git a/games/wump/wump.6 b/games/wump/wump.6
index 61bf26e..4ad38a8 100644
--- a/games/wump/wump.6
+++ b/games/wump/wump.6
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ wump [-h] [-a arrows] [-b bats] [-p pits] [-r rooms] [-t tunnels]
 .ft R
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The game
-.I wump 
+.I wump
 is based on a fantasy game first presented in the pages of
 .I "People's Computer Company"
 in 1973.
diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/gethostid.3 b/lib/libc/compat-43/gethostid.3
index 837cecf..dcf6250 100644
--- a/lib/libc/compat-43/gethostid.3
+++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/gethostid.3
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ The
 .Fn gethostid
 and
 .Fn sethostid
-syscalls appeared in 
+syscalls appeared in
 .Bx 4.2
 and were dropped in
 .Bx 4.4 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/setruid.3 b/lib/libc/compat-43/setruid.3
index 7c87821..b90656b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/compat-43/setruid.3
+++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/setruid.3
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ The
 .Fn setruid
 and
 .Fn setrgid
-syscalls appeared in 
+syscalls appeared in
 .Bx 4.2
 and were dropped in
 .Bx 4.4 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigpause.2 b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigpause.2
index 516486e..5333315 100644
--- a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigpause.2
+++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigpause.2
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
 .Xr sigsuspend 2 .
 .Pp
 .Fn Sigpause
-assigns 
+assigns
 .Fa sigmask
 to the set of masked signals
 and then waits for a signal to arrive;
diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigsetmask.2 b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigsetmask.2
index 59944d6..305f9d2 100644
--- a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigsetmask.2
+++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigsetmask.2
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This interface is made obsolete by:
 .Fn Sigsetmask
 sets the current signal mask to the specified
 .Fa mask .
-Signals are blocked from delivery if the corresponding bit in 
+Signals are blocked from delivery if the corresponding bit in
 .Fa mask
 is a 1.
 .Fn Sigblock
diff --git a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigvec.2 b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigvec.2
index 1e45736..eb94904 100644
--- a/lib/libc/compat-43/sigvec.2
+++ b/lib/libc/compat-43/sigvec.2
@@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ This interface is made obsolete by sigaction(2).
 .Pp
 The system defines a set of signals that may be delivered to a process.
 Signal delivery resembles the occurrence of a hardware interrupt:
-the signal is blocked from further occurrence, the current process 
+the signal is blocked from further occurrence, the current process
 context is saved, and a new one is built.  A process may specify a
 .Em handler
-to which a signal is delivered, or specify that a signal is to be 
+to which a signal is delivered, or specify that a signal is to be
 .Em blocked
 or
 .Em ignored .
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Signal routines execute with the signal that caused their
 invocation
 .Em blocked ,
 but other signals may yet occur.
-A global 
+A global
 .Em "signal mask"
 defines the set of signals currently blocked from delivery
 to a process.  The signal mask for a process is initialized
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ signals pending for the process.  If the signal is not currently
 .Em blocked
 by the process then it is delivered to the process.  When a signal
 is delivered, the current state of the process is saved,
-a new signal mask is calculated (as described below), 
+a new signal mask is calculated (as described below),
 and the signal handler is invoked.  The call to the handler
 is arranged so that if the signal handling routine returns
 normally the process will resume execution in the context
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ or
 .Xr sigsetmask 2
 call is made).
 This mask is formed by taking the current signal mask,
-adding the signal to be delivered, and 
+adding the signal to be delivered, and
 .Em or Ns 'ing
 in the signal mask associated with the handler to be invoked.
 .Pp
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ the system will deliver the signal to the process on a
 .Em "signal stack" ,
 specified with
 .Xr sigaltstack 2 .
-If 
+If
 .Fa ovec
 is non-zero, the previous handling information for the signal
 is returned to the user.
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Ignored signals remain ignored;
 the signal mask remains the same;
 signals that interrupt system calls continue to do so.
 .Sh NOTES
-The mask specified in 
+The mask specified in
 .Fa vec
 is not allowed to block
 .Dv SIGKILL
@@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ of the following occurs:
 .It Bq Er EFAULT
 Either
 .Fa vec
-or 
+or
 .Fa ovec
 points to memory that is not a valid part of the process
 address space.
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ struct sigcontext *scp;
 Here
 .Fa sig
 is the signal number, into which the hardware faults and traps are
-mapped as defined below. 
+mapped as defined below.
 .Fa Code
 is a parameter that is either a constant
 as given below or, for compatibility mode faults, the code provided by
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/exec.3 b/lib/libc/gen/exec.3
index e8f6403..6d7e80c 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/exec.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/exec.3
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ The search path is the path specified in the environment by
 .Dq Ev PATH
 variable.
 If this variable isn't specified,
-the default path is set according to the 
+the default path is set according to the
 .Dv _PATH_DEFPATH
 definition in
 .Aq paths.h ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/getprogname.3 b/lib/libc/gen/getprogname.3
index 7422595..ea9c353 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/getprogname.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/getprogname.3
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 2001 Christopher G. Demetriou
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
 .\"          information about NetBSD.
 .\" 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/glob.3 b/lib/libc/gen/glob.3
index efc413c..5c2da21 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/glob.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/glob.3
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ was set or
 returned non-zero.
 .It Dv GLOB_LIMIT
 The flag
-.Dv GLOB_MAXPATH 
+.Dv GLOB_MAXPATH
 was provided, and the specified limit passed to
 .Fn glob
 in
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sem_destroy.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sem_destroy.3
index 4074adc..0de4691 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/sem_destroy.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/sem_destroy.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_DESTROY 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sem_getvalue.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sem_getvalue.3
index e9ac2a6..3ee947a 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/sem_getvalue.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/sem_getvalue.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_GETVALUE 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sem_init.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sem_init.3
index a727fe2..5f43c08 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/sem_init.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/sem_init.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_INIT 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sem_open.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sem_open.3
index 22229b3..eec5a57 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/sem_open.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/sem_open.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,14 +24,14 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_OPEN 3
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm sem_open , 
-.Nm sem_close , 
+.Nm sem_open ,
+.Nm sem_close ,
 .Nm sem_unlink
 .Nd named semaphore operations
 .Sh LIBRARY
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sem_post.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sem_post.3
index 970550d..0c8dea4 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/sem_post.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/sem_post.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_POST 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/sem_wait.3 b/lib/libc/gen/sem_wait.3
index beff2e3..397cbfe 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/sem_wait.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/sem_wait.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,13 +24,13 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_WAIT 3
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm sem_wait , 
+.Nm sem_wait ,
 .Nm sem_trywait
 .Nd decrement (lock) a semaphore
 .Sh LIBRARY
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/setproctitle.3 b/lib/libc/gen/setproctitle.3
index a09d539..96fbc5a 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/setproctitle.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/setproctitle.3
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ source code by
 .Sh BUGS
 Never pass a string with user-supplied data as a format without using
 .Ql %s .
-An attacker can put format specifiers in the string to mangle your stack, 
+An attacker can put format specifiers in the string to mangle your stack,
 leading to a possible security hole.
 This holds true even if the string was built using a function like
 .Fn snprintf ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/gen/syslog.3 b/lib/libc/gen/syslog.3
index 18dd3cb..6852bc0 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gen/syslog.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gen/syslog.3
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ functions appeared in
 .Sh BUGS
 Never pass a string with user-supplied data as a format without using
 .Ql %s .
-An attacker can put format specifiers in the string to mangle your stack, 
+An attacker can put format specifiers in the string to mangle your stack,
 leading to a possible security hole.
 This holds true even if the string was built using a function like
 .Fn snprintf ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/gmon/moncontrol.3 b/lib/libc/gmon/moncontrol.3
index 1273824..1966d72 100644
--- a/lib/libc/gmon/moncontrol.3
+++ b/lib/libc/gmon/moncontrol.3
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ to resume the collection of histogram ticks and call counts use
 .Fn moncontrol 1 .
 This feature allows the cost of particular operations to be measured.
 Note that an output file will be produced on program exit
-regardless of the state of 
+regardless of the state of
 .Fn moncontrol .
 .Pp
 Programs that are not loaded with
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ the lowest address sampled is that of
 .Fa lowpc
 and the highest is just below
 .Fa highpc .
-Only functions in that range that have been compiled with the 
+Only functions in that range that have been compiled with the
 .Fl pg
 option to
 .Xr cc 1
diff --git a/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_get_ioperm.2 b/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_get_ioperm.2
index aad357b..27b38c7 100644
--- a/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_get_ioperm.2
+++ b/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_get_ioperm.2
@@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ and the number of contiguous entries will be returned in
 .Pp
 .Fn i386_set_ioperm
 will set access to a range of I/O ports described by the
-.Fa start 
-and 
+.Fa start
+and
 .Fa length
 arguments to the state specified by the
 .Fa enable
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ and
 will fail if:
 .Bl -tag -width Er
 .It Bq Er EINVAL
-An invalid range was specified by the  
+An invalid range was specified by the
 .Fa start
 or
 .Fa length
diff --git a/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_get_ldt.2 b/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_get_ldt.2
index c1e9584..5b6070e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_get_ldt.2
+++ b/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_get_ldt.2
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ LDT.
 Both routines accept a starting selector number
 .Fa start_sel
 , an array of memory that
-will contain the descriptors to be set or returned 
+will contain the descriptors to be set or returned
 .Fa descs
 , and the number of entries to set or return
 .Fa num_sels .
diff --git a/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_set_watch.3 b/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_set_watch.3
index a85ae85..6c49cbe 100644
--- a/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_set_watch.3
+++ b/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_set_watch.3
@@ -55,9 +55,9 @@ parameters.  The
 argument specifies which watch register is used, 0, 1, 2, 3, or -1.  If
 .Fa watchnum
 is -1, a free watch register is found and used.  If there are no free
-watch registers, an error code of -1 is returned.  
+watch registers, an error code of -1 is returned.
 .Fa Watchaddr
-specifies the watch address, 
+specifies the watch address,
 .Fa size
 specifies the size in bytes of the area to be watched (1, 2, or 4 bytes),
 and
diff --git a/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_vm86.2 b/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_vm86.2
index fd9c89e..3c85ade 100644
--- a/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_vm86.2
+++ b/lib/libc/i386/sys/i386_vm86.2
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ it will be dispatched by the vm86 interrupt table.
 .\" .It Dv VM86_INTCALL
 .El
 .Pp
-vm86 mode is entered by calling 
+vm86 mode is entered by calling
 .Xr sigreturn 2
 with the correct machine context for vm86, and with the
 .Em PSL_VM
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/euc.4 b/lib/libc/locale/euc.4
index ce319ba..548d9ca 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/euc.4
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/euc.4
@@ -42,18 +42,18 @@
 .Nm euc
 .Nd EUC encoding of runes
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm ENCODING 
+.Nm ENCODING
 .Qq EUC
 .Pp
 .Nm VARIABLE
-.Ar len1 
-.Ar mask1 
-.Ar len2 
-.Ar mask2 
-.Ar len3 
-.Ar mask3 
-.Ar len4 
-.Ar mask4 
+.Ar len1
+.Ar mask1
+.Ar len2
+.Ar mask2
+.Ar len3
+.Ar mask3
+.Ar len4
+.Ar mask4
 .Ar mask
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ A multibyte character in the fourth codeset consists of
 .Ar len4
 bytes starting with the byte 0x8f.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Ev rune_t
 encoding of
 .Nm EUC
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/euc.5 b/lib/libc/locale/euc.5
index ce319ba..548d9ca 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/euc.5
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/euc.5
@@ -42,18 +42,18 @@
 .Nm euc
 .Nd EUC encoding of runes
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm ENCODING 
+.Nm ENCODING
 .Qq EUC
 .Pp
 .Nm VARIABLE
-.Ar len1 
-.Ar mask1 
-.Ar len2 
-.Ar mask2 
-.Ar len3 
-.Ar mask3 
-.Ar len4 
-.Ar mask4 
+.Ar len1
+.Ar mask1
+.Ar len2
+.Ar mask2
+.Ar len3
+.Ar mask3
+.Ar len4
+.Ar mask4
 .Ar mask
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ A multibyte character in the fourth codeset consists of
 .Ar len4
 bytes starting with the byte 0x8f.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Ev rune_t
 encoding of
 .Nm EUC
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/isalnum.3 b/lib/libc/locale/isalnum.3
index 4a69ff9..6b239aa 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/isalnum.3
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/isalnum.3
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn isalnum
-function tests for any character for which 
+function tests for any character for which
 .Xr isalpha 3
 or
 .Xr isdigit 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/isalpha.3 b/lib/libc/locale/isalpha.3
index 80953cd..54d7e206 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/isalpha.3
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/isalpha.3
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 .Lb libc
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <ctype.h>
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn isalpha "int c"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/isascii.3 b/lib/libc/locale/isascii.3
index 027f794..0a67f79 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/isascii.3
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/isascii.3
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ The
 .Fn isascii
 function tests for an
 .Tn ASCII
-character, which is any character 
+character, which is any character
 between 0 and octal 0177 inclusive.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr ctype 3 ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/mbrune.3 b/lib/libc/locale/mbrune.3
index 680b01e..959f839 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/mbrune.3
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/mbrune.3
@@ -133,11 +133,11 @@ if the character does not appear in the string.
 The
 .Fn mbmb
 function
-returns a pointer to the 
+returns a pointer to the
 .Fa pattern ,
 or
 .Dv NULL
-if the 
+if the
 .Fa pattern
 does not appear in the string.
 .Sh "SEE ALSO
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/multibyte.3 b/lib/libc/locale/multibyte.3
index a78a4a2..52ee84e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/multibyte.3
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/multibyte.3
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ the result in
 .Fa mbchar .
 The object pointed to by
 .Fa mbchar
-must be large enough to accommodate the multibyte character.  
+must be large enough to accommodate the multibyte character.
 .Pp
 The
 .Fn mbstowcs
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/rune.3 b/lib/libc/locale/rune.3
index a945274..04bbdc7 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/rune.3
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/rune.3
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ will point to
 If there is an encoding error at the start of
 .Fa string ,
 .Dv _INVALID_RUNE
-is returned and 
+is returned and
 .Fa *result
 will point to the second character of
 .Fa string .
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ is not
 .Fa *result
 will be set to
 .Dv NULL .
-In all cases, 
+In all cases,
 .Fn sputrune
 will return the number of bytes which would be needed to store
 .Fa rune
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ The
 .Fn fgetrune
 function operates the same as
 .Fn sgetrune
-with the exception that it attempts to read enough bytes from 
+with the exception that it attempts to read enough bytes from
 .Fa stream
 to decode a single rune.  It returns either
 .Dv EOF
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ function pushes the multibyte encoding, as provided by
 of
 .Fa rune
 onto
-.Fa stream 
+.Fa stream
 such that the next
 .Fn fgetrune
 call will return
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ as a multibyte string.
 .Bl -tag -width /usr/share/locale/locale/LC_CTYPE -compact
 .It Pa $PATH_LOCALE/ Ns Em locale Ns /LC_CTYPE
 .It Pa /usr/share/locale/ Ns Em locale Ns /LC_CTYPE
-binary LC_CTYPE file for the locale 
+binary LC_CTYPE file for the locale
 .Em locale .
 .El
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/setlocale.3 b/lib/libc/locale/setlocale.3
index 5c1659a..8f987e6 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/setlocale.3
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/setlocale.3
@@ -286,9 +286,9 @@ or
 .Bl -tag -width /usr/share/locale/locale/category -compact
 .It Pa $PATH_LOCALE/ Ns Em locale/category
 .It Pa /usr/share/locale/ Ns Em locale/category
-locale file for the locale 
+locale file for the locale
 .Em locale
-and the category 
+and the category
 .Em category .
 .El
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/lib/libc/locale/toupper.3 b/lib/libc/locale/toupper.3
index 337a205..f9734e2 100644
--- a/lib/libc/locale/toupper.3
+++ b/lib/libc/locale/toupper.3
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn toupper
-function converts a lower-case letter to the corresponding 
+function converts a lower-case letter to the corresponding
 upper-case letter.
 For single C
 .Va char Ns s
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/addr2ascii.3 b/lib/libc/net/addr2ascii.3
index ced7349..b9f6fa9 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/addr2ascii.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/addr2ascii.3
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\" no representations about the suitability of this software for any
 .\" purpose.  It is provided "as is" without express or implied
 .\" warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY M.I.T. ``AS IS''.  M.I.T. DISCLAIMS
 .\" ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ inet_ntoa(struct in_addr addr)
 int
 inet_aton(const char *ascii, struct in_addr *addr)
 {
-	return (ascii2addr(AF_INET, ascii, addr) 
+	return (ascii2addr(AF_INET, ascii, addr)
 	    == sizeof(*addr));
 }
 .Ed
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/byteorder.3 b/lib/libc/net/byteorder.3
index 0785911..cae00a7 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/byteorder.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/byteorder.3
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ and
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Nm byteorder
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
 .Sh BUGS
 On the
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/ethers.3 b/lib/libc/net/ethers.3
index a1dc7a1..6a9ea552 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/ethers.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/ethers.3
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ and
 functions map ethernet addresses to their corresponding hostnames
 as specified in the
 .Pa /etc/ethers
-database. 
+database.
 .Fn ether_ntohost
 converts from ethernet address to hostname, and
 .Fn ether_hostton
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ structure
 and the hostname in the supplied string
 .Ar h .
 .Pp
-On success, 
+On success,
 .Fn ether_ntoa
 returns a pointer to a string containing an
 .Tn ASCII
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/gethostbyname.3 b/lib/libc/net/gethostbyname.3
index 0c3772e..7d78f96 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/gethostbyname.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/gethostbyname.3
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ If the
 flag is non-zero,
 this sets the option to send all queries to the name server using
 .Tn TCP
-and to retain the connection after each call to 
+and to retain the connection after each call to
 .Fn gethostbyname ,
 .Fn gethostbyname2
 or
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ if ((hp = gethostbyaddr((const char *)&ip,
 printf("name associated with %s is %s\en", ipstr, hp->h_name);
 .Ed
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-Error return status from 
+Error return status from
 .Fn gethostbyname ,
 .Fn gethostbyname2
 and
@@ -277,8 +277,8 @@ A retry at some later time may succeed.
 Some unexpected server failure was encountered.
 This is a non-recoverable error.
 .It Dv NO_DATA
-The requested name is valid but does not have an IP address; 
-this is not a temporary error.  
+The requested name is valid but does not have an IP address;
+this is not a temporary error.
 This means that the name is known to the name server but there is no address
 associated with this name.
 Another type of request to the name server using this domain name
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ closes the file.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Fn herror
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
 The
 .Fn endhostent ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/getnetent.3 b/lib/libc/net/getnetent.3
index 92e4970..23e90ae 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/getnetent.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/getnetent.3
@@ -66,14 +66,14 @@ functions
 each return a pointer to an object with the
 following structure describing an internet network.
 This structure contains either the information obtained
-from the nameserver, 
+from the nameserver,
 .Xr named 8 ,
 broken-out fields of a line in the network data base
 .Pa /etc/networks ,
 or entries supplied by the
-.Xr yp 4 
+.Xr yp 4
 system.  The order of the lookups is controlled by the
-`networks' entry in 
+`networks' entry in
 .Xr nsswitch.conf 5 .
 .Pp
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ function
 opens and rewinds the file.  If the
 .Fa stayopen
 flag is non-zero,
-the net data base will not be closed after each call to 
+the net data base will not be closed after each call to
 .Fn getnetbyname
 or
 .Fn getnetbyaddr .
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ The
 .Fn setnetent ,
 and
 .Fn endnetent
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
 .Sh BUGS
 The data space used by
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/getprotoent.3 b/lib/libc/net/getprotoent.3
index a24d995..d073ac0 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/getprotoent.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/getprotoent.3
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ function
 opens and rewinds the file.  If the
 .Fa stayopen
 flag is non-zero,
-the net data base will not be closed after each call to 
+the net data base will not be closed after each call to
 .Fn getprotobyname
 or
 .Fn getprotobynumber .
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ The
 .Fn setprotoent ,
 and
 .Fn endprotoent
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
 .Sh BUGS
 These functions use a static data space;
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/getservent.3 b/lib/libc/net/getservent.3
index e1569d45..5a0258e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/getservent.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/getservent.3
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <netdb.h>
 .Ft struct servent *
-.Fn getservent 
+.Fn getservent
 .Ft struct servent *
 .Fn getservbyname "const char *name" "const char *proto"
 .Ft struct servent *
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ function
 opens and rewinds the file.  If the
 .Fa stayopen
 flag is non-zero,
-the net data base will not be closed after each call to 
+the net data base will not be closed after each call to
 .Fn getservbyname
 or
 .Fn getservbyport .
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ or until
 .Dv EOF
 is encountered.
 If a protocol name is also supplied (non-
-.Dv NULL ) , 
+.Dv NULL ) ,
 searches must also match the protocol.
 .Sh FILES
 .Bl -tag -width /etc/services -compact
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ The
 .Fn setservent ,
 and
 .Fn endservent
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
 .Sh BUGS
 These functions use static data storage;
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/inet.3 b/lib/libc/net/inet.3
index 99e7791..f9ce2c6 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/inet.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/inet.3
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
 .Fd #include <sys/socket.h>
 .Fd #include <netinet/in.h>
 .Fd #include <arpa/inet.h>
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn inet_aton "const char *cp" "struct in_addr *pin"
 .Ft in_addr_t
 .Fn inet_addr "const char *cp"
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
 .Fn inet_ntop "int af" "const void *src" "char *dst" "size_t size"
 .Ft int
 .Fn inet_pton "int af" "const char *src" "void *dst"
-.Ft struct in_addr 
+.Ft struct in_addr
 .Fn inet_makeaddr "in_addr_t net" "in_addr_t lna"
 .Ft in_addr_t
 .Fn inet_lnaof "struct in_addr in"
@@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ This is a narrower input set than that accepted by
 .Fn inet_aton .
 .Sh HISTORY
 These
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
 .Sh BUGS
 The value
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/inet6_option_space.3 b/lib/libc/net/inet6_option_space.3
index 8236548..c2338fc 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/inet6_option_space.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/inet6_option_space.3
@@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ called for a given ancillary data object,
 .Fa *tptrp
 must be set to
 .Dv NULL .
-.Pp 
+.Pp
 Each time this function returns success,
 .Fa *tptrp
 points to the 8-bit
@@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ return
 .Li -1
 setting
 .Fa *tptrp
-to non 
+to non
 .Dv NULL
 value.
 .\"
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/iso_addr.3 b/lib/libc/net/iso_addr.3
index 5f825c0..4bc3ed1 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/iso_addr.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/iso_addr.3
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ addresses and returns
 .Tn ASCII
 strings representing NSAPs (network service
 access points) in a
-notation inverse to that accepted by 
+notation inverse to that accepted by
 .Fn iso_addr .
 .Pp
 Unfortunately, no universal standard exists for representing
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ The
 .Fn iso_addr
 and
 .Fn iso_ntoa
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 Reno .
 .Sh BUGS
 The returned values
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/linkaddr.3 b/lib/libc/net/linkaddr.3
index 23932cb..7631c4a 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/linkaddr.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/linkaddr.3
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ The
 .Fn link_addr
 and
 .Fn link_ntoa
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 Reno  .
 .Sh BUGS
 The returned values for link_ntoa
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/ns.3 b/lib/libc/net/ns.3
index 4d545e3..e8cc2ec 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/ns.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/ns.3
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ address conversion routines
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <sys/types.h>
 .Fd #include <netns/ns.h>
-.Ft struct ns_addr 
+.Ft struct ns_addr
 .Fn ns_addr "char *cp"
 .Ft char *
 .Fn ns_ntoa "struct ns_addr ns"
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ notation in common use in the Xerox Development Environment:
 .Ed
 .Pp
 Trailing zero fields are suppressed, and each number is printed in hexadecimal,
-in a format suitable for input to 
+in a format suitable for input to
 .Fn ns_addr .
 Any fields lacking super-decimal digits will have a
 trailing
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ The
 .Fn ns_addr
 and
 .Fn ns_toa
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
 .Sh BUGS
 The string returned by
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/nsdispatch.3 b/lib/libc/net/nsdispatch.3
index 7ed6345..8d7a686 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/nsdispatch.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/nsdispatch.3
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn nsdispatch
-function invokes the callback functions specified in 
+function invokes the callback functions specified in
 .Va dtab
 in the order given in
 .Pa /etc/nsswitch.conf
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ The last entry in
 should contain
 .Dv NULL
 values for
-.Va src , 
+.Va src ,
 .Va cb ,
 and
 .Va cb_data .
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ For each default source type, an entry with
 set to the name of the source, and
 .Va flags
 set to the relevant flags
-(usually 
+(usually
 .Dv NS_SUCCESS ;
 refer to
 .Sx Callback return values
@@ -203,9 +203,9 @@ The
 routines first appeared in
 .Fx 4.1 .
 They were imported from the
-.Nx 
+.Nx
 Project,
-where they appeared first in 
+where they appeared first in
 .Nx 1.4 .
 .Sh AUTHORS
 Luke Mewburn
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/rcmd.3 b/lib/libc/net/rcmd.3
index abc6017..08b6e72 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/rcmd.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/rcmd.3
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ If the connection succeeds,
 a socket in the Internet domain of type
 .Dv SOCK_STREAM
 is returned to the caller, and given to the remote
-command as 
+command as
 .Em stdin
 and
 .Em stdout .
@@ -122,10 +122,10 @@ signal numbers, to be
 forwarded to the process group of the command.
 If
 .Fa fd2p
-is 0, then the 
+is 0, then the
 .Em stderr
 (unit 2 of the remote
-command) will be made the same as the 
+command) will be made the same as the
 .Em stdout
 and no
 provision is made for sending arbitrary signals to the remote process,
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ The
 .Fn rresvport
 function is used to obtain a socket to which an address with a Privileged
 Internet port is bound.
-This socket is suitable for use by 
+This socket is suitable for use by
 .Fn rcmd
 and several other functions.
 Privileged Internet ports are those in the range 0 to 1023.
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ is overloaded to mean ``All network ports in use.''
 .Re
 .Sh HISTORY
 Most of these
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
 .Fn rresvport_af
 appeared in RFC2292, and was implemented by the WIDE project
diff --git a/lib/libc/net/resolver.3 b/lib/libc/net/resolver.3
index 4870992..2771e9b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/net/resolver.3
+++ b/lib/libc/net/resolver.3
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@
 .Fa "int anslen"
 .Fc
 .Ft int
-.Fn res_init 
+.Fn res_init
 .Ft int
 .Fo dn_comp
 .Fa "const char *exp_dn"
@@ -418,5 +418,5 @@ see
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Nm
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/nls/catclose.3 b/lib/libc/nls/catclose.3
index 0fcbfe9..c29b45d 100644
--- a/lib/libc/nls/catclose.3
+++ b/lib/libc/nls/catclose.3
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn catclose
-function closes the message catalog specified by the argument 
+function closes the message catalog specified by the argument
 .Fa catd .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 .Rv -std catclose
diff --git a/lib/libc/nls/catgets.3 b/lib/libc/nls/catgets.3
index fda5f36..f566abb 100644
--- a/lib/libc/nls/catgets.3
+++ b/lib/libc/nls/catgets.3
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm catgets
-.Nd retrieve string from message catalog 
+.Nd retrieve string from message catalog
 .Sh LIBRARY
 .Lb libc
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
@@ -40,20 +40,20 @@
 .Ft char *
 .Fn catgets "nl_catd catd" "int set_id" "int msg_id" "const char *s"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
-.Fn catgets 
+The
+.Fn catgets
 function attempts to retrieve message
 .Fa msg_id
 of set
 .Fa set_id
 from the message catalog referenced by the descriptor
 .Fa catd .
-The argument 
+The argument
 .Fa s
 points to a default message which is returned if the function
 is unable to retrieve the specified message.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-If the specified message was retrieved successfully, 
+If the specified message was retrieved successfully,
 .Fn catgets
 returns a pointer to an internal buffer containing the message string;
 otherwise it returns
diff --git a/lib/libc/nls/catopen.3 b/lib/libc/nls/catopen.3
index 68cf893..4c0dccc 100644
--- a/lib/libc/nls/catopen.3
+++ b/lib/libc/nls/catopen.3
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm catopen
-.Nd open message catalog 
+.Nd open message catalog
 .Sh LIBRARY
 .Lb libc
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
@@ -40,21 +40,21 @@
 .Ft nl_catd
 .Fn catopen "const char *name" "int oflag"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Fn catopen
 function opens the message catalog specified by
-.Fa name 
+.Fa name
 and returns a message catalog descriptor.
 If
 .Fa name
 contains a
-.Sq / 
-then 
+.Sq /
+then
 .Fa name
-specifies the full pathname for the message catalog, otherwise the value 
+specifies the full pathname for the message catalog, otherwise the value
 of the environment variable
-.Ev NLSPATH 
-is used with 
+.Ev NLSPATH
+is used with
 the following substitutions:
 .Bl -tag -width XXX
 .It \&%N
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ environment variable or from the
 .Dv LC_MESSAGES
 category.
 .It \&%%
-A single % character. 
+A single % character.
 .El
 .Pp
 An empty string is substituted for undefined values.
@@ -124,11 +124,11 @@ until a successful call to one of the
 .Xr exec 3
 function.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-Upon successful completion, 
+Upon successful completion,
 .Fn catopen
 returns a message catalog descriptor.
 Otherwise, (nl_catd) -1 is returned and
-.Va errno 
+.Va errno
 is set to indicate the error.
 .Sh ERRORS
 .Bl -tag -width Er
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl.3
index 39822b8..6f74b8b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl.3
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ POSIX.1e is described in IEEE POSIX.1e draft 17.
 Discussion of the draft continues on the cross-platform POSIX.1e
 implementation mailing list.
 To join this list, see the
-.Fx 
+.Fx
 POSIX.1e implementation page for more information.
 .Sh HISTORY
 POSIX.1e support was introduced in
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_delete.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_delete.3
index 2aa3f15..2b21bf9 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_delete.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_delete.3
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ The file system is read-only.
 POSIX.1e is described in IEEE POSIX.1e draft 17.  Discussion
 of the draft continues on the cross-platform POSIX.1e implementation
 mailing list.  To join this list, see the
-.Fx 
+.Fx
 POSIX.1e implementation
 page for more information.
 .Sh HISTORY
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_from_text.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_from_text.3
index 578e3f7..13a1f42 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_from_text.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_from_text.3
@@ -111,12 +111,12 @@ rely on the
 library calls to manage username and uid mapping, as well as the
 .Xr getgrent 3
 library calls to manage groupname and gid mapping.  These calls are not
-thread safe, and so transitively, neither are 
+thread safe, and so transitively, neither are
 .Fn acl_from_text
 and
 .Fn acl_to_text .
 These functions may also interfere with stateful
-calls associated with the 
+calls associated with the
 .Fn getpwent
 and
 .Fn getgrent
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_get.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_get.3
index ee8ab54..5121d1a 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_get.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_get.3
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ The
 and
 .Fn acl_get_fd_np
 each allow the retrieval of an ACL from a file.
-.Fn acl_get_file 
+.Fn acl_get_file
 is a POSIX.1e call that allows the retrieval of a
 specified type of ACL from a file by name;
-.Fn acl_get_fd 
+.Fn acl_get_fd
 is a POSIX.1e call that allows the retrieval of an ACL of type
 ACL_TYPE_ACCESS
 from a file descriptor.
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_set.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_set.3
index 12abb92..17a8db0 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_set.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_set.3
@@ -53,13 +53,13 @@ and
 each associate an ACL with an object referred to by
 .Va fd
 or
-.Va path_p .  
+.Va path_p .
 All except
 .Fn acl_set_fd_np
 are POSIX.1e calls--
 .Fn acl_set_fd
 allows only the setting of ACLs of type ACL_TYPE_ACCESS
-where as 
+where as
 .Fn acl_set_fd_np
 allows the setting of ACLs of any type.
 .Sh IMPLEMENTATION NOTES
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_to_text.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_to_text.3
index b28fd59..eb990a2 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_to_text.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_to_text.3
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .Ft char *
 .Fn acl_to_text "acl_t acl" "ssize_t *len_p"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Fn acl_to_text
 function translates the ACL pointed to by argument
 .Va acl
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_valid.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_valid.3
index 1418d3c..a395df6 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_valid.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/acl_valid.3
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ then one ACL_MASK entry shall also be required.  The ACL
 shall contain at most on ACL_MASK entry.
 .Pp
 The qualifier field shall be unique among all entries of
-the same POSIX.1e ACL facility defined tag type.  The 
+the same POSIX.1e ACL facility defined tag type.  The
 tag type field shall contain valid values including any
 implementation-defined values.  Validation of the values
 of the qualifier field is implementation-defined.
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ of the qualifier field is implementation-defined.
 The POSIX.1e
 .Fn acl_valid
 function may reorder the ACL for the purposes of verification; the
-non-portable validation functions will not.  
+non-portable validation functions will not.
 .Sh IMPLEMENTATION NOTES
 .Fx Ns 's
 support for POSIX.1e interfaces and features is still under
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap.3
index 26d977e..0aa782b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap.3
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This function is described in
 .Xr cap_free 3 ,
 and may be used to free a capability structure.
 .It Fn cap_from_text
-This function is described in 
+This function is described in
 .Xr cap_from_text 3 ,
 and may be used to convert a text-form capability to its internal
 representation.
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ ACLs are available, this capability overrides the ACL execute access
 restrictions when accessing an object.
 .It Dv CAP_DAC_WRITE
 This capability overrides file mode write access restrictions when access an
-object, and, if 
+object, and, if
 .Xr posix1e 3
 ACLs are available, this capability also overrides the ACL write access
 restrictions when accessing an object.
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ capability set when invoking
 .It Dv CAP_SYS_SETFFLAG
 This capability overrides the restriction that a process cannot manipulate
 the system file flags on a file system object.
-For portability, equivilent to 
+For portability, equivilent to
 .Dv CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE .
 .It Dv CAP_NET_BIND_SERVICE
 This capability overrides network namespace restrictions on process's
@@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ configure, or disable system process accounting.
 .It Dv CAP_SYS_ADMIN
 .It Dv CAP_SYS_BOOT
 This capability overrides the restriction that a process cannot invoke
-the 
+the
 .Xr boot 2
 system call.
 .It Dv CAP_SYS_NICE
@@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ use in the short term.
 POSIX.1e is described in IEEE POSIX.1e draft 17.  Discussion
 of the draft continues on the cross-platform POSIX.1e implementation
 mailing list.  To join this list, see the
-.Fx 
+.Fx
 POSIX.1e implementation
 page for more information.
 .Sh HISTORY
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_clear.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_clear.3
index 97c7958..5f305cb 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_clear.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_clear.3
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
-.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities 
+.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities
 .\"
 .Dd April 1, 2000
 .Dt CAP_CLEAR 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_dup.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_dup.3
index 0f29656..9ea0396 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_dup.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_dup.3
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
-.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities 
+.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities
 .\"
 .Dd April 1, 2000
 .Dt CAP_DUP 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_free.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_free.3
index 03a62d4..3f6e192 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_free.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_free.3
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
-.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities 
+.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities
 .\"
 .Dd April 1, 2000
 .Dt CAP_FREE 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_get_flag.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_get_flag.3
index beb3f6e..1f8ab20 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_get_flag.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_get_flag.3
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
-.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities 
+.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities
 .\"
 .Dd April 1, 2000
 .Dt CAP_GET_FLAG 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_get_proc.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_get_proc.3
index 67ff185..2ebf5c8 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_get_proc.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_get_proc.3
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
-.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities 
+.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities
 .\"
 .Dd April 1, 2000
 .Dt CAP_GET_PROC 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_init.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_init.3
index 7705bc5..753ced9 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_init.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_init.3
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
-.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities 
+.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities
 .\"
 .Dd April 1, 2000
 .Dt CAP_INIT 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_set_flag.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_set_flag.3
index 641439a..ef74d10 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_set_flag.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_set_flag.3
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
-.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities 
+.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities
 .\"
 .Dd April 1, 2000
 .Dt CAP_SET_FLAG 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_set_proc.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_set_proc.3
index b0b78b8..f3dfae3 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_set_proc.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_set_proc.3
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
-.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities 
+.\" TrustedBSD Project - support for POSIX.1e process capabilities
 .\"
 .Dd April 1, 2000
 .Dt CAP_SET_PROC 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_to_text.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_to_text.3
index 22feeff..ea6b522 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_to_text.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/cap_to_text.3
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 .\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
 .\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
 .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.  
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
diff --git a/lib/libc/posix1e/posix1e.3 b/lib/libc/posix1e/posix1e.3
index 05304f8..7c8af19 100644
--- a/lib/libc/posix1e/posix1e.3
+++ b/lib/libc/posix1e/posix1e.3
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Access Control are in the wings, and Information Flow Labels are not on
 the calendar.
 .Pp
 POSIX.1e defines both syntax and semantics for these features, but fairly
-substantial changes are required to implement these features in the 
+substantial changes are required to implement these features in the
 operating system.  As shipped,
 .Fx 4.0
 permits file systems to export
diff --git a/lib/libc/regex/re_format.7 b/lib/libc/regex/re_format.7
index b6fb9de..2b6655c 100644
--- a/lib/libc/regex/re_format.7
+++ b/lib/libc/regex/re_format.7
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ and
 stands for the
 sequence of characters of that collating element.
 The sequence is a single element of the bracket expression's list.
-A bracket expression containing a multi-character collating element 
+A bracket expression containing a multi-character collating element
 can thus match more than one character,
 e.g. if the collating sequence includes a
 .Ql ch
@@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ RE or the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression
 Finally, there is one new type of atom, a
 .Em back reference :
 .Ql \e
-followed by a non-zero decimal digit 
+followed by a non-zero decimal digit
 .Em d
 matches the same sequence of characters
 matched by the
diff --git a/lib/libc/rpc/bindresvport.3 b/lib/libc/rpc/bindresvport.3
index bfb011e..e3996ea 100644
--- a/lib/libc/rpc/bindresvport.3
+++ b/lib/libc/rpc/bindresvport.3
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ may also fail and set
 for any of the errors specified for the calls
 .Xr bind 2 ,
 .Xr getsockopt 2 ,
-or 
+or
 .Xr setsockopt 2 .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr bind 2 ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/rpc/getrpcent.3 b/lib/libc/rpc/getrpcent.3
index 6a02ca1..3f03c18 100644
--- a/lib/libc/rpc/getrpcent.3
+++ b/lib/libc/rpc/getrpcent.3
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ flag is non-zero,
 the net data base will not be closed after each call to
 .Fn getrpcent
 (either directly, or indirectly through one of
-the other 
+the other
 .Dq getrpc
 calls).
 .Pp
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ program number is found, or until end-of-file is encountered.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
 A
 .Dv NULL
-pointer is returned on 
+pointer is returned on
 .Dv EOF
 or error.
 .Sh BUGS
diff --git a/lib/libc/rpc/rpc_clnt_auth.3 b/lib/libc/rpc/rpc_clnt_auth.3
index 89feb76..43af256 100644
--- a/lib/libc/rpc/rpc_clnt_auth.3
+++ b/lib/libc/rpc/rpc_clnt_auth.3
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ style of authentication is discussed here.
 .Bl -tag -width authsys_create_default()
 .It Fn auth_destroy
 A function macro that destroys the authentication
-information associated with 
+information associated with
 .Fa auth .
 Destruction usually involves deallocation
 of private data structures.
diff --git a/lib/libc/rpc/rpc_clnt_calls.3 b/lib/libc/rpc/rpc_clnt_calls.3
index 55beca5..134e083 100644
--- a/lib/libc/rpc/rpc_clnt_calls.3
+++ b/lib/libc/rpc/rpc_clnt_calls.3
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ is the address of where to place the result(s).
 .Fa nettype
 can be any of the values listed on
 .Xr rpc 3 .
-This routine returns 
+This routine returns
 .Dv RPC_SUCCESS
 if it succeeds,
 or an appropriate status is returned.
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/fgets.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/fgets.3
index c84d6bd..427b88e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdio/fgets.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdio/fgets.3
@@ -85,11 +85,11 @@ if any, is sufficiently short to fit in the string.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 Upon successful completion,
 .Fn fgets
-and 
+and
 .Fn gets
 return
 a pointer to the string.
-If end-of-file occurs before any characters are read, 
+If end-of-file occurs before any characters are read,
 they return
 .Dv NULL
 and the buffer contents is unchanged.
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/fseek.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/fseek.3
index f12e047..9a58668 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdio/fseek.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdio/fseek.3
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ The new position, measured in bytes, is obtained by adding
 .Fa offset
 bytes to the position specified by
 .Fa whence .
-If 
+If
 .Fa whence
 is set to
 .Dv SEEK_SET ,
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ and
 (with whence set to
 .Dv SEEK_SET ) ,
 setting and storing the current value of
-the file offset into or from the object referenced by 
+the file offset into or from the object referenced by
 .Fa pos .
 On some
 .Pq non- Ns Tn UNIX
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ is not a seekable stream.
 .It Bq Er EINVAL
 The
 .Fa whence
-argument to 
+argument to
 .Fn fseek
 was not
 .Dv SEEK_SET ,
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ was not
 or
 .Dv SEEK_CUR .
 .It Bq Er EOVERFLOW
-For 
+For
 .Fn ftell ,
 the resulting file offset would be a value which
 cannot be represented correctly in an object of type long.
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ for any of the errors specified for the routines
 .Xr fflush 3 ,
 .Xr fstat 2 ,
 .Xr lseek 2 ,
-and 
+and
 .Xr malloc 3 .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr lseek 2
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ conform to
 .St -isoC .
 .Pp
 The
-.Fn fseeko 
+.Fn fseeko
 and
 .Fn ftello
 functions conform to
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/funopen.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/funopen.3
index b035514..e1d0040 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdio/funopen.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdio/funopen.3
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ The
 function
 associates a stream with up to four
 .Dq Tn I/O No functions .
-Either 
+Either
 .Fa readfn
 or
 .Fa writefn
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ close the new stream.
 .Pp
 In general, omitting a function means that any attempt to perform the
 associated operation on the resulting stream will fail.
-If the close function is omitted, closing the stream will flush 
+If the close function is omitted, closing the stream will flush
 any buffered output and then succeed.
 .Pp
 The calling conventions of
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ and
 .Xr close 2
 with the single exception that they are passed the
 .Fa cookie
-argument specified to 
+argument specified to
 .Fn funopen
 in place of the traditional file descriptor argument.
 .Pp
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Additionally, all of the functions should set the external variable
 .Va errno
 appropriately if an error occurs.
 .Pp
-An error on 
+An error on
 .Fn closefn
 does not keep the stream open.
 .Pp
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ as calls to
 .Fn funopen
 with only a read or write function specified.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-Upon successful completion, 
+Upon successful completion,
 .Fn funopen
 returns a
 .Dv FILE
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/getc.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/getc.3
index bd099ab..db69606 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdio/getc.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdio/getc.3
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@
 .Ft int
 .Fn getc "FILE *stream"
 .Ft int
-.Fn getchar 
+.Fn getchar
 .Ft int
 .Fn getw "FILE *stream"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/mktemp.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/mktemp.3
index 1f79e4f..27fc969 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdio/mktemp.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdio/mktemp.3
@@ -166,25 +166,25 @@ to any value specified by the
 function.
 .Sh NOTES
 A common problem that results in a core dump is that the programmer
-passes in a read-only string to 
+passes in a read-only string to
 .Fn mktemp ,
 .Fn mkstemp ,
 .Fn mkstemps
 or
 .Fn mkdtemp .
-This is common with programs that were developed before 
+This is common with programs that were developed before
 .St -isoC
 compilers were common.
 For example, calling
 .Fn mkstemp
-with an argument of 
+with an argument of
 .Qq /tmp/tempfile.XXXXXX
-will result in a core dump due to 
+will result in a core dump due to
 .Fn mkstemp
 attempting to modify the string constant that was given.
 If the program in question makes heavy use of that type
 of function call, you do have the option of compiling the program
-so that it will store string constants in a writable segment of memory.  
+so that it will store string constants in a writable segment of memory.
 See
 .Xr gcc 1
 for more information.
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ are used to
 increase the number of possible temporary filenames.
 This makes the race in
 .Fn mktemp ,
-between testing for a file's existence (in the 
+between testing for a file's existence (in the
 .Fn mktemp
 function call)
 and opening it for use
@@ -232,13 +232,13 @@ The
 .Fn mkstemp
 function appeared in
 .Bx 4.4 .
-The 
+The
 .Fn mkdtemp
 function first appeared in
 .Ox 2.2 ,
 and later in
 .Fx 3.2 .
-The 
+The
 .Fn mkstemps
 function first appeared in
 .Ox 2.4 ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/remove.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/remove.3
index 6627afa..a79219f 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdio/remove.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdio/remove.3
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ is the equivalent of
 Otherwise, it is the equivalent of
 .Fn unlink "path" .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-Upon successful completion, 
+Upon successful completion,
 .Fn remove
 returns 0.
 Otherwise, \-1 is returned and the global variable
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/setbuf.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/setbuf.3
index 28451580..d2b2056 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdio/setbuf.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdio/setbuf.3
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ output or input is read from any stream attached to a terminal device
 The function
 .Xr fflush 3
 may be used to force the block out early.
-(See 
+(See
 .Xr fclose 3 . )
 .Pp
 Normally all files are block buffered.
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ The
 parameter may be given as zero
 to obtain deferred optimal-size buffer allocation as usual.
 If it is not zero,
-then except for unbuffered files, the 
+then except for unbuffered files, the
 .Fa buf
 argument should point to a buffer at least
 .Fa size
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ but may have peculiar side effects
 (such as discarding input or flushing output)
 if the stream is ``active''.
 Portable applications should call it only once on any given stream,
-and before any 
+and before any
 .Tn I/O
 is performed.
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/stdio.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/stdio.3
index c7dc30d..f91e2f7 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdio/stdio.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdio/stdio.3
@@ -117,10 +117,10 @@ At program startup, three streams are predefined and need not be
 opened explicitly:
 .Bl -bullet -compact -offset indent
 .It
-.Em standard input 
+.Em standard input
 (for reading conventional input),
 .It
-.Em standard output 
+.Em standard output
 (for writing conventional output), and
 .It
 .Em standard error
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdio/tmpnam.3 b/lib/libc/stdio/tmpnam.3
index 0c4e861..9a9d037 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdio/tmpnam.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdio/tmpnam.3
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ In either case,
 .Fn tmpnam
 returns a pointer to the file name.
 .Pp
-The buffer referenced by 
+The buffer referenced by
 .Fa str
 is expected to be at least
 .Dv L_tmpnam
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/alloca.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/alloca.3
index d7b48a0..db0ea46 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/alloca.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/alloca.3
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 The
 .Fn alloca
 function
-allocates 
+allocates
 .Fa size
 bytes of space in the stack frame of the caller.
 This temporary space is automatically freed on
@@ -76,6 +76,6 @@ is machine dependent; its use is discouraged.
 .\" .Fn alloca
 .\" function appeared in
 .\" .Bx ?? .
-.\" The function appeared in 32v, pwb and pwb.2 and in 3bsd 4bsd 
+.\" The function appeared in 32v, pwb and pwb.2 and in 3bsd 4bsd
 .\" The first man page (or link to a man page that I can find at the
 .\" moment is 4.3...
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/bsearch.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/bsearch.3
index 8100796..a148f5e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/bsearch.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/bsearch.3
@@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ The
 .Fn bsearch
 function searches an array of
 .Fa nmemb
-objects, the initial member of which is 
+objects, the initial member of which is
 pointed to by
 .Fa base ,
 for a member that matches the object pointed to by
 .Fa key .
-The size of each member of the array is specified by 
+The size of each member of the array is specified by
 .Fa size .
 .Pp
 The contents of the array should be in ascending sorted order according
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/exit.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/exit.3
index 4b6dd78..663eea6 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/exit.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/exit.3
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ function.
 Passing arbitrary values back to the environment as
 .Ar status
 is considered bad style;
-you should use the values 
+you should use the values
 .Dv EXIT_SUCCESS
 and
 .Dv EXIT_FAILURE .
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/getenv.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/getenv.3
index e639b52..a0feb2b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/getenv.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/getenv.3
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ the given arguments
 .Ar name
 and
 .Ar value
-may be appended and prepended, 
+may be appended and prepended,
 respectively,
 with an equal sign
 .Dq Li \&= .
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/getopt.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/getopt.3
index 70857b9..bf1549f 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/getopt.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/getopt.3
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ The
 .Fn getopt
 function
 returns \-1
-when the argument list is exhausted, or 
+when the argument list is exhausted, or
 .Ql ?\&
 if a non-recognized
 option is encountered.
@@ -152,8 +152,8 @@ Setting
 .Va opterr
 to a zero will disable these error messages.
 If
-.Va optstring 
-has a leading 
+.Va optstring
+has a leading
 .Ql \&:
 then a missing option argument causes a
 .Ql \&:
@@ -202,13 +202,13 @@ function appeared in
 The
 .Fn getopt
 function was once specified to return
-.Dv EOF 
+.Dv EOF
 instead of \-1.
 This was changed by
 .St -p1003.2-92
-to decouple 
+to decouple
 .Fn getopt
-from 
+from
 .Pa <stdio.h> .
 .Pp
 A single dash
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/malloc.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/malloc.3
index f49604d..67e84e9 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/malloc.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/malloc.3
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ The ``name'' of the file referenced by the symbolic link named
 the value of the environment variable
 .Ev MALLOC_OPTIONS ,
 and the string pointed to by the global variable
-.Va _malloc_options 
+.Va _malloc_options
 will be interpreted, in that order, character by character as flags.
 .Pp
 Most flags are single letters,
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Attempting to allocate zero bytes will return a
 .Dv NULL
 pointer instead of
 a valid pointer.
-(The default behavior is to make a minimal allocation and return a 
+(The default behavior is to make a minimal allocation and return a
 pointer to it.)
 This option is provided for System V compatibility.
 This option is incompatible with the
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ The
 and
 .Dq Z
 options are intended for testing and debugging.
-An application which changes its behavior when these options are used 
+An application which changes its behavior when these options are used
 is flawed.
 .Sh EXAMPLES
 To set a systemwide reduction of cache size, and to dump core whenever
@@ -324,8 +324,8 @@ done by a process.
 .Ed
 .Pp
 A side effect of this architecture is that many minor transgressions on
-the interface which would traditionally not be detected are in fact 
-detected.  As a result, programs that have been running happily for 
+the interface which would traditionally not be detected are in fact
+detected.  As a result, programs that have been running happily for
 years may suddenly start to complain loudly, when linked with this
 allocation implementation.
 .Pp
@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ There are a number of allocation implementations available on the 'Net
 which focus on detecting and pinpointing problems by trading performance
 for extra sanity checks and detailed diagnostics.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
-If 
+If
 .Fn malloc ,
 .Fn calloc ,
 .Fn realloc
@@ -461,8 +461,8 @@ functions conform to
 .St -isoC .
 .Sh HISTORY
 The present allocation implementation started out as a filesystem for a
-drum attached to a 20bit binary challenged computer which was built 
-with discrete germanium transistors.  It has since graduated to 
+drum attached to a 20bit binary challenged computer which was built
+with discrete germanium transistors.  It has since graduated to
 handle primary storage rather than secondary.
 It first appeared in its new shape and ability in
 .Fx 2.2 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/qsort.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/qsort.3
index 7c09dac..da4df56 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/qsort.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/qsort.3
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ The function
 .Fn mergesort
 requires additional memory of size
 .Fa nmemb *
-.Fa size 
+.Fa size
 bytes; it should be used only when space is not at a premium.
 .Fn Mergesort
 is optimized for data with pre-existing order; its worst case
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/radixsort.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/radixsort.3
index 7ce7156..90a52c6 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/radixsort.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/radixsort.3
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Applications may specify a sort order by providing the
 .Fa table
 argument.
 If
-.Pf non- Dv NULL , 
+.Pf non- Dv NULL ,
 .Fa table
 must reference an array of
 .Dv UCHAR_MAX
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ particular, see D.E. Knuth's Algorithm R and section 5.2.5, exercise 10.
 They take linear time relative to the number of bytes in the strings.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 Upon successful completion 0 is returned.
-Otherwise, \-1 is returned and the global variable 
+Otherwise, \-1 is returned and the global variable
 .Va errno
 is set to indicate the error.
 .Sh ERRORS
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/rand.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/rand.3
index 6db19d5..d9c7b54 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/rand.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/rand.3
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ These sequences are repeatable by calling
 with the same seed value.
 .Pp
 If no
-.Fa seed 
+.Fa seed
 value is provided, the functions are automatically
 seeded with a value of 1.
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/random.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/random.3
index a17c1b7..4121c83 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/random.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/random.3
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 .Lb libc
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <stdlib.h>
-.Ft long 
+.Ft long
 .Fn random void
 .Ft void
 .Fn srandom "unsigned long seed"
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ The period of this random number generator is very large, approximately
 .if n 16*((2**31)\(mi1).
 .Pp
 The
-.Fn random 
+.Fn random
 and
 .Fn srandom
 functions have (almost) the same calling sequence and initialization properties as the
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Like
 will by default produce a sequence of numbers that can be duplicated
 by calling
 .Fn srandom
-with 
+with
 .Ql 1
 as the seed.
 .Pp
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ messages are printed on the standard error output.
 .Xr random 4
 .Sh HISTORY
 These
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
 .Sh BUGS
 About 2/3 the speed of
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/realpath.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/realpath.3
index 9e50e7d..5176770 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/realpath.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/realpath.3
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ refer to a buffer capable of storing at least
 .Dv MAXPATHLEN
 characters.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Fn realpath
 function will resolve both absolute and relative paths
 and return the absolute pathname corresponding to
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/strtod.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/strtod.3
index d0d335c..6b65e21 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/strtod.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/strtod.3
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ string to double
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn strtod
-function converts the initial portion of the string 
+function converts the initial portion of the string
 pointed to by
 .Fa nptr
 to
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ is stored in
 If the correct value would cause underflow, zero is
 returned and
 .Er ERANGE
-is stored in 
+is stored in
 .Va errno .
 .Sh ERRORS
 .Bl -tag -width Er
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/system.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/system.3
index ef9b06f..d0afe05 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/system.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/system.3
@@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ The
 function
 returns the exit status of the shell as returned by
 .Xr waitpid 2 ,
-or \-1 if an error occurred when invoking 
+or \-1 if an error occurred when invoking
 .Xr fork 2
-or 
+or
 .Xr waitpid 2 .
 A return value of 127 means the execution of the shell
 failed.
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdlib/tsearch.3 b/lib/libc/stdlib/tsearch.3
index b6d66f8..7f17434 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdlib/tsearch.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdlib/tsearch.3
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
 .\" ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\"	OpenBSD: tsearch.3,v 1.2 1998/06/21 22:13:49 millert Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: tsearch.3,v 1.2 1998/06/21 22:13:49 millert Exp
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
 .Dd June 15, 1997
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ and calls the function
 on each node.
 .Fa Action
 is called with three arguments: a pointer to the current node,
-a value from the enum 
+a value from the enum
 .Sy "typedef enum { preorder, postorder, endorder, leaf } VISIT;"
 specifying the traversal type, and a node level (where level
 zero is the root of the tree).
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdtime/ctime.3 b/lib/libc/stdtime/ctime.3
index e3de91b..b3d53ef 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdtime/ctime.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdtime/ctime.3
@@ -148,9 +148,9 @@ except the caller must provide the output buffer
 to store the result, which must be at least 26 characters long.
 .Fn localtime_r
 and
-.Fn gmtime_r 
-provide the same functionality as 
-.Fn localtime 
+.Fn gmtime_r
+provide the same functionality as
+.Fn localtime
 and
 .Fn gmtime
 respectively, except the caller must provide the output buffer
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ returns the difference between two calendar times,
 .Fa time0 ) ,
 expressed in seconds.
 .Pp
-External declarations as well as the tm structure definition are in the 
+External declarations as well as the tm structure definition are in the
 .Aq Pa time.h
 include file.
 The tm structure includes at least the following fields:
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ the time package contributed to Berkeley by
 and which appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
 .Sh BUGS
-Except for 
+Except for
 .Fn difftime ,
 .Fn mktime ,
 and the
diff --git a/lib/libc/stdtime/strptime.3 b/lib/libc/stdtime/strptime.3
index cda46cf..b69cbee 100644
--- a/lib/libc/stdtime/strptime.3
+++ b/lib/libc/stdtime/strptime.3
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ All conversion specifications are identical to those described in
 .Pp
 Two-digit year values, including formats
 .Fa %y
-and 
+and
 .Fa \&%D ,
 are now interpreted as beginning at 1969 per POSIX requirements.
 Years 69-00 are interpreted in the 20th century (1969-2000), years
diff --git a/lib/libc/string/bcmp.3 b/lib/libc/string/bcmp.3
index 0e743a0..8d06b8b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/string/bcmp.3
+++ b/lib/libc/string/bcmp.3
@@ -70,5 +70,5 @@ The strings may overlap.
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
 .Fn bcmp
-function first appeared in 
+function first appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/string/bcopy.3 b/lib/libc/string/bcopy.3
index 7f3fa47..095ae05 100644
--- a/lib/libc/string/bcopy.3
+++ b/lib/libc/string/bcopy.3
@@ -70,5 +70,5 @@ is zero, no bytes are copied.
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
 .Fn bcopy
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/string/bzero.3 b/lib/libc/string/bzero.3
index 1f4fbc5..73d3428 100644
--- a/lib/libc/string/bzero.3
+++ b/lib/libc/string/bzero.3
@@ -67,5 +67,5 @@ does nothing.
 A
 .Fn bzero
 function
-appeared in 
+appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/string/index.3 b/lib/libc/string/index.3
index 1ec56e6..d023658 100644
--- a/lib/libc/string/index.3
+++ b/lib/libc/string/index.3
@@ -79,5 +79,5 @@ locates the terminating '\e0'.
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
 .Fn index
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .At v6 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/string/rindex.3 b/lib/libc/string/rindex.3
index 0f9919c..e6c019f 100644
--- a/lib/libc/string/rindex.3
+++ b/lib/libc/string/rindex.3
@@ -81,5 +81,5 @@ locates the terminating
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
 .Fn rindex
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .At v6 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/string/strlcpy.3 b/lib/libc/string/strlcpy.3
index c26a6f3..f22c897 100644
--- a/lib/libc/string/strlcpy.3
+++ b/lib/libc/string/strlcpy.3
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ as long as there is at least one byte free in
 Note that you should include a byte for the NUL in
 .Fa size .
 Also note that
-.Fn strlcpy  
+.Fn strlcpy
 and
 .Fn strlcat
 only operate on true
diff --git a/lib/libc/string/strtok.3 b/lib/libc/string/strtok.3
index 77837d2..6ad05cc 100644
--- a/lib/libc/string/strtok.3
+++ b/lib/libc/string/strtok.3
@@ -16,12 +16,12 @@
 .\"
 .\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
 .\"    notices, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
 .\"    copyright notices, this list of conditions and the following
 .\"    disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
 .\"    with the distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
 .\"    software must display the following acknowledgement:
 .\"
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ character.
 When no more tokens remain, a null pointer is returned.
 .Sh EXAMPLES
 The following uses
-.Fn strtok_r 
+.Fn strtok_r
 to parse two strings using separate contexts:
 .Bd -literal
 char test[80], blah[80];
@@ -169,6 +169,6 @@ such a sequence of calls would always return
 Softweyr LLC:
 .Aq wes@softweyr.com
 .Pp
-Based on the 
+Based on the
 .Fx 3.0
 implementation.
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/_exit.2 b/lib/libc/sys/_exit.2
index 50096e6..efeb4e8 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/_exit.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/_exit.2
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ can never return.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn _exit
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 An
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/access.2 b/lib/libc/sys/access.2
index e37d069..6a11a00 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/access.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/access.2
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn access
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh CAVEAT
 .Fn Access
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/acct.2 b/lib/libc/sys/acct.2
index 7b1c6c2..ed41171 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/acct.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/acct.2
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ If
 .Fa file
 is an
 .Em existing
-pathname (null-terminated), record collection is enabled and for 
+pathname (null-terminated), record collection is enabled and for
 every process initiated which terminates under normal
 conditions an accounting record is appended to
 .Fa file .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/adjtime.2 b/lib/libc/sys/adjtime.2
index a6ddd8c..359b7ac 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/adjtime.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/adjtime.2
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ of computers in a local area network.
 Such time servers would slow down the clocks of some machines
 and speed up the clocks of others to bring them to the average network time.
 .Pp
-The call 
+The call
 .Fn adjtime
 is restricted to the super-user.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/aio_error.2 b/lib/libc/sys/aio_error.2
index e27c973..af5cade 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/aio_error.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/aio_error.2
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ associated with the structure pointed to by
 If the asynchronous I/O request has completed successfully,
 .Fn aio_error
 returns 0.  If the request has not yet completed,
-.Er EINPROGRESS 
+.Er EINPROGRESS
 is returned.  If the request has completed unsuccessfully the error
 status is returned as described in
 .Xr read 2 ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/aio_read.2 b/lib/libc/sys/aio_read.2
index 5dac793..839805e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/aio_read.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/aio_read.2
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ beginning at the offset
 .Fa iocb->aio_offset
 into the buffer pointed to by
 .Fa iocb->aio_buf .
-The call returns immediately after the read request has 
+The call returns immediately after the read request has
 been enqueued to the descriptor; the read may or may not have
 completed at the time the call returns.
 .Pp
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ for these objects is discouraged.
 .Pp
 The asynchronous I/O control buffer
 .Fa iocb
-should be zeroed before the 
+should be zeroed before the
 .Fn aio_read
 call to avoid passing bogus context information to the kernel.
 .Pp
@@ -195,6 +195,6 @@ This
 manual page was written by
 .An Terry Lambert Aq terry@whistle.com .
 .Sh BUGS
-Invalid information in 
+Invalid information in
 .Fa iocb->_aiocb_private
 may confuse the kernel.
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/aio_return.2 b/lib/libc/sys/aio_return.2
index 3477288..64bc8c9 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/aio_return.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/aio_return.2
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ associated with the structure pointed to by
 .Pp
 .Fn aio_return
 should only be called once, to obtain the final status of an asynchronous
-I/O operation once 
+I/O operation once
 .Xr aio_error 2
 returns something other than
 .Er EINPROGRESS .
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ or
 On failure,
 .Fn aio_return
 returns
-.Dv -1 
+.Dv -1
 and sets
 .Dv errno
 to indicate the error condition.
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/aio_suspend.2 b/lib/libc/sys/aio_suspend.2
index 333ad82..d59cb8d 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/aio_suspend.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/aio_suspend.2
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ delivered, or the
 has passed.
 .Pp
 .Fa iocbs
-is an array of 
+is an array of
 .Fa niocb
 pointers to asynchronous I/O requests.  Array members containing
 NULL will be silently ignored.
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ The
 function will fail if:
 .Bl -tag -width Er
 .It Bq Er EAGAIN
-the 
+the
 .Fa timeout
 expired before any I/O requests completed.
 .It Bq Er EINVAL
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/aio_write.2 b/lib/libc/sys/aio_write.2
index f099d43..8215720 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/aio_write.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/aio_write.2
@@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ the call returns.  If the request could not be enqueued, generally due
 to invalid arguments, the call returns without having enqueued the
 request.
 .Pp
-If 
-.Dv O_APPEND 
-is set for 
+If
+.Dv O_APPEND
+is set for
 .Fa iocb->aio_fildes ,
 .Fn aio_write
 operations append to the file in the same order as the calls were
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ the absolute position from the beginning of the file plus
 .Fa iocb->aio_offset .
 .Pp
 If
-.Dv _POSIX_PRIORITIZED_IO 
+.Dv _POSIX_PRIORITIZED_IO
 is defined, and the descriptor supports it, then the enqueued
 operation is submitted at a priority equal to that of the calling
 process minus
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ and the buffer that the
 member of that structure references must remain valid until the
 operation has completed.  For this reason, use of auto (stack) variables
 for these objects is discouraged.
-.Pp 
+.Pp
 The asynchronous I/O control buffer
 .Fa iocb
 should be zeroed before the
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/bind.2 b/lib/libc/sys/bind.2
index ac8337e..56ab9a5 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/bind.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/bind.2
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Fn Bind
 assigns the local protocol address to a socket.
-When a socket is created 
+When a socket is created
 with
 .Xr socket 2
 it exists in an address family space but has no protocol address assigned.
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ The
 call will fail if:
 .Bl -tag -width Er
 .It Bq Er EAGAIN
-Kernel resources to complete the request are 
+Kernel resources to complete the request are
 temporarily unavilable.
 .It Bq Er EBADF
 .Fa S
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/brk.2 b/lib/libc/sys/brk.2
index 97b2915..50c8196 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/brk.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/brk.2
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ increased to the next page boundary.
 .\" .Pp
 The current value of the program break is reliably returned by
 .Dq Li sbrk(0)
-(see also 
+(see also
 .Xr end 3 ) .
 The
 .Xr getrlimit 2
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ to support the expansion.
 Setting the break may fail due to a temporary lack of
 swap space.  It is not possible to distinguish this
 from a failure caused by exceeding the maximum size of
-the data segment without consulting 
+the data segment without consulting
 .Xr getrlimit 2 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/chdir.2 b/lib/libc/sys/chdir.2
index 7a9c716..bd969f9 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/chdir.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/chdir.2
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ is not a valid file descriptor.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn chdir
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/chmod.2 b/lib/libc/sys/chmod.2
index 6a3120f..d003503 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/chmod.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/chmod.2
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ For more details of the properties of the sticky bit, see
 If mode ISUID (set UID) is set on a directory,
 and the MNT_SUIDDIR option was used in the mount of the filesystem,
 then the owner of any new files and sub-directories
-created within this directory are set 
+created within this directory are set
 to be the same as the owner of that directory.
 If this function is enabled, new directories will inherit
 the bit from their parents.  Execute bits are removed from
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ such should not be used on shell machines, especially on home directories.
 This option requires the SUIDDIR
 option in the kernel to work.
 Only UFS filesystems support this option.
-For more details of the suiddir mount option, see 
+For more details of the suiddir mount option, see
 .Xr mount 8 .
 .Pp
 Writing or changing the owner of a file
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn chmod
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 ,
 except for the return of
 .Er EFTYPE
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/chown.2 b/lib/libc/sys/chown.2
index e049ad5..363893a 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/chown.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/chown.2
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ or referenced by
 .Fa fd
 is changed as specified by the arguments
 .Fa owner
-and 
+and
 .Fa group .
 The owner of a file may change the
 .Fa group
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to the file system.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn chown
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/chroot.2 b/lib/libc/sys/chroot.2
index db7336c..eeb9def 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/chroot.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/chroot.2
@@ -67,26 +67,26 @@ This call is restricted to the super-user.
 Depending on the setting of the
 .Ql kern.chroot_allow_open_directories
 sysctl variable, open filedescriptors which reference directories
-will make the 
+will make the
 .Fn chroot
 fail as follows:
 .Pp
-If 
+If
 .Ql kern.chroot_allow_open_directories
-is set to zero, 
+is set to zero,
 .Fn chroot
 will always fail with
 .Er EPERM
 if there are any directories open.
 .Pp
-If 
+If
 .Ql kern.chroot_allow_open_directories
-is set to one (the default), 
+is set to one (the default),
 .Fn chroot
 will fail with
 .Er EPERM
 if there are any directories open and the
-process is already subject to a 
+process is already subject to a
 .Fn chroot
 call.
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/clock_gettime.2 b/lib/libc/sys/clock_gettime.2
index 24ead35..e392954 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/clock_gettime.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/clock_gettime.2
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ kernel mode.
 .Pp
 The structure pointed to by
 .Fa tp
-is defined in 
+is defined in
 .Ao Pa sys/time.h Ac
 as:
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/close.2 b/lib/libc/sys/close.2
index 18ebe3c..98c35e0 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/close.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/close.2
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ However, the semantics of System V and
 dictate that all
 .Xr fcntl 2
 advisory record locks associated with a file for a given process
-are removed when 
+are removed when
 .Em any
 file descriptor for that file is closed by that process.
 .Pp
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ An interrupt was received.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn close
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/connect.2 b/lib/libc/sys/connect.2
index 7a8a59d..54adbb2 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/connect.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/connect.2
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ The
 parameter specifies an area outside
 the process address space.
 .It Bq Er EINPROGRESS
-The socket is non-blocking 
+The socket is non-blocking
 and the connection cannot
 be completed immediately.
 It is possible to
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/dup.2 b/lib/libc/sys/dup.2
index d64ee65..347795c 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/dup.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/dup.2
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ additional
 call.
 The close-on-exec flag on the new file descriptor is unset.
 .Pp
-In 
+In
 .Fn dup2 ,
 the value of the new descriptor
 .Fa newd
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ The
 .Fn dup
 and
 .Fn dup2
-function calls are expected to conform to 
+function calls are expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/execve.2 b/lib/libc/sys/execve.2
index 85531f8..9086232 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/execve.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/execve.2
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ library re-initialization and then calls
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 As the
 .Fn execve
-function overlays the current process image 
+function overlays the current process image
 with a new process image the successful call
 has no process to return to.
 If
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/fcntl.2 b/lib/libc/sys/fcntl.2
index 9c2a25b..86364c1 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/fcntl.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/fcntl.2
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ and
 signals;
 process groups are specified by supplying
 .Fa arg
-as negative, otherwise 
+as negative, otherwise
 .Fa arg
 is interpreted as a process ID.
 .El
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ locks conflicts with the type specified in the request.
 This interface follows the completely stupid semantics of System V and
 .St -p1003.1-88
 that require that all locks associated with a file for a given process are
-removed when 
+removed when
 .Em any
 file descriptor for that file is closed by that process.
 This semantic means that applications must be aware of any files that
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ For example if an application for updating the password file locks the
 password file database while making the update, and then calls
 .Xr getpwnam 3
 to retrieve a record,
-the lock will be lost because 
+the lock will be lost because
 .Xr getpwnam 3
 opens, reads, and closes the password database.
 The database close will release all locks that the process has
@@ -329,9 +329,9 @@ allows locks to be inherited by child processes.
 is recommended for applications that want to ensure the integrity
 of their locks when using library routines or wish to pass locks
 to their children.
-Note that 
+Note that
 .Xr flock 2
-and 
+and
 .Xr fcntl 2
 locks may be safely used concurrently.
 .Pp
@@ -497,10 +497,10 @@ or
 and satisfying the lock or unlock request would result in the
 number of locked regions in the system exceeding a system-imposed limit.
 .It Bq Er EPERM
-.Fa Cmd    
-is 
+.Fa Cmd
+is
 .Dv F_SETOWN
-and 
+and
 the process ID or process group given as an argument is in a
 different session than the caller.
 .It Bq Er ESRCH
@@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ and
 the process ID given as argument is not in use.
 .El
 .Pp
-In addition, if 
+In addition, if
 .Fa fd
 refers to a descriptor open on a terminal device (as opposed to a
 descriptor open on a socket), a
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/flock.2 b/lib/libc/sys/flock.2
index 49ecd4d..5e9ebf6 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/flock.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/flock.2
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ locks and
 locks.
 At any time multiple shared locks may be applied to a file,
 but at no time are multiple exclusive, or both shared and exclusive,
-locks allowed simultaneously on a file.  
+locks allowed simultaneously on a file.
 .Pp
 A shared lock may be
 .Em upgraded
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getdirentries.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getdirentries.2
index ee438ff..48d2e0e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getdirentries.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getdirentries.2
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ The current position pointer associated with
 .Fa fd
 is set to point to the next block of entries.
 The pointer may not advance by the number of bytes returned by
-.Fn getdirentries 
+.Fn getdirentries
 or
 .Fn getdents .
 A value of zero is returned when
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getfsstat.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getfsstat.2
index de2bb80..bec4f14 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getfsstat.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getfsstat.2
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Thus, some of the information will be out of date, but
 will not block waiting for information from a filesystem that is
 unable to respond.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-Upon successful completion, the number of 
+Upon successful completion, the number of
 .Fa fsstat
 structures is returned.
 Otherwise, -1 is returned and the global variable
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getgid.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getgid.2
index 3e1a148..39215e1 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getgid.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getgid.2
@@ -81,5 +81,5 @@ The
 .Fn getgid
 and
 .Fn getegid
-function calls are expected to conform to 
+function calls are expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getgroups.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getgroups.2
index 6527e80..7b0789d 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getgroups.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getgroups.2
@@ -48,11 +48,11 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Fn Getgroups
 gets the current group access list of the user process
-and stores it in the array 
+and stores it in the array
 .Fa gidset .
 The parameter
 .Fa gidsetlen
-indicates the number of entries that may be placed in 
+indicates the number of entries that may be placed in
 .Fa gidset .
 .Fn Getgroups
 returns the actual number of groups returned in
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getitimer.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getitimer.2
index db629f4..156caa1 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getitimer.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getitimer.2
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ call sets a timer to the specified
 .Fa ovalue
 is non-nil).
 .Pp
-A timer value is defined by the 
+A timer value is defined by the
 .Fa itimerval
 structure:
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
@@ -80,13 +80,13 @@ struct itimerval {
 .Pp
 If
 .Fa it_value
-is non-zero, it indicates the time to the next timer expiration. 
+is non-zero, it indicates the time to the next timer expiration.
 If
 .Fa it_interval
-is non-zero, it specifies a value to be used in reloading 
+is non-zero, it specifies a value to be used in reloading
 .Fa it_value
 when the timer expires.
-Setting 
+Setting
 .Fa it_value
 to 0 disables a timer, regardless of the value of
 .Fa it_interval .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getpeername.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getpeername.2
index 20d9f53..c409cea 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getpeername.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getpeername.2
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ The socket is not connected.
 Insufficient resources were available in the system
 to perform the operation.
 .It Bq Er EFAULT
-The 
+The
 .Fa name
 parameter points to memory not in a valid part of the
 process address space.
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getpgrp.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getpgrp.2
index 9e3fa54..30209ac 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getpgrp.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getpgrp.2
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ function call is derived from its usage in System V Release 4.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn getpgrp
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh COMPATIBILITY
 This version of
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getpid.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getpid.2
index 70c0b65..656d7e7 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getpid.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getpid.2
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ instead.
 .Pp
 .Fn Getppid
 returns the process ID of the parent
-of the calling process. 
+of the calling process.
 .Sh ERRORS
 The
 .Fn getpid
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ The
 .Fn getpid
 and
 .Fn getppid
-function calls are expected to conform to 
+function calls are expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getpriority.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getpriority.2
index 8a8d57b..efaa5ed 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getpriority.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getpriority.2
@@ -65,9 +65,9 @@ is one of
 .Dv PRIO_PGRP ,
 or
 .Dv PRIO_USER ,
-and 
+and
 .Fa who
-is interpreted relative to 
+is interpreted relative to
 .Fa which
 (a process identifier for
 .Dv PRIO_PROCESS ,
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ and
 will fail if:
 .Bl -tag -width Er
 .It Bq Er ESRCH
-No process was located using the 
+No process was located using the
 .Fa which
 and
 .Fa who
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getrlimit.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getrlimit.2
index ceac426..9b76214 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getrlimit.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getrlimit.2
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ and each process it creates may be obtained with the
 .Fn getrlimit
 call, and set with the
 .Fn setrlimit
-call.  
+call.
 .Pp
 The
 .Fa resource
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ A resource limit is specified as a soft limit and a hard limit.  When a
 soft limit is exceeded a process may receive a signal (for example, if
 the cpu time or file size is exceeded), but it will be allowed to
 continue execution until it reaches the hard limit (or modifies
-its resource limit).  The 
+its resource limit).  The
 .Em rlimit
 structure is used to specify the hard and soft limits on a resource,
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
@@ -115,9 +115,9 @@ struct rlimit {
 .Ed
 .Pp
 Only the super-user may raise the maximum limits.  Other users
-may only alter 
+may only alter
 .Fa rlim_cur
-within the range from 0 to 
+within the range from 0 to
 .Fa rlim_max
 or (irreversibly) lower
 .Fa rlim_max .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getrusage.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getrusage.2
index ad7f585..2d973cb 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getrusage.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getrusage.2
@@ -144,9 +144,9 @@ priority process becoming runnable or because the current process
 exceeded its time slice.
 .El
 .Sh NOTES
-The numbers 
+The numbers
 .Fa ru_inblock
-and 
+and
 .Fa ru_oublock
 account only for real
 I/O; data supplied by the caching mechanism is charged only
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getsockname.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getsockname.2
index d2ecff9..afaa86b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getsockname.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getsockname.2
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
 .Fn getsockname "int s" "struct sockaddr *name" "socklen_t *namelen"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Fn Getsockname
-returns the current 
+returns the current
 .Fa name
 for the specified socket.  The
 .Fa namelen
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ is a file, not a socket.
 Insufficient resources were available in the system
 to perform the operation.
 .It Bq Er EFAULT
-The 
+The
 .Fa name
 parameter points to memory not in a valid part of the
 process address space.
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getsockopt.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getsockopt.2
index 0f1a23b..b5bc37b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getsockopt.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getsockopt.2
@@ -187,13 +187,13 @@ of the destination address.
 .Pp
 .Dv SO_LINGER
 controls the action taken when unsent messages
-are queued on socket and a 
+are queued on socket and a
 .Xr close 2
 is performed.
 If the socket promises reliable delivery of data and
 .Dv SO_LINGER
 is set,
-the system will block the process on the 
+the system will block the process on the
 .Xr close 2
 attempt until it is able to transmit the data or until it decides it
 is unable to deliver the information (a timeout period, termed the
@@ -201,10 +201,10 @@ linger interval, is specified in seconds in the
 .Fn setsockopt
 call when
 .Dv SO_LINGER
-is requested). 
+is requested).
 If
 .Dv SO_LINGER
-is disabled and a 
+is disabled and a
 .Xr close 2
 is issued, the system will process the close in a manner that allows
 the process to continue as quickly as possible.
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ requested.
 The default value for
 .Dv SO_RCVLOWAT
 is 1.
-If 
+If
 .Dv SO_RCVLOWAT
 is set to a larger value, blocking receive calls normally
 wait until they have received the smaller of the low water mark value
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ is a file, not a socket.
 .It Bq Er ENOPROTOOPT
 The option is unknown at the level indicated.
 .It Bq Er EFAULT
-The address pointed to by 
+The address pointed to by
 .Fa optval
 is not in a valid part of the process address space.
 For
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/gettimeofday.2 b/lib/libc/sys/gettimeofday.2
index 6b8f3f6..06b7996 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/gettimeofday.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/gettimeofday.2
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ The structures pointed to by
 .Fa tp
 and
 .Fa tzp
-are defined in 
+are defined in
 .Ao Pa sys/time.h Ac
 as:
 .Pp
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ struct timezone {
 };
 .Ed
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Fa timezone
 structure indicates the local time zone
 (measured in minutes of time westward from Greenwich),
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/getuid.2 b/lib/libc/sys/getuid.2
index 1a762fe..95873bf 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/getuid.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/getuid.2
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ The
 .Fn geteuid
 and
 .Fn getuid
-function calls are expected to conform to 
+function calls are expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/intro.2 b/lib/libc/sys/intro.2
index 07c1a02..56dbcd7 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/intro.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/intro.2
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ their error returns, and other common definitions and concepts.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 Nearly all of the system calls provide an error number referenced via
 the external identifier errno.
-This identifier is defined in 
+This identifier is defined in
 .Aq Pa sys/errno.h
 as
 .Pp
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ An attempt was made to perform an operation limited to processes
 with appropriate privileges or to the owner of a file or other
 resources.
 .It Er 2 ENOENT Em "No such file or directory" .
-A component of a specified pathname did not exist, or the 
+A component of a specified pathname did not exist, or the
 pathname was an empty string.
 .It Er 3 ESRCH Em "No such process" .
 No process could be found corresponding to that specified by the given
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ was supplied to a remove directory or rename call.
 .It Er 68 EUSERS Em "Too many users" .
 The quota system ran out of table entries.
 .It Er 69 EDQUOT Em "Disc quota exceeded" .
-A 
+A
 .Xr write 2
 to an ordinary file, the creation of a
 directory or symbolic link, or the creation of a directory
@@ -395,10 +395,10 @@ was exhausted.
 An attempt was made to access an open file (on an
 .Tn NFS
 filesystem)
-which is now unavailable as referenced by the file descriptor.  
+which is now unavailable as referenced by the file descriptor.
 This may indicate the file was deleted on the
-.Tn NFS 
-server or some 
+.Tn NFS
+server or some
 other catastrophic event occurred.
 .It Er 72 EBADRPC Em "RPC struct is bad" .
 Exchange of
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ the local version.
 .It Er 74 EPROGUNAVAIL Em "RPC prog. not avail" .
 The requested program is not registered on the remote host.
 .It Er 75 EPROGMISMATCH Em "Program version wrong" .
-The requested version of the program is not available 
+The requested version of the program is not available
 on the remote host
 .Pq Tn RPC .
 .It Er 76 EPROCUNAVAIL Em "Bad procedure for program" .
@@ -421,13 +421,13 @@ An
 call was attempted for a procedure which doesn't exist
 in the remote program.
 .It Er 77 ENOLCK Em "No locks available" .
-A system-imposed limit on the number of simultaneous file 
+A system-imposed limit on the number of simultaneous file
 locks was reached.
 .It Er 78 ENOSYS Em "Function not implemented" .
-Attempted a system call that is not available on this 
+Attempted a system call that is not available on this
 system.
 .It Er 79 EFTYPE Em "Inappropriate file type or format" .
-The file was the wrong type for the operation, or a data file had 
+The file was the wrong type for the operation, or a data file had
 the wrong format.
 .It Er 80 EAUTH Em "Authentication error" .
 Attempted to use an invalid authentication ticket to mount a
@@ -448,8 +448,8 @@ provided space.
 .It Er 85 ECANCELED Em "Operation canceled" .
 The scheduled operation was canceled.
 .It Er 86 EILSEQ Em "Illegal byte sequence" .
-While decoding a multibyte character the function came along an 
-invalid or an incomplete sequence of bytes or the given wide 
+While decoding a multibyte character the function came along an
+invalid or an incomplete sequence of bytes or the given wide
 character is invalid.
 .El
 .Sh DEFINITIONS
@@ -519,10 +519,10 @@ The process group of a session leader is orphaned by definition.
 Each user on the system is identified by a positive integer
 termed the real user ID.
 .Pp
-Each user is also a member of one or more groups. 
+Each user is also a member of one or more groups.
 One of these groups is distinguished from others and
 used in implementing accounting facilities.  The positive
-integer corresponding to this distinguished group is termed 
+integer corresponding to this distinguished group is termed
 the real group ID.
 .Pp
 All processes have a real user ID and real group ID.
@@ -653,13 +653,13 @@ These permissions are used in determining whether a process
 may perform a requested operation on the file (such as opening
 a file for writing).  Access permissions are established at the
 time a file is created.  They may be changed at some later time
-through the 
+through the
 .Xr chmod 2
-call. 
+call.
 .Pp
 File access is broken down according to whether a file may be: read,
 written, or executed.  Directory files use the execute
-permission to control if the directory may be searched. 
+permission to control if the directory may be searched.
 .Pp
 File access permissions are interpreted by the system as
 they apply to three different classes of users: the owner
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/ioctl.2 b/lib/libc/sys/ioctl.2
index 5f75d49..fe1fea2 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/ioctl.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/ioctl.2
@@ -62,11 +62,11 @@ The third argument to
 .Nm
 is traditionally named
 .Ar "char *argp" .
-Most uses of 
+Most uses of
 .Nm
 in
 .Fx 3.0
-however, require the third argument to be a 
+however, require the third argument to be a
 .Ar caddr_t
 or an
 .Ar int .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/jail.2 b/lib/libc/sys/jail.2
index cc0df2a..e457548 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/jail.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/jail.2
@@ -58,9 +58,9 @@ the prison.  It is not possible to add a process to a preexisting prison.
 .Pp
 Inside the prison, the concept of "superuser" is very diluted.  In general,
 it can be assumed that nothing can be mangled from inside a prison which
-does not exist entirely inside that prison.  For instance the directory 
+does not exist entirely inside that prison.  For instance the directory
 tree below
-.Dq Li path 
+.Dq Li path
 can be manipulated all the ways a root can normally do it, including
 .Dq Li "rm -rf /*"
 but new device special nodes cannot be created because they reference
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/kill.2 b/lib/libc/sys/kill.2
index e641fd9..f0b9654 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/kill.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/kill.2
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ may be one of the signals specified in
 .Xr sigaction 2
 or it may be 0, in which case
 error checking is performed but no
-signal is actually sent. 
+signal is actually sent.
 This can be used to check the validity of
 .Fa pid .
 .Pp
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ of the group could not be signaled.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn kill
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/kldfind.2 b/lib/libc/sys/kldfind.2
index aabd41d..8305076 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/kldfind.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/kldfind.2
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@
 .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\" $FreeBSD$	
+.\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
 .Dd March 3, 1999
 .Dt KLDFIND 2
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm kldfind
-.Nd returns the fileid of a kld file 
+.Nd returns the fileid of a kld file
 .Sh LIBRARY
 .Lb libc
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/kldfirstmod.2 b/lib/libc/sys/kldfirstmod.2
index fe928b8..29e81d8 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/kldfirstmod.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/kldfirstmod.2
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
 .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\" $FreeBSD$	
+.\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
 .Dd March 3, 1999
 .Dt KLDFIRSTMOD 2
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/kldload.2 b/lib/libc/sys/kldload.2
index f897c83..2b40bab 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/kldload.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/kldload.2
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm kldload
-.Nd load KLD files into the kernel 
+.Nd load KLD files into the kernel
 .Sh LIBRARY
 .Lb libc
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ The file was not found.
 .It Bq Er ENOEXEC
 The file format of
 .Fa file
-was unrecognized. 
+was unrecognized.
 .El
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr kldfind 2 ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/kldnext.2 b/lib/libc/sys/kldnext.2
index 4ba8ca3..d18f953 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/kldnext.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/kldnext.2
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@
 .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\" $FreeBSD$	
+.\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
 .Dd March 3, 1999
 .Dt KLDNEXT 2
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm kldnext
-.Nd return the fileid of the next kld file 
+.Nd return the fileid of the next kld file
 .Sh LIBRARY
 .Lb libc
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/kldstat.2 b/lib/libc/sys/kldstat.2
index 4846905..0ad213b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/kldstat.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/kldstat.2
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@
 .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
 .\"
-.\" $FreeBSD$	
+.\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
 .Dd March 3, 1999
 .Dt KLDSTAT 2
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm kldstat
-.Nd get status of kld file 
+.Nd get status of kld file
 .Sh LIBRARY
 .Lb libc
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/kqueue.2 b/lib/libc/sys/kqueue.2
index 7225358..4d5ee64 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/kqueue.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/kqueue.2
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ The filter is also run when the user attempts to retrieve the kevent
 from the kqueue.
 If the filter indicates that the condition that triggered
 the event no longer holds, the kevent is removed from the kqueue and
-is not returned. 
+is not returned.
 .Pp
 Multiple events which trigger the filter do not result in multiple
 kevents being placed on the kqueue; instead, the filter will aggregate
@@ -85,17 +85,17 @@ is used to register events with the queue, and return any pending
 events to the user.
 .Fa changelist
 is a pointer to an array of
-.Va kevent 
+.Va kevent
 structures, as defined in
 .Aq Pa sys/event.h .
-All changes contained in the 
+All changes contained in the
 .Fa changelist
 are applied before any pending events are read from the queue.
 .Fa nchanges
 gives the size of
 .Fa changelist .
 .Fa eventlist
-is a pointer to an array of kevent structures. 
+is a pointer to an array of kevent structures.
 .Fa nevents
 determines the size of
 .Fa eventlist .
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ argument should be non-NULL, pointing to a zero-valued
 .Va timespec
 structure.  The same array may be used for the
 .Fa changelist
-and 
+and
 .Fa eventlist .
 .Pp
 .Fn EV_SET
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Actions to perform on the event.
 .It fflags
 Filter-specific flags.
 .It data
-Filter-specific data value. 
+Filter-specific data value.
 .It udata
 Opaque user-defined value passed through the kernel unchanged.
 .El
@@ -172,8 +172,8 @@ Disable the event so
 .Fn kevent
 will not return it.  The filter itself is not disabled.
 .It EV_DELETE
-Removes the event from the kqueue.  Events which are attached to 
-file descriptors are automatically deleted on the last close of 
+Removes the event from the kqueue.  Events which are attached to
+file descriptors are automatically deleted on the last close of
 the descriptor.
 .It EV_ONESHOT
 Causes the event to return only the first occurrence of the filter
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ below.
 .El
 .Pp
 The predefined system filters are listed below.
-Arguments may be passed to and from the filter via the 
+Arguments may be passed to and from the filter via the
 .Va fflags
 and
 .Va data
@@ -218,9 +218,9 @@ subject to the
 .Dv SO_RCVLOWAT
 value of the socket buffer.
 This may be overridden with a per-filter low water mark at the
-time the filter is added by setting the 
-NOTE_LOWAT 
-flag in 
+time the filter is added by setting the
+NOTE_LOWAT
+flag in
 .Va fflags ,
 and specifying the new low water mark in
 .Va data .
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ contains the number of bytes in the socket buffer.
 If the read direction of the socket has shutdown, then the filter
 also sets EV_EOF in
 .Va flags ,
-and returns the socket error (if any) in 
+and returns the socket error (if any) in
 .Va fflags .
 It is possible for EOF to be returned (indicating the connection is gone)
 while there is still data pending in the socket buffer.
@@ -254,22 +254,22 @@ returning.
 .It EVFILT_WRITE
 Takes a descriptor as the identifier, and returns whenever
 it is possible to write to the descriptor.  For sockets, pipes
-and fifos, 
+and fifos,
 .Va data
 will contain the amount of space remaining in the write buffer.
 The filter will set EV_EOF when the reader disconnects, and for
 the fifo case, this may be cleared by use of EV_CLEAR.
 Note that this filter is not supported for vnodes.
 .Pp
-For sockets, the low water mark and socket error handling is 
+For sockets, the low water mark and socket error handling is
 identical to the EVFILT_READ case.
 .It EVFILT_AIO
 The sigevent portion of the AIO request is filled in, with
-.Va sigev_notify_kqueue 
+.Va sigev_notify_kqueue
 containing the descriptor of the kqueue that the event should
 be attached to,
 .Va sigev_value
-containing the udata value, and 
+containing the udata value, and
 .Va sigev_notify
 set to SIGEV_EVENT.
 When the aio_* function is called, the event will be registered
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ argument set to the
 returned by the aio_* function.
 The filter returns under the same conditions as aio_error.
 .Pp
-Alternatively, a kevent structure may be initialized, with 
+Alternatively, a kevent structure may be initialized, with
 .Va ident
 containing the descriptor of the kqueue, and the
 address of the kevent structure placed in the
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ address of the kevent structure placed in the
 field of the AIO request.  However, this approach will not work on
 architectures with 64-bit pointers, and should be considered depreciated.
 .It EVFILT_VNODE
-Takes a file descriptor as the identifier and the events to watch for in 
+Takes a file descriptor as the identifier and the events to watch for in
 .Va fflags ,
 and returns when one or more of the requested events occurs on the descriptor.
 The events to monitor are:
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ The link count on the file changed.
 .It NOTE_RENAME
 The file referenced by the descriptor was renamed.
 .It NOTE_REVOKE
-Access to the file was revoked via 
+Access to the file was revoked via
 .Xr revoke 2
 or the underlying fileystem was unmounted.
 .El
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ On return,
 .Va fflags
 contains the events which triggered the filter.
 .It EVFILT_PROC
-Takes the process ID to monitor as the identifier and the events to watch for 
+Takes the process ID to monitor as the identifier and the events to watch for
 in
 .Va fflags ,
 and returns when the process performs one or more of the requested events.
@@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ The process has exited.
 The process has called
 .Fn fork .
 .It NOTE_EXEC
-The process has executed a new process via 
+The process has executed a new process via
 .Xr execve 2
 or similar call.
 .It NOTE_TRACK
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ calls.  The parent process will return with NOTE_TRACK set in the
 .Va fflags
 field, while the child process will return with NOTE_CHILD set in
 .Va fflags
-and the parent PID in 
+and the parent PID in
 .Va data .
 .It NOTE_TRACKERR
 This flag is returned if the system was unable to attach an event to
@@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Takes the signal number to monitor as the identifier and returns
 when the given signal is delivered to the process.
 This coexists with the
 .Fn signal
-and 
+and
 .Fn sigaction
 facilities, and has a lower precedence.  The filter will record
 all attempts to deliver a signal to a process, even if the signal has
@@ -416,9 +416,9 @@ function fails if:
 .It Bq Er EACCES
 The process does not have permission to register a filter.
 .It Bq Er EFAULT
-There was an error reading or writing the 
+There was an error reading or writing the
 .Va kevent
-structure. 
+structure.
 .It Bq Er EBADF
 The specified descriptor is invalid.
 .It Bq Er EINTR
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/ktrace.2 b/lib/libc/sys/ktrace.2
index ded62e6..fcbf46e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/ktrace.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/ktrace.2
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ struct ktr_header {
 .Pp
 The
 .Va ktr_len
-field specifies the length of the 
+field specifies the length of the
 .Va ktr_type
 data that follows this header.
 The
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ The
 .Va ktr_buf
 is an internal kernel pointer and is not useful.
 .Pp
-The generic header is followed by 
+The generic header is followed by
 .Va ktr_len
 bytes of a
 .Va ktr_type
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/link.2 b/lib/libc/sys/link.2
index 5ddc28b..baea6eb 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/link.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/link.2
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ is being placed cannot be extended because the
 user's quota of disk blocks on the file system
 containing the directory has been exhausted.
 .It Bq Er EIO
-An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to 
+An I/O error occurred while reading from or writing to
 the file system to make the directory entry.
 .It Bq Er EROFS
 The requested link requires writing in a directory on a read-only file
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ is outside the process's allocated address space.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn link
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
@@ -166,4 +166,4 @@ The
 .Fn link
 system call traditionally allows the super-user to link directories which
 corrupts the filesystem coherency.  This implementation no longer permits
-it. 
+it.
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/listen.2 b/lib/libc/sys/listen.2
index fd67ca4..b77500a 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/listen.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/listen.2
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ unlocks
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 A 0 return value indicates success; -1 indicates an error.
 .Sh ERRORS
-.Fn Listen 
+.Fn Listen
 will fail if:
 .Bl -tag -width Er
 .It Bq Er EBADF
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/lseek.2 b/lib/libc/sys/lseek.2
index e161025..362485b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/lseek.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/lseek.2
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ is incorrect English, but is maintained for historical reasons.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn lseek
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/madvise.2 b/lib/libc/sys/madvise.2
index 4886d02..e5d6a06 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/madvise.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/madvise.2
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ The known behaviors are given in
 #define MADV_CORE	9 /* revert to including pages in a core file */
 .Ed
 .Pp
-.Bl -tag -width MADV_SEQUENTIAL 
+.Bl -tag -width MADV_SEQUENTIAL
 .It Dv MADV_NORMAL
 Tells the system to revert to the default paging
 behavior.
@@ -92,26 +92,26 @@ this address range will incur a page fault.
 .It Dv MADV_FREE
 Gives the VM system the freedom to free pages,
 and tells the system that information in the specified page range
-is no longer important.  This is an efficient way of allowing 
+is no longer important.  This is an efficient way of allowing
 .Xr malloc 3
 to free pages anywhere in the address space, while keeping the address space
 valid.  The next time that the page is referenced, the page might be demand
-zeroed, or might contain the data that was there before the 
+zeroed, or might contain the data that was there before the
 .Dv MADV_FREE
 call.
 References made to that address space range will not make the VM system
 page the information back in from backing store until the page is
 modified again.
 .It Dv MADV_NOSYNC
-Request that the system not flush the data associated with this map to 
+Request that the system not flush the data associated with this map to
 physical backing store unless it needs to.  Typically this prevents the
 filesystem update daemon from gratuitously writing pages dirtied
-by the VM system to physical disk.  Note that VM/filesystem coherency is 
+by the VM system to physical disk.  Note that VM/filesystem coherency is
 always maintained, this feature simply ensures that the mapped data is
 only flush when it needs to be, usually by the system pager.
 .Pp
 This feature is typically used when you want to use a file-backed shared
-memory area to communicate between processes (IPC) and do not particularly 
+memory area to communicate between processes (IPC) and do not particularly
 need the data being stored in that area to be physically written to disk.
 With this feature you get the equivalent performance with mmap that you
 would expect to get with SysV shared memory calls, but in a more controllable
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ function will fail if:
 .It Bq Er EINVAL
 The virtual address range specified by the
 .Fa addr
-and 
+and
 .Fa len
 arguments is not valid.
 .El
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/minherit.2 b/lib/libc/sys/minherit.2
index d80c172..265d6d27 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/minherit.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/minherit.2
@@ -84,9 +84,9 @@ arguments.
 .El
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr fork 2 ,
-.Xr madvise 2 , 
-.Xr mincore 2 , 
-.Xr mprotect 2 , 
+.Xr madvise 2 ,
+.Xr mincore 2 ,
+.Xr mprotect 2 ,
 .Xr msync 2 ,
 .Xr munmap 2 ,
 .Xr rfork 2
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/mkdir.2 b/lib/libc/sys/mkdir.2
index 91374ce..5db2074 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/mkdir.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/mkdir.2
@@ -110,5 +110,5 @@ points outside the process's allocated address space.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn mkdir
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/mkfifo.2 b/lib/libc/sys/mkfifo.2
index aeed3d9..2a606cb 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/mkfifo.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/mkfifo.2
@@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ points outside the process's allocated address space.
 .El
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr chmod 2 ,
-.Xr mknod 2 , 
+.Xr mknod 2 ,
 .Xr stat 2 ,
 .Xr umask 2
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn mkfifo
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/mmap.2 b/lib/libc/sys/mmap.2
index e9eb9d3..f4cb27e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/mmap.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/mmap.2
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Region is not included in a core file.
 .It Dv MAP_NOSYNC
 Causes data dirtied via this VM map to be flushed to physical media
 only when necessary (usually by the pager) rather then gratuitously.
-Typically this prevents the update daemons from flushing pages dirtied 
+Typically this prevents the update daemons from flushing pages dirtied
 through such maps and thus allows efficient sharing of memory across
 unassociated processes using a file-backed shared memory map.  Without
 this option any VM pages you dirty may be flushed to disk every so often
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ The
 .Xr msync 2
 system call is obsolete since
 .Bx
-implements a coherent filesystem buffer cache.  However, it may be 
+implements a coherent filesystem buffer cache.  However, it may be
 used to associate dirty VM pages with filesystem buffers and thus cause
 them to be flushed to physical media sooner rather then later.
 .It Dv MAP_PRIVATE
@@ -217,26 +217,26 @@ to enable this option for other architechures.
 implies
 .Dv MAP_ANON ,
 and
-.Fa offset 
-of 0.   
-.Fa fd 
-must be -1 and 
-.Fa prot 
+.Fa offset
+of 0.
+.Fa fd
+must be -1 and
+.Fa prot
 must include at least
 .Dv PROT_READ
 and
 .Dv PROT_WRITE .
 This option creates
-a memory region that grows to at most 
-.Fa len 
+a memory region that grows to at most
+.Fa len
 bytes in size, starting from the stack top and growing down.  The
-stack top is the starting address returned by the call, plus 
-.Fa len 
+stack top is the starting address returned by the call, plus
+.Fa len
 bytes.  The bottom of the stack at maximum growth is the starting
 address returned by the call.
 .El
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Xr close 2
 function does not unmap pages, see
 .Xr munmap 2
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ was specified and insufficient memory was available.
 .Sh BUGS
 .Fa len
 is limited to 2GB.  Mmapping slightly more than 2GB doesn't work, but
-it is possible to map a window of size (filesize % 2GB) for file sizes 
+it is possible to map a window of size (filesize % 2GB) for file sizes
 of slightly less than 2G, 4GB, 6GB and 8GB.
 .Pp
 The limit is imposed for a variety of reasons.
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/modfind.2 b/lib/libc/sys/modfind.2
index ad29f2e..c1ac0c6 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/modfind.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/modfind.2
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm modfind
-.Nd returns the modid of a kernel module 
+.Nd returns the modid of a kernel module
 .Sh LIBRARY
 .Lb libc
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/mount.2 b/lib/libc/sys/mount.2
index efc3384..ef3d22d 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/mount.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/mount.2
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ suppress default semantics which affect filesystem access.
 .It Dv MNT_RDONLY
 The filesystem should be treated as read-only;
 Even the super-user may not write on it.
-Specifying MNT_UPDATE without this option will upgrade 
+Specifying MNT_UPDATE without this option will upgrade
 a read-only filesystem to read/write.
 .It Dv MNT_NOEXEC
 Do not allow files to be executed from the filesystem.
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Disable write clustering.
 .Pp
 The flag
 .Dv MNT_UPDATE
-indicates that the mount command is being applied 
+indicates that the mount command is being applied
 to an already mounted filesystem.
 This allows the mount flags to be changed without requiring
 that the filesystem be unmounted and remounted.
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ The
 option requires the SUIDDIR option to have been compiled into the kernel
 to have any effect.
 See the
-.Xr mount 8 
+.Xr mount 8
 and
 .Xr chmod 2
 pages for more information.
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ does not exist.
 .Ar Fspec
 is not a block device.
 .It Bq Er ENXIO
-The major device number of 
+The major device number of
 .Ar fspec
 is out of range (this indicates no device driver exists
 for the associated hardware).
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/mprotect.2 b/lib/libc/sys/mprotect.2
index 4403dc5..7f46d24 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/mprotect.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/mprotect.2
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ changes the specified pages to have protection
 Not all implementations will guarantee protection on a page basis;
 the granularity of protection changes may be as large as an entire region.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-Upon successful completion, 
+Upon successful completion,
 .Fn mprotect
 returns 0.  Otherwise a value of -1 is returned
 and
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/msync.2 b/lib/libc/sys/msync.2
index f9a7199..38fda84 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/msync.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/msync.2
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ is 0, all modified pages within the region containing
 will be flushed;
 if
 .Fa len
-is non-zero, only those pages containing 
+is non-zero, only those pages containing
 .Fa addr
 and
 .Fa len-1
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/nanosleep.2 b/lib/libc/sys/nanosleep.2
index 0c4749f..832684d 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/nanosleep.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/nanosleep.2
@@ -54,26 +54,26 @@ cause it to terminate the sleep early, regardless of the
 .Dv SA_RESTART
 value on the interrupting signal.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-If the 
+If the
 .Fn nanosleep
 function returns because the requested time has elapsed, the value
-returned will be zero.  
+returned will be zero.
 .Pp
-If the 
+If the
 .Fn nanosleep
 function returns due to the delivery of a signal, the value returned
 will be the -1, and the global variable
 .Va errno
 will be set to indicate the interruption.
-If 
+If
 .Fa rmtp
-is 
+is
 .Pf non- Dv NULL ,
 the timespec structure it references is updated to contain the
 unslept amount (the request time minus the time actually slept).
 .Pp
 If any of the following conditions occur, the
-.Fn nanosleep 
+.Fn nanosleep
 function shall return -1 and set
 .Va errno
 to the corresponding value:
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ to the corresponding value:
 .It Bq Er EFAULT
 Either
 .Fa rqtp
-or 
+or
 .Fa rmtp
 points to memory that is not a valid part of the process
 address space.
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/nfssvc.2 b/lib/libc/sys/nfssvc.2
index a852365..d28edc1 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/nfssvc.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/nfssvc.2
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ with the flags
 .Dv NFSSVC_MNTD
 and
 .Dv NFSSVC_GOTAUTH
-after filling the ticket into the 
+after filling the ticket into the
 ncd_authstr field
 and
 setting the ncd_authlen and ncd_authtype
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/open.2 b/lib/libc/sys/open.2
index feb05c1..5e4aeeb 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/open.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/open.2
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ argument may indicate the file is to be
 created if it does not exist (by specifying the
 .Dv O_CREAT
 flag).
-In this case 
+In this case
 .Nm
 requires a third argument
 .Fa "mode_t mode" ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/pipe.2 b/lib/libc/sys/pipe.2
index 0e0043f..5bbc563 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/pipe.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/pipe.2
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ for using the endpoints in the traditional manner when using a
 pipe in one direction.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 On successful creation of the pipe, zero is returned.
-Otherwise, 
+Otherwise,
 a value of -1 is returned and the variable
 .Va errno
 set to indicate the
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/ptrace.2 b/lib/libc/sys/ptrace.2
index 29a8538..a223b80 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/ptrace.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/ptrace.2
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ resumes execution, or 0 if no signal is to be sent.
 .It Dv PT_STEP
 The traced process is single stepped one instruction.
 The
-.Fa addr 
+.Fa addr
 and
 .Fa data
 fields are not used.
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/quotactl.2 b/lib/libc/sys/quotactl.2
index 75de692..6fe4a09 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/quotactl.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/quotactl.2
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ The
 .Fa addr
 argument specifies a file from which to take the quotas.
 The quota file must exist;
-it is normally created with the 
+it is normally created with the
 .Xr quotacheck 8
 program.
 The
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Get disk quota limits and current usage for the user or group
 .Fa Addr
 is a pointer to a
 .Fa struct dqblk
-structure (defined in 
+structure (defined in
 .Ao Pa ufs/ufs/quota.h Ac ) .
 .It Dv Q_SETQUOTA
 Set disk quota limits for the user or group
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Set disk quota limits for the user or group
 .Fa Addr
 is a pointer to a
 .Fa struct dqblk
-structure (defined in 
+structure (defined in
 .Ao Pa ufs/ufs/quota.h Ac ) .
 The usage fields of the
 .Fa dqblk
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/read.2 b/lib/libc/sys/read.2
index 90c8e78..9c38809 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/read.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/read.2
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ into the buffer pointed to by
 .Fa buf .
 .Fn Readv
 performs the same action, but scatters the input data
-into the 
+into the
 .Fa iovcnt
 buffers specified by the members of the
 .Fa iov
@@ -71,9 +71,9 @@ array: iov[0], iov[1], ..., iov[iovcnt\|\-\|1].
 performs the same function, but reads from the specified position in
 the file without modifying the file pointer.
 .Pp
-For 
+For
 .Fn readv ,
-the 
+the
 .Fa iovec
 structure is defined as:
 .Pp
@@ -84,10 +84,10 @@ struct iovec {
 };
 .Ed
 .Pp
-Each 
+Each
 .Fa iovec
 entry specifies the base address and length of an area
-in memory where data should be placed. 
+in memory where data should be placed.
 .Fn Readv
 will always fill an area completely before proceeding
 to the next.
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ The file was marked for non-blocking I/O,
 and no data were ready to be read.
 .El
 .Pp
-In addition, 
+In addition,
 .Fn readv
 may return one of the following errors:
 .Bl -tag -width Er
@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ The file descriptor is associated with a pipe, socket, or FIFO.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn read
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 The
 .Fn readv
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/recv.2 b/lib/libc/sys/recv.2
index 7830d77..7a49e41 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/recv.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/recv.2
@@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ the buffer associated with
 and modified on return to indicate the actual size of the
 address stored there.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Fn recv
-call is normally used only on a 
+call is normally used only on a
 .Em connected
 socket (see
 .Xr connect 2 )
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ call may be used to determine when more data arrive.
 .Pp
 The
 .Fa flags
-argument to a recv call is formed by 
+argument to a recv call is formed by
 .Em or Ap ing
 one or more of the values:
 .Bl -column MSG_WAITALL -offset indent
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ or the next data to be received is of a different type than that returned.
 .Pp
 The
 .Fn recvmsg
-call uses a 
+call uses a
 .Fa msghdr
 structure to minimize the number of directly supplied parameters.
 This structure has the following form, as defined in
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/rename.2 b/lib/libc/sys/rename.2
index 91bf125..41edfaf 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/rename.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/rename.2
@@ -50,10 +50,10 @@ causes the link named
 .Fa from
 to be renamed as
 .Fa to .
-If 
+If
 .Fa to
 exists, it is first removed.
-Both 
+Both
 .Fa from
 and
 .Fa to
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ not the file or directory to which it points.
 .\".Ql rename a/foo b/bar
 .\"and
 .\".Ql rename b/bar a/foo ,
-.\"respectively, 
+.\"respectively,
 .\"the system may deadlock attempting to lock
 .\"both directories for modification.
 .\"Hard links to directories should be
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ not the file or directory to which it points.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 A 0 value is returned if the operation succeeds, otherwise
 .Fn rename
-returns -1 and the global variable 
+returns -1 and the global variable
 .Va errno
 indicates the reason for the failure.
 .Sh ERRORS
@@ -197,5 +197,5 @@ is a directory and is not empty.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn rename
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/rfork.2 b/lib/libc/sys/rfork.2
index bf205d3..1f96447 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/rfork.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/rfork.2
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ The current implementation requires this flag to always be set.
 If set, the child process will be dissociated from the parent.
 Upon
 exit the child will not leave a status for the parent to collect.
-See 
+See
 .Xr wait 2 .
 .It RFFDG
 If set, the invoker's file descriptor table (see
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ for information.
 If set, the kernel will force sharing the sigacts structure between the
 child and the parent.
 .It RFLINUXTHPN
-If set, the kernel will return SIGUSR1 instead of SIGCHILD upon thread 
+If set, the kernel will return SIGUSR1 instead of SIGCHILD upon thread
 exit for the child.  This is intended to mimic certain Linux clone behaviour.
 .El
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/rtprio.2 b/lib/libc/sys/rtprio.2
index 3f902c0..bfd72c4 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/rtprio.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/rtprio.2
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994, Henrik Vestergaard Draboel
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 .\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
 .\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 .\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
 .Dd July 23, 1994
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <sys/types.h>
 .Fd #include <sys/rtprio.h>
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn rtprio "int function" "pid_t pid" "struct rtprio *rtp"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Fn rtprio
@@ -48,13 +48,13 @@ is used to lookup or change the realtime or idle priority of a process.
 .Pp
 .Fa function
 specifies the operation to be performed.
-RTP_LOOKUP to lookup the current priority, 
+RTP_LOOKUP to lookup the current priority,
 and RTP_SET to set the priority.
 .Fa pid
 specifies the process to be used, 0 for the current process.
 .Pp
 .Fa *rtp
-is a pointer to a struct rtprio which is used to specify the priority and priority type. 
+is a pointer to a struct rtprio which is used to specify the priority and priority type.
 This structure has the following form:
 .Bd -literal
 struct rtprio {
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ field may be RTP_PRIO_REALTIME for realtime priorities,
 RTP_PRIO_NORMAL for normal priorities, and RTP_PRIO_IDLE for idle priorities.
 The priority specified by the
 .Nm prio
-field ranges between 0 and  
+field ranges between 0 and
 .Dv RTP_PRIO_MAX (usually 31) .
 0 is the highest possible priority.
 .Pp
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ The global variable
 will be set to indicate the error.
 .Sh ERRORS
 .Fn rtprio
-will fail if 
+will fail if
 .Bl -tag -width Er
 .It Bq Er EINVAL
 The specified
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sched_get_priority_max.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sched_get_priority_max.2
index cebce15..20b2459 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sched_get_priority_max.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sched_get_priority_max.2
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ No process can be found corresponding to that specified by
 .Xr sched_set_scheduler 2
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
-.Fn sched_setscheduler 
+.Fn sched_setscheduler
 and
 .Fn sched_getscheduler
 functions conform to
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sched_setparam.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sched_setparam.2
index d937114..57b077f 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sched_setparam.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sched_setparam.2
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ is outside the range defined for the scheduling policy of the specified
 .Xr sched_yield 2
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
-.Fn sched_setparam 
+.Fn sched_setparam
 and
 .Fn sched_getparam
 functions conform to
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sched_setscheduler.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sched_setscheduler.2
index ff3d5ad..b616e6d 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sched_setscheduler.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sched_setscheduler.2
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ is outside the valid range for the specified scheduling policy.
 .Xr sched_yield 2
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
-.Fn sched_setscheduler 
+.Fn sched_setscheduler
 and
 .Fn sched_getscheduler
 functions conform to
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sched_yield.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sched_yield.2
index ed886c7..ee5c123 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sched_yield.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sched_yield.2
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ The
 function forces the running process to relinquish the processor until it
 again becomes the head of its process list.  It takes no arguments.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-The 
+The
 .Fn sched_yield
 function will return zero if it completes successfully, or it
 will return a value of -1 and set
@@ -57,6 +57,6 @@ The system is not configured to support this functionality.
 .El
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
-.Fn sched_yield 
+.Fn sched_yield
 function conforms to
 .St -p1003.1b-93 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/select.2 b/lib/libc/sys/select.2
index 058041f..9837eb5 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/select.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/select.2
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ is a non-nil pointer, it specifies the maximum interval to wait for the
 selection to complete.  System activity can lengthen the interval by
 an indeterminate amount.
 .Pp
-If 
+If
 .Fa timeout
 is a nil pointer, the select blocks indefinitely.
 .Pp
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ was invalid.
 The default size of
 .Dv FD_SETSIZE
 is currently 1024.
-In order to accommodate programs which might potentially 
+In order to accommodate programs which might potentially
 use a larger number of open files with
 .Fn select
 , it is possible
@@ -179,14 +179,14 @@ before the inclusion of any header which includes
 .Pp
 If
 .Fa nfds
-is greater than the number of open files, 
+is greater than the number of open files,
 .Fn select
 is not guaranteed to examine the unused file descriptors.   For historical
-reasons, 
+reasons,
 .Fn select
 will always examine the first 256 descriptors.
 .Sh BUGS
-.St -susv2 
+.St -susv2
 allows systems to modify the original timeout in place.
 Thus, it is unwise to assume that the timeout value will be unmodified
 by the
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/semctl.2 b/lib/libc/sys/semctl.2
index 4446586..2b3df68 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/semctl.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/semctl.2
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ on the semaphore set indicated by
 .Fa semid .
 A fourth argument, a
 .Fa "union semun arg" ,
-is required for certain values of 
+is required for certain values of
 .Fa cmd .
 For the commands that use the
 .Fa arg
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/semop.2 b/lib/libc/sys/semop.2
index b029d3a..3ead1dc 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/semop.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/semop.2
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ When
 is zero, the process waits for the semaphore's value to become zero.
 If it is already zero, the call to
 .Fn semop
-can return immediately.  Otherwise, the calling process is put to 
+can return immediately.  Otherwise, the calling process is put to
 sleep until the semaphore's value becomes zero.
 .El
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/send.2 b/lib/libc/sys/send.2
index f5749ee..6929ff1 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/send.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/send.2
@@ -58,9 +58,9 @@ and
 .Fn sendmsg
 are used to transmit a message to another socket.
 .Fn Send
-may be used only when the socket is in a 
+may be used only when the socket is in a
 .Em connected
-state, while 
+state, while
 .Fn sendto
 and
 .Fn sendmsg
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ may be used at any time.
 .Pp
 The address of the target is given by
 .Fa to
-with 
+with
 .Fa tolen
 specifying its size.
 The length of the message is given by
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ protocol family, and is used to implement Transaction
 .Dv MSG_DONTROUTE
 is usually used only by diagnostic or routing programs.
 .Pp
-See 
+See
 .Xr recv 2
 for a description of the
 .Fa msghdr
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ fail if:
 .It Bq Er EBADF
 An invalid descriptor was specified.
 .It Bq Er EACCES
-The destination address is a broadcast address, and 
+The destination address is a broadcast address, and
 .Dv SO_BROADCAST
 has not been set on the socket.
 .It Bq Er ENOTSOCK
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/setgroups.2 b/lib/libc/sys/setgroups.2
index 0974f93..668b3dc 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/setgroups.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/setgroups.2
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Fn Setgroups
 sets the group access list of the current user process
-according to the array 
+according to the array
 .Fa gidset .
 The parameter
 .Fa ngroups
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/setpgid.2 b/lib/libc/sys/setpgid.2
index c5c8cec..d9178b5 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/setpgid.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/setpgid.2
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ of the calling process.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn setpgid
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh COMPATIBILITY
 .Fn Setpgrp
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/setreuid.2 b/lib/libc/sys/setreuid.2
index 102d32b..aa87657 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/setreuid.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/setreuid.2
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ The real and effective user IDs of the
 current process are set according to the arguments.
 If
 .Fa ruid
-or 
+or
 .Fa euid
 is -1, the current uid is filled in by the system.
 Unprivileged users may change the real user
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ the standard
 .Fn setuid
 function is preferred.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-.Rv -std setreuid 
+.Rv -std setreuid
 .Sh ERRORS
 .Bl -tag -width Er
 .It Bq Er EPERM
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/setuid.2 b/lib/libc/sys/setuid.2
index 9374e93..4ef4d35 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/setuid.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/setuid.2
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ The
 .Fn seteuid
 and
 .Fn setegid
-functions are extensions based on the 
+functions are extensions based on the
 .Tn POSIX
 concept of
 .Li _POSIX_SAVED_IDS ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/shmat.2 b/lib/libc/sys/shmat.2
index 3c3e40f..6f7dc13 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/shmat.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/shmat.2
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ If
 is 0, the segment is attached at an address selected by the
 kernel.
 .It
-If 
+If
 .Fa addr
 is nonzero and SHM_RND is not specified in
 .Fa flag ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/shmget.2 b/lib/libc/sys/shmget.2
index bf0bb58..b176c53 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/shmget.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/shmget.2
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ corresponding to
 .Fa key
 already exists.
 .El
-.Sh "SEE ALSO" 
+.Sh "SEE ALSO"
 .Xr shmat 2 ,
 .Xr shmctl 2 ,
 .Xr shmdt 2 ,
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sigaction.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sigaction.2
index e35469e..1d1c98f 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sigaction.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sigaction.2
@@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ struct  sigaction {
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The system defines a set of signals that may be delivered to a process.
 Signal delivery resembles the occurrence of a hardware interrupt:
-the signal is normally blocked from further occurrence, the current process 
+the signal is normally blocked from further occurrence, the current process
 context is saved, and a new one is built.  A process may specify a
 .Em handler
-to which a signal is delivered, or specify that a signal is to be 
+to which a signal is delivered, or specify that a signal is to be
 .Em ignored .
 A process may also specify that a default action is to be taken
 by the system when a signal occurs.
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Signal routines normally execute with the signal that caused their
 invocation
 .Em blocked ,
 but other signals may yet occur.
-A global 
+A global
 .Em "signal mask"
 defines the set of signals currently blocked from delivery
 to a process.  The signal mask for a process is initialized
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ The set of pending signals is returned by the
 function.
 When a caught signal
 is delivered, the current state of the process is saved,
-a new signal mask is calculated (as described below), 
+a new signal mask is calculated (as described below),
 and the signal handler is invoked.  The call to the handler
 is arranged so that if the signal handling routine returns
 normally the process will resume execution in the context
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ installed for the duration of the process' signal handler
 .Xr sigprocmask
 call is made).
 This mask is formed by taking the union of the current signal mask set,
-the signal to be delivered, and 
+the signal to be delivered, and
 the signal mask associated with the handler to be invoked.
 .Pp
 .Fn Sigaction
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ specifies an action
 .Dv SIG_IGN ,
 or a handler routine) and mask
 to be used when delivering the specified signal.
-If 
+If
 .Fa oact
 is non-zero, the previous handling information for the signal
 is returned to the user.
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ is returned to the user.
 Once a signal handler is installed, it normally remains installed
 until another
 .Fn sigaction
-call is made, or an 
+call is made, or an
 .Xr execve 2
 is performed.
 A signal-specific default action may be reset by
@@ -212,11 +212,11 @@ See paragraph below.
 If this bit is set, the handler function is assumed to be pointed to
 by the sa_sigaction member of struct sigaction and should match the
 prototype shown above or as below in
-.Sx EXAMPLES .                      
-This bit should not be set when assigning 
-.Dv SIG_DFL                              
-or                                       
-.Dv SIG_IGN .                            
+.Sx EXAMPLES .
+This bit should not be set when assigning
+.Dv SIG_DFL
+or
+.Dv SIG_IGN .
 .El
 .Pp
 If a signal is caught during the system calls listed below,
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ is possible on a descriptor (see
 .Sh NOTE
 The
 .Fa sa_mask
-field specified in 
+field specified in
 .Fa act
 is not allowed to block
 .Dv SIGKILL
@@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Any attempt to do so will be silently ignored.
 The following functions are either reentrant or not interruptible
 by signals and are async-signal safe.
 Therefore applications may
-invoke them, without restriction, from signal-catching functions: 
+invoke them, without restriction, from signal-catching functions:
 .Pp
 Base Interfaces:
 .Pp
@@ -462,14 +462,14 @@ The
 .Dv sa_handler
 member declaration in
 .Fx
-include files is that of ANSI C (as required by POSIX), 
+include files is that of ANSI C (as required by POSIX),
 so a function pointer of a BSD-style function needs to be casted to
 compile without warning.
 The traditional BSD style is not portable and since its capabilities
 are a full subset of a SA_SIGINFO handler,
 its use is deprecated.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Fa sig
 argument is the signal number, one of the
 .Dv SIG...
@@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ of the following occurs:
 .It Bq Er EFAULT
 Either
 .Fa act
-or 
+or
 .Fa oact
 points to memory that is not a valid part of the process
 address space.
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ or
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn sigaction
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 The
 .Dv SA_ONSTACK
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sigaltstack.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sigaltstack.2
index 171cafc..d69b34b 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sigaltstack.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sigaltstack.2
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ call), the system checks to see
 if the process is currently executing on that stack.
 If the process is not currently executing on the signal stack,
 the system arranges a switch to the signal stack for the
-duration of the signal handler's execution. 
+duration of the signal handler's execution.
 .Pp
 If
 .Dv SS_DISABLE
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ If the stack overflows and this space is not protected
 unpredictable results may occur.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 Upon successful completion, a value of 0 is returned.
-Otherwise, a value of -1 is returned and 
+Otherwise, a value of -1 is returned and
 .Va errno
 is set to indicate the error.
 .Sh ERRORS
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sigpending.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sigpending.2
index e05d186..361a918 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sigpending.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sigpending.2
@@ -76,5 +76,5 @@ argument specified an invalid address.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn sigpending
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sigreturn.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sigreturn.2
index 674f453..6325b81 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sigreturn.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sigreturn.2
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ This system call is not available in 4.2
 hence it should not be used if backward compatibility is needed.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, the system call does not return.
-Otherwise, a value of -1 is returned and 
+Otherwise, a value of -1 is returned and
 .Va errno
 is set to indicate the error.
 .Sh ERRORS
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sigstack.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sigstack.2
index 61f58db..9f1dfa9 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sigstack.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sigstack.2
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .Sh LIBRARY
 .Lb libc
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Fn sigstack
 function has been deprecated in favor of the interface described in
 .Xr sigaltstack 2 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sigsuspend.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sigsuspend.2
index b3984be..280d6d9 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sigsuspend.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sigsuspend.2
@@ -78,5 +78,5 @@ set to
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn sigsupend
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sigwait.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sigwait.2
index 818a623..bd46b1c 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sigwait.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sigwait.2
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 27, 2000
 .Dt SIGWAIT 3
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/socket.2 b/lib/libc/sys/socket.2
index ef98bf5..ef2669f 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/socket.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/socket.2
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Once connected, data may be transferred using
 .Xr read 2
 and
 .Xr write 2
-calls or some variant of the 
+calls or some variant of the
 .Xr send 2
 and
 .Xr recv 2
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ sockets employ the same system calls
 as
 .Dv SOCK_STREAM
 sockets.  The only difference
-is that 
+is that
 .Xr read 2
 calls will return only the amount of data requested,
 and any remaining in the arriving packet will be discarded.
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ calls.  Datagrams are generally received with
 .Xr recvfrom 2 ,
 which returns the next datagram with its return address.
 .Pp
-An 
+An
 .Xr fcntl 2
 call can be used to specify a process group to receive
 a
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/stat.2 b/lib/libc/sys/stat.2
index f65c970..9984a1e 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/stat.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/stat.2
@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ The
 .Fn stat
 and
 .Fn fstat
-function calls are expected to conform to 
+function calls are expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 A
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/swapon.2 b/lib/libc/sys/swapon.2
index 1eb2b05..16e7e16 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/swapon.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/swapon.2
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
 .Fn swapon "const char *special"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Fn Swapon
-makes the block device 
+makes the block device
 .Fa special
 available to the system for
 allocation for paging and swapping.  The names of potentially
 available devices are known to the system and defined at system
-configuration time.  The size of the swap area on 
+configuration time.  The size of the swap area on
 .Fa special
 is calculated at the time the device is first made available
 for swapping.
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ The device configured by
 was not
 configured into the system as a swap device.
 .It Bq Er ENXIO
-The major device number of 
+The major device number of
 .Fa special
 is out of range (this indicates no device driver exists
 for the associated hardware).
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/sync.2 b/lib/libc/sys/sync.2
index f5e112c..d60c0e4 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/sync.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/sync.2
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
 .Ft void
 .Fn sync void
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Fn sync
 function forces a write of dirty (modified) buffers
 in the block buffer cache out
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ call is issued
 frequently
 by the user process
 .Xr syncer 4
-(about every 30 seconds). 
+(about every 30 seconds).
 .Pp
 The function
 .Xr fsync 2
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/umask.2 b/lib/libc/sys/umask.2
index 4e7815b..026a983 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/umask.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/umask.2
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ function is always successful.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn umask
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 .Sh HISTORY
 An
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/utimes.2 b/lib/libc/sys/utimes.2
index fdf893f..84a0a0d 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/utimes.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/utimes.2
@@ -60,9 +60,9 @@ or referenced by
 are changed as specified by the argument
 .Fa times .
 .Pp
-If 
+If
 .Fa times
-is 
+is
 .Dv NULL ,
 the access and modification times are set to the current time.
 The caller must be the owner of the file, have permission to
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ write the file, or be the super-user.
 If
 .Fa times
 is
-.Pf non- Dv NULL , 
+.Pf non- Dv NULL ,
 it is assumed to point to an array of two timeval structures.
 The access time is set to the value of the first element, and the
 modification time is set to the value of the second element.
@@ -120,9 +120,9 @@ An I/O error occurred while reading or writing the affected inode.
 .It Bq Er ELOOP
 Too many symbolic links were encountered in translating the pathname.
 .It Bq Er ENAMETOOLONG
-A component of a pathname exceeded 
+A component of a pathname exceeded
 .Dv NAME_MAX
-characters, or an entire path name exceeded 
+characters, or an entire path name exceeded
 .Dv PATH_MAX
 characters.
 .It Bq Er ENOENT
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/vfork.2 b/lib/libc/sys/vfork.2
index 91a28ee..49e36b6 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/vfork.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/vfork.2
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Same as for
 .Xr fork 2 .
 .Sh BUGS
 This system call will be eliminated when proper system sharing
-mechanisms are implemented. 
+mechanisms are implemented.
 Users should not depend on the memory
 sharing semantics of
 .Xr vfork 2
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/wait.2 b/lib/libc/sys/wait.2
index 3fa5c2b..bbb2c57 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/wait.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/wait.2
@@ -63,9 +63,9 @@ function suspends execution of its calling process until
 .Fa status
 information is available for a terminated child process,
 or a signal is received.
-On return from a successful 
+On return from a successful
 .Fn wait
-call, 
+call,
 the
 .Fa status
 area contains termination information about the process that exited
@@ -131,9 +131,9 @@ for stopped processes).
 When the
 .Dv WNOHANG
 option is specified and no processes
-wish to report status, 
+wish to report status,
 .Fn wait4
-returns a 
+returns a
 process id
 of 0.
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libc/sys/write.2 b/lib/libc/sys/write.2
index 255447d..5d4fdc2 100644
--- a/lib/libc/sys/write.2
+++ b/lib/libc/sys/write.2
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ from the buffer pointed to by
 .Fa buf .
 .Fn Writev
 performs the same action, but gathers the output data
-from the 
+from the
 .Fa iovcnt
 buffers specified by the members of the
 .Fa iov
@@ -71,9 +71,9 @@ array: iov[0], iov[1], ..., iov[iovcnt\|-\|1].
 performs the same function, but writes to the specified position in
 the file without modifying the file pointer.
 .Pp
-For 
+For
 .Fn writev ,
-the 
+the
 .Fa iovec
 structure is defined as:
 .Pp
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ struct iovec {
 };
 .Ed
 .Pp
-Each 
+Each
 .Fa iovec
 entry specifies the base address and length of an area
 in memory from which data should be written.
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ The file was marked for non-blocking I/O,
 and no data could be written immediately.
 .El
 .Pp
-In addition, 
+In addition,
 .Fn writev
 may return one of the following errors:
 .Bl -tag -width Er
@@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ The file descriptor is associated with a pipe, socket, or FIFO.
 .Sh STANDARDS
 The
 .Fn write
-function call is expected to conform to 
+function call is expected to conform to
 .St -p1003.1-90 .
 The
 .Fn writev
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_attr.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_attr.3
index c34df1e..6707b0a 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_attr.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_attr.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 28, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_ATTR 3
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ functions set the attribute that corresponds to each function name.
 The
 .Fn pthread_attr_get*
 functions copy the value of the attribute that corresponds to each function name
-to the location pointed to by the second function parameter. 
+to the location pointed to by the second function parameter.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, these functions return 0.
 Otherwise, an error number is returned to indicate the error.
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_condattr.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_condattr.3
index 5b0200f..d117c75 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_condattr.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_condattr.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 28, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_CONDATTR 3
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_detach.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_detach.3
index 75c9d42..a3b660f 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_detach.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_detach.3
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ If
 has not terminated,
 .Fn pthread_detach
 will not cause it to terminate.
-The effect of multiple 
+The effect of multiple
 .Fn pthread_detach
 calls on the same target thread is unspecified.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_exit.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_exit.3
index 5f6f75b..1eabc9b 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_exit.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_exit.3
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ is undefined if called from a cancellation handler or destructor function
 that was invoked as the result of an implicit or explicit call to
 .Fn pthread_exit .
 .Pp
-After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto) 
+After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto)
 variables of the thread is undefined.
 Thus, references to local variables
 of the exiting thread should not be used for the
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_kill.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_kill.3
index b5bb859..a18a969 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_kill.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_kill.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 27, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_KILL 3
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_mutexattr.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_mutexattr.3
index ec79518..555cdd4 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_mutexattr.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_mutexattr.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd May 1, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR 3
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_once.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_once.3
index 736e32e..72a1322 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_once.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_once.3
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ is not a cancellation point.
 However, if
 .Fn init_routine
 is a cancellation point and is cancelled, the effect on
-.Fa once_control is as if 
+.Fa once_control is as if
 .Fn pthread_once
 was never called.
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3
index bd1bfe8..70acf92 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn pthread_rwlock_destroy
-function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with 
+function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with
 .Fn pthread_rwlock_init .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, the
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3
index 80db1a9..ab6a6e1 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 The
 .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_destroy
 function is used to destroy a read/write lock attribute object
-previously created with 
+previously created with
 .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_init .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, the
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_schedparam.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_schedparam.3
index 3e2e32e..96287e5 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_schedparam.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_schedparam.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd May 1, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_SCHEDPARAM 3
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_sigmask.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_sigmask.3
index a335107..6af3464 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_sigmask.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/pthread_sigmask.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 27, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_SIGMASK 3
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_destroy.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_destroy.3
index 4074adc..0de4691 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_destroy.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_destroy.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_DESTROY 3
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_getvalue.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_getvalue.3
index e9ac2a6..3ee947a 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_getvalue.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_getvalue.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_GETVALUE 3
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_init.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_init.3
index a727fe2..5f43c08 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_init.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_init.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_INIT 3
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_open.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_open.3
index 22229b3..eec5a57 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_open.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_open.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,14 +24,14 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_OPEN 3
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm sem_open , 
-.Nm sem_close , 
+.Nm sem_open ,
+.Nm sem_close ,
 .Nm sem_unlink
 .Nd named semaphore operations
 .Sh LIBRARY
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_post.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_post.3
index 970550d..0c8dea4 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_post.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_post.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_POST 3
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_wait.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_wait.3
index beff2e3..397cbfe 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/sem_wait.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/sem_wait.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,13 +24,13 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_WAIT 3
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm sem_wait , 
+.Nm sem_wait ,
 .Nm sem_trywait
 .Nd decrement (lock) a semaphore
 .Sh LIBRARY
diff --git a/lib/libc_r/man/sigwait.3 b/lib/libc_r/man/sigwait.3
index 818a623..bd46b1c 100644
--- a/lib/libc_r/man/sigwait.3
+++ b/lib/libc_r/man/sigwait.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 27, 2000
 .Dt SIGWAIT 3
diff --git a/lib/libcalendar/calendar.3 b/lib/libcalendar/calendar.3
index 054b7e2..1e7b51a 100644
--- a/lib/libcalendar/calendar.3
+++ b/lib/libcalendar/calendar.3
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ is the date in Gregorian Calendar, whereas
 .Fn easteroj
 returns the date in Julian Calendar.
 .Pp
-The functions 
+The functions
 .Fn gdate ,
 .Fn jdate ,
 .Fn ndaysg
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ This function is defined for Gregorian Calendar only.
 .Pp
 The function
 .Fn weekday
-returns the weekday (Mo = 0 .. Su = 6) of the day numbered 
+returns the weekday (Mo = 0 .. Su = 6) of the day numbered
 .Fa nd .
 .Pp
 The structure
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ and in this library.
 .Xr ncal 1 ,
 .Xr strftime 3
 .Sh STANDARDS
-The week number conforms to ISO 8601: 1988. 
+The week number conforms to ISO 8601: 1988.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Nm calendar
diff --git a/lib/libcam/cam.3 b/lib/libcam/cam.3
index fd838d3..2253bda 100644
--- a/lib/libcam/cam.3
+++ b/lib/libcam/cam.3
@@ -147,15 +147,15 @@ struct cam_device {
 						     * Unit number given by
 						     * the user.
 						     */
-	char		device_name[DEV_IDLEN+1];/* 
-						  * Name of the device, 
-						  * e.g. 'pass' 
+	char		device_name[DEV_IDLEN+1];/*
+						  * Name of the device,
+						  * e.g. 'pass'
 						  */
 	u_int32_t	dev_unit_num;	/* Unit number of the passthrough
 					 * device associated with this
 					 * particular device.
 					 */
-	
+
 	char		sim_name[SIM_IDLEN+1];/*
 					       * Controller name, e.g.'ahc'
 					       */
@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ returns an allocated and partially initialized CCB, or NULL if allocation
 of the CCB failed.
 .Pp
 .Fn cam_send_ccb
-returns a value of -1 if an error occured, and 
+returns a value of -1 if an error occured, and
 .Va errno
 is set to indicate the error.
 .Pp
@@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ characters long.
 .Xr pass 4 ,
 .Xr camcontrol 8
 .Sh HISTORY
-The CAM library first appeared in 
+The CAM library first appeared in
 .Fx 3.0 .
 .Sh AUTHORS
 .An Kenneth Merry Aq ken@FreeBSD.org
diff --git a/lib/libcam/cam_cdbparse.3 b/lib/libcam/cam_cdbparse.3
index 741afb5..2ed7ef6 100644
--- a/lib/libcam/cam_cdbparse.3
+++ b/lib/libcam/cam_cdbparse.3
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ layer.
 These functions may be used in new applications, but users may find it
 easier to use the various SCSI CCB building functions included with the
 .Xr cam 3
-library.  (e.g. 
+library.  (e.g.
 .Fn cam_fill_csio ,
 .Fn scsi_start_stop ,
 and
@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ typedef enum {
      CAM_MSGB_VALID        = 0x20000000,/* Message buffer valid		*/
      CAM_STATUS_VALID      = 0x40000000,/* Status buffer valid		*/
      CAM_DATAB_VALID       = 0x80000000,/* Data buffer valid		*/
-	
+
 /* Host target Mode flags */
      CAM_TERM_IO           = 0x20000000,/* Terminate I/O Message sup.    */
      CAM_DISCONNECT        = 0x40000000,/* Disconnects are mandatory     */
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ driver is told to enable error recovery via the
 .Dv CAM_PASS_ERR_RECOVER
 flag.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Fa timeout
 tells the kernel how long to wait for the given command to complete.  If
 the timeout expires and the command hasn't completed, the CCB will be
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ except that the values to substitute for variable arguments in
 are retrieved via the
 .Fn arg_get
 function passed in to
-.Fn csio_build_visit 
+.Fn csio_build_visit
 instead of via
 .Xr stdarg 3 .
 The
diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.1/cftime.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.1/cftime.3
index ed771e2..fd4e066 100644
--- a/lib/libcompat/4.1/cftime.3
+++ b/lib/libcompat/4.1/cftime.3
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994, 1995 Joerg Wunsch
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" This program is free software.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
 .\" 4. The name of the developer may not be used to endorse or promote
 .\"    products derived from this software without specific prior written
 .\"    permission.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE DEVELOPERS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
-.\" 
+.\"
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
 .Dd June 15, 1993
diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.1/ftime.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.1/ftime.3
index 4896fa0..63da0ce8 100644
--- a/lib/libcompat/4.1/ftime.3
+++ b/lib/libcompat/4.1/ftime.3
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <sys/types.h>
 .Fd #include <sys/timeb.h>
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn ftime "struct timeb *tp"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Bf -symbolic
@@ -81,5 +81,5 @@ Daylight Saving time applies locally during the appropriate part of the year.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Nm
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.1/getpw.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.1/getpw.3
index d270e3c..618da44 100644
--- a/lib/libcompat/4.1/getpw.3
+++ b/lib/libcompat/4.1/getpw.3
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ character.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
 .Fn getpw
-function returns the zero if successful, otherwise 
+function returns the zero if successful, otherwise
 a non-zero if the entry does not exist.
 .Sh FILES
 .Bl -tag -width /etc/passwd -compact
diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.1/stty.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.1/stty.3
index 95b6589..dddb93c2 100644
--- a/lib/libcompat/4.1/stty.3
+++ b/lib/libcompat/4.1/stty.3
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ the
 .Fn gtty
 call is
 .Ql ioctl(fd, TIOCGETP, buf) .
-See 
+See
 .Xr ioctl 2
 and
 .Xr tty 4
@@ -93,5 +93,5 @@ The
 .Fn stty
 and
 .Fn gtty
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.3/insque.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.3/insque.3
index 29ea3f4..2744dae 100644
--- a/lib/libcompat/4.3/insque.3
+++ b/lib/libcompat/4.3/insque.3
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ The insque and remque functions are considered obsolete.
 .Pp
 The
 .Fn insque
-and 
+and
 .Fn remque
 functions
 manipulate queues built from doubly linked lists.  Each
@@ -69,9 +69,9 @@ element in the queue must be in the form of
 .Dq Li struct qelem .
 The function
 .Fn insque
-inserts 
+inserts
 .Fa elem
-in a queue immediately after 
+in a queue immediately after
 .Fa pred ;
 .Fn remque
 removes an entry
@@ -85,5 +85,5 @@ The
 .Fn insque
 and
 .Fn remque
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.3/lsearch.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.3/lsearch.3
index 3e0ba94..40b2c3e 100644
--- a/lib/libcompat/4.3/lsearch.3
+++ b/lib/libcompat/4.3/lsearch.3
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ is a comparison routine which is used to compare two elements.
 It takes two arguments which point to the
 .Fa key
 object and to an array member, in that order, and must return an integer
-less than, equivalent to, or greater than zero if the 
+less than, equivalent to, or greater than zero if the
 .Fa key
 object is considered, respectively, to be less than, equal to, or greater
 than the array member.
diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.3/re_comp.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.3/re_comp.3
index 10cd0a8..c4830b0 100644
--- a/lib/libcompat/4.3/re_comp.3
+++ b/lib/libcompat/4.3/re_comp.3
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This interface is made obsolete by
 The
 .Fn re_comp
 function
-compiles a string into an internal form suitable for pattern matching. 
+compiles a string into an internal form suitable for pattern matching.
 The
 .Fn re_exec
 function
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ returns 0 if the string
 .Fa s
 was compiled successfully; otherwise a string containing an
 error message is returned.
-If 
+If
 .Fn re_comp
 is passed 0 or a null string, it returns without changing the currently
 compiled regular expression.
@@ -89,10 +89,10 @@ The strings passed to both
 .Fn re_comp
 and
 .Fn re_exec
-may have trailing or embedded newline characters; 
+may have trailing or embedded newline characters;
 they are terminated by
 .Dv NUL Ns s .
-The regular expressions recognized are described in the manual entry for 
+The regular expressions recognized are described in the manual entry for
 .Xr ed 1 ,
 given the above difference.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
@@ -125,5 +125,5 @@ The
 .Fn re_comp
 and
 .Fn re_exec
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.0 .
diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.3/rexec.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.3/rexec.3
index a1b2a89..737c976 100644
--- a/lib/libcompat/4.3/rexec.3
+++ b/lib/libcompat/4.3/rexec.3
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
 .Fn rexec "char **ahost" "int inport" "char *user" "char *passwd" "char *cmd" "int *fd2p"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Bf -symbolic
-This interface is obsoleted by 
+This interface is obsoleted by
 .Xr rcmd 3 .
 .Ef
 .Pp
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ specifies which well-known
 Internet port to use for
 the connection; the call
 .Fn getservbyname \*qexec\*q \*qtcp\*q
-(see 
+(see
 .Xr getservent 3 )
 will return a pointer to a structure, which contains the
 necessary port.
@@ -107,10 +107,10 @@ as the secondary connection is set up after authorization has been
 verified.
 If
 .Fa fd2p
-is 0, then the 
+is 0, then the
 .Em stderr
 (unit 2 of the remote
-command) will be made the same as the 
+command) will be made the same as the
 .Em stdout
 and no
 provision is made for sending arbitrary signals to the remote process,
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ although you may be able to get its attention by using out-of-band data.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Fn rexec
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.2 .
 .Sh BUGS
 The
diff --git a/lib/libcompat/4.4/cuserid.3 b/lib/libcompat/4.4/cuserid.3
index 5ee3207..5ac7e34 100644
--- a/lib/libcompat/4.4/cuserid.3
+++ b/lib/libcompat/4.4/cuserid.3
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Joerg Wunsch
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
 .\" 4. The name of the developer may not be used to endorse or promote
 .\"    products derived from this software without specific prior written
 .\"    permission.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE DEVELOPERS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\"
 .Dd April 10, 1995
diff --git a/lib/libcrypt/crypt.3 b/lib/libcrypt/crypt.3
index ed401e2..3f8d79f 100644
--- a/lib/libcrypt/crypt.3
+++ b/lib/libcrypt/crypt.3
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ string, 20 or 13 bytes (plus null) in length, consisting of the
 followed by the encoded 64-bit encryption.
 .Ss "Modular" crypt:
 .Pp
-If the salt begins with the string 
+If the salt begins with the string
 .Fa $digit$
 then the Modular Crypt Format is used.  The
 .Fa digit
diff --git a/lib/libdevinfo/devinfo.3 b/lib/libdevinfo/devinfo.3
index f3fb3a2..76dd7b0 100644
--- a/lib/libdevinfo/devinfo.3
+++ b/lib/libdevinfo/devinfo.3
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
 .Fn devinfo_handle_to_rman "devinfo_handle_t handle"
 .Ft int
 .Fo devinfo_foreach_device_child
-.Fa "struct devinfo_dev *parent" 
+.Fa "struct devinfo_dev *parent"
 .Fa "int \*[lp]*fn\*[rp]\*[lp]struct devinfo_dev *child, void *arg\*[rp]"
 .Fa "void *arg"
 .Fc
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ must be called again before using any other functions.
 .Fn devinfo_handle_to_resource
 and
 .Fn devinfo_handle_to_rman
-return pointers to 
+return pointers to
 .Vt devinfo_dev ,
 .Vt devinfo_res
 and
diff --git a/lib/libdevstat/devstat.3 b/lib/libdevstat/devstat.3
index c7418a7..89a584b 100644
--- a/lib/libdevstat/devstat.3
+++ b/lib/libdevstat/devstat.3
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ version.
 .Fn checkversion
 checks the userland devstat version against the kernel devstat version.  If
 the two are identical, it returns zero.  Otherwise, it prints an
-appropriate error in 
+appropriate error in
 .Va devstat_errbuf
 and returns -1.
 .Pp
@@ -134,12 +134,12 @@ fetches the current list of devices and statistics into the supplied
 .Va statinfo
 structure.  The
 .Va statinfo
-structure can be found in 
+structure can be found in
 .Aq Pa devstat.h :
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
 struct statinfo {
 	long            cp_time[CPUSTATES];
-	long            tk_nin;  
+	long            tk_nin;
 	long            tk_nout;
 	struct devinfo  *dinfo;
 	struct timeval  busy_time;
@@ -205,10 +205,10 @@ variable.  The generation subelement of the
 structure contains the generation number from the
 .Va kern.devstat.all
 .Nm sysctl
-variable.  
+variable.
 The
 .Va numdevs
-subelement of the 
+subelement of the
 .Va devinfo
 structure contains the current
 number of devices registered with the kernel
@@ -228,11 +228,11 @@ from user input.
 .It performance
 If performance mode is enabled, devices will be sorted based on the
 .Va bytes
-field in the 
+field in the
 .Va device_selection
 structure passed in to
 .Fn selectdevs .
-The 
+The
 .Va bytes
 value currently must be maintained by the user.  In the future,
 this may be done for him in a
@@ -245,11 +245,11 @@ performance tracking code will honor those selections and will only sort
 among the selected devices.
 .It order in the devstat list
 If the selection mode is set to DS_SELECT_ADD, and if there are still less
-than 
+than
 .Va maxshowdevs
 devices selected,
 .Fn selectdevs
-will automatically select up to 
+will automatically select up to
 .Va maxshowdevs
 devices.
 .El
@@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ In add mode,
 .Fn selectdevs
 will select any unselected devices specified by name or matching pattern.
 It will also select more devices, in devstat list order, until the number
-of selected devices is equal to 
+of selected devices is equal to
 .Va maxshowdevs
 or until all devices are
 selected.
@@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ any devices other than those specified.
 .Pp
 In all selection modes,
 .Fn selectdevs
-will not select any more than 
+will not select any more than
 .Va maxshowdevs
 devices.  One exception to
 this is when you are in
@@ -300,26 +300,26 @@ device.  This may be the wrong behavior, and probably requires additional
 thought.
 .Pp
 .Fn selectdevs
-handles allocation and resizing of the 
+handles allocation and resizing of the
 .Va dev_select
 structure passed in
 by the client.
 .Fn selectdevs
-uses the 
+uses the
 .Va numdevs
-and 
+and
 .Va current_generation
 fields to track the
 current
 .Nm
-generation and number of devices.  If 
+generation and number of devices.  If
 .Va num_selections
 is not the same
-as 
+as
 .Va numdevs
-or if 
+or if
 .Va select_generation
-is not the same as 
+is not the same as
 .Va current_generation ,
 .Fn selectdevs
 will resize the selection list as necessary, and re-initialize the
@@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Currently known match types include:
 .Bl -tag -width indent -compact
 .It device type:
 .Bl -tag -width 9n -compact
-.It da 
+.It da
 Direct Access devices
 .It sa
 Sequential Access devices
@@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ is NULL, the result will be the total number of transactions listed in
 .It total_blocks
 This is basically
 .Va total_bytes
-divided by the device blocksize.  If the device blocksize is listed as 
+divided by the device blocksize.  If the device blocksize is listed as
 .Sq 0 ,
 the device blocksize will default to 512 bytes.
 .It kb_per_transfer
@@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ provides an easy way to find the difference in seconds between two
 structures.  This is most commonly used in conjunction with the time
 recorded by the
 .Fn getdevs
-function (in struct 
+function (in struct
 .Va statinfo )
 each time it fetches the current
 .Nm
diff --git a/lib/libdisk/libdisk.3 b/lib/libdisk/libdisk.3
index 7f1380f..00be4ce 100644
--- a/lib/libdisk/libdisk.3
+++ b/lib/libdisk/libdisk.3
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ is a rootfs, allocate partition
 .It CHUNK_ACTIVE
 This is the active slice in the MBR.
 .It CHUNK_FORCE_ALL
-Force a dedicated disk for 
+Force a dedicated disk for
 .Fx ,
 bypassing all BIOS geometry considerations.
 .El
@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Chunk name strings can be accessed directly using the external array
 .Va chunk_n .
 .Pp
 .Fn slice_type_name
-returns the name strings associated with the specified 
+returns the name strings associated with the specified
 .Ql type .
 .Ql subtype .
 If
diff --git a/lib/libedit/editline.3 b/lib/libedit/editline.3
index ab744ef..5034163 100644
--- a/lib/libedit/editline.3
+++ b/lib/libedit/editline.3
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ may be modified by
 .Fn el_parse .
 The colon between
 .Dq prog
-and the command, 
+and the command,
 .Ar command ,
 will be replaced with a NUL
 .Po
@@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Otherwise, the current signal handlers will be used.
 Perform the
 .Ic bind
 builtin command.
-Refer to 
+Refer to
 .Xr editrc 5
 for more information.
 .It Dv EL_ECHOTC , Xo
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ for more information.
 Perform the
 .Ic echotc
 builtin command.
-Refer to 
+Refer to
 .Xr editrc 5
 for more information.
 .It Dv EL_SETTC , Xo
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ for more information.
 Perform the
 .Ic settc
 builtin command.
-Refer to 
+Refer to
 .Xr editrc 5
 for more information.
 .It Dv EL_SETTY , Xo
@@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ for more information.
 Perform the
 .Ic setty
 builtin command.
-Refer to 
+Refer to
 .Xr editrc 5
 for more information.
 .It Dv EL_TELLTC , Xo
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ for more information.
 Perform the
 .Ic telltc
 builtin command.
-Refer to 
+Refer to
 .Xr editrc 5
 for more information.
 .It Dv EL_ADDFN , Xo
@@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ should be the value returned by
 .It Fn el_source
 Initialise
 .Nm
-by reading the contents of 
+by reading the contents of
 .Fa file .
 .Fn el_parse
 is called for each line in
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ if there isn't one.
 .It Dv H_ENTER , Fa "const char *str"
 Add
 .Fa str
-as a new element to the history, and, if necessary, 
+as a new element to the history, and, if necessary,
 removing the oldest entry to keep the list to the created size.
 .It Dv H_PREV_STR , Fa "const char *str"
 Return the closest previous event that starts with
diff --git a/lib/libedit/editrc.5 b/lib/libedit/editrc.5
index 62d993c..2d8c3e4 100644
--- a/lib/libedit/editrc.5
+++ b/lib/libedit/editrc.5
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Refer to
 .Sx BUILTIN COMMANDS
 for more information.
 .Pp
-.Ar prog 
+.Ar prog
 is the program name string that a program defines when it calls
 .Xr el_init 3
 to setup
@@ -119,11 +119,11 @@ Options include:
 .It Fl e
 Bind all keys to the standard GNU Emacs-like bindings.
 .It Fl v
-Bind all keys to the standard 
+Bind all keys to the standard
 .Xr vi 1 Ns -like
 bindings.
 .It Fl a
-List or change key bindings in the 
+List or change key bindings in the
 .Xr vi 1
 mode alternate (command mode) key map.
 .It Fl k
diff --git a/lib/libfetch/fetch.3 b/lib/libfetch/fetch.3
index 7699a9a..f37735b 100644
--- a/lib/libfetch/fetch.3
+++ b/lib/libfetch/fetch.3
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ structure pointed to by the
 .Fa us
 argument.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Fa flags
 argument is a string of characters which specify transfer options.
 The
@@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ unable to allocate memory, or the URL is syntactically incorrect,
 .Fn fetchParseURL
 returns a NULL pointer.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Fn fetchStat
 functions return 0 on success and -1 on failure.
 .Pp
@@ -404,39 +404,39 @@ The following error codes are defined in
 .Aq Pa fetch.h :
 .Bl -tag -width 18n
 .It Bq Er FETCH_ABORT
-Operation aborted    
+Operation aborted
 .It Bq Er FETCH_AUTH
-Authentication failed    
+Authentication failed
 .It Bq Er FETCH_DOWN
-Service unavailable    
+Service unavailable
 .It Bq Er FETCH_EXISTS
-File exists    
+File exists
 .It Bq Er FETCH_FULL
-File system full   
+File system full
 .It Bq Er FETCH_INFO
-Informational response    
+Informational response
 .It Bq Er FETCH_MEMORY
-Insufficient memory    
+Insufficient memory
 .It Bq Er FETCH_MOVED
-File has moved   
+File has moved
 .It Bq Er FETCH_NETWORK
-Network error    
+Network error
 .It Bq Er FETCH_OK
-No error    
+No error
 .It Bq Er FETCH_PROTO
-Protocol error    
+Protocol error
 .It Bq Er FETCH_RESOLV
-Resolver error    
+Resolver error
 .It Bq Er FETCH_SERVER
-Server error    
+Server error
 .It Bq Er FETCH_TEMP
-Temporary error    
+Temporary error
 .It Bq Er FETCH_TIMEOUT
-Operation timed out   
+Operation timed out
 .It Bq Er FETCH_UNAVAIL
-File is not available  
+File is not available
 .It Bq Er FETCH_UNKNOWN
-Unknown error    
+Unknown error
 .It Bq Er FETCH_URL
 Invalid URL
 .El
diff --git a/lib/libftpio/ftpio.3 b/lib/libftpio/ftpio.3
index d702575..e8af689 100644
--- a/lib/libftpio/ftpio.3
+++ b/lib/libftpio/ftpio.3
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ except that they are able to specify address family
 .Bl -tag -width FTP_PASSIVE_MODE -offset 3n
 .It Ev FTP_TIMEOUT
 Maximum time, in seconds, to wait for a response
-from the peer before aborting an 
+from the peer before aborting an
 .Tn FTP
 connection.
 .It Ev FTP_PASSIVE_MODE
diff --git a/lib/libipsec/ipsec_set_policy.3 b/lib/libipsec/ipsec_set_policy.3
index bb27a5b..f841df2 100644
--- a/lib/libipsec/ipsec_set_policy.3
+++ b/lib/libipsec/ipsec_set_policy.3
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Both
 .Ar src
 and
 .Ar dst
-can be omited. 
+can be omited.
 .Pp
 .Ar level
 must be set to one of the following:
diff --git a/lib/libipx/ipx.3 b/lib/libipx/ipx.3
index bec7649..93e21e2 100644
--- a/lib/libipx/ipx.3
+++ b/lib/libipx/ipx.3
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <sys/types.h>
 .Fd #include <netipx/ipx.h>
-.Ft struct ipx_addr 
+.Ft struct ipx_addr
 .Fn ipx_addr "const char *cp"
 .Ft char *
 .Fn ipx_ntoa "struct ipx_addr ipx"
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ notation in common use:
 .Ed
 .Pp
 Trailing zero fields are suppressed, and each number is printed in hexadecimal,
-in a format suitable for input to 
+in a format suitable for input to
 .Fn ipx_addr .
 Any fields lacking super-decimal digits will have a
 trailing
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ The precursor
 .Fn ns_addr
 and
 .Fn ns_toa
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
 .Sh BUGS
 The string returned by
diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_geterr.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_geterr.3
index ee9506a..815828d 100644
--- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_geterr.3
+++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_geterr.3
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ on the descriptor
 The results are undefined if the most recent
 .Xr kvm 3
 library call did not produce an error.
-The string returned is stored in memory owned by 
+The string returned is stored in memory owned by
 .Xr kvm 3
 so the message should be copied out and saved elsewhere if necessary.
 .Sh BUGS
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ call, since failure is indicated by returning a
 .Dv NULL
 descriptor.
 Therefore, errors on open are output to the special error buffer
-passed to 
+passed to
 .Fn kvm_openfiles .
 This option is not available to
 .Fn kvm_open .
diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_getprocs.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_getprocs.3
index 89b774b..e5e451d 100644
--- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_getprocs.3
+++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_getprocs.3
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm kvm_getprocs ,
 .Nm kvm_getargv ,
-.Nm kvm_getenvv 
+.Nm kvm_getenvv
 .Nd access user process state
 .Sh LIBRARY
 .Lb libkvm
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ describes the filtering predicate as follows:
 .It Sy KERN_PROC_ALL
 all processes
 .It Sy KERN_PROC_PID
-processes with process id 
+processes with process id
 .Fa arg
 .It Sy KERN_PROC_PGRP
 processes with process group
@@ -97,13 +97,13 @@ The number of processes found is returned in the reference parameter
 .Fa cnt .
 The processes are returned as a contiguous array of kinfo_proc structures.
 This memory is locally allocated, and subsequent calls to
-.Fn kvm_getprocs 
-and 
+.Fn kvm_getprocs
+and
 .Fn kvm_close
 will overwrite this storage.
 .Pp
 .Fn kvm_getargv
-returns a null-terminated argument vector that corresponds to the 
+returns a null-terminated argument vector that corresponds to the
 command line arguments passed to process indicated by
 .Fa p .
 Most likely, these arguments correspond to the values passed to
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Note that the original command name can be found, unaltered,
 in the p_comm field of the process structure returned by
 .Fn kvm_getprocs .
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Fa nchr
 argument indicates the maximum number of characters, including null bytes,
 to use in building the strings.  If this amount is exceeded, the string
@@ -127,13 +127,13 @@ that print only a one line summary of a command and should not copy
 out large amounts of text only to ignore it.
 If
 .Fa nchr
-is zero, no limit is imposed and all argument strings are returned in 
+is zero, no limit is imposed and all argument strings are returned in
 their entirety.
 .Pp
 The memory allocated to the argv pointers and string storage
-is owned by the kvm library.  Subsequent 
-.Fn kvm_getprocs 
-and 
+is owned by the kvm library.  Subsequent
+.Fn kvm_getprocs
+and
 .Xr kvm_close 3
 calls will clobber this storage.
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_getswapinfo.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_getswapinfo.3
index 0356d90..a3c44c8 100644
--- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_getswapinfo.3
+++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_getswapinfo.3
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ value 0 and the single
 .Vt kvm_swap
 structure will be filled with
 the grand total over all swap devices.  The grand total is calculated
-from all available swap devices whether or not you made room 
+from all available swap devices whether or not you made room
 for them all in the array.
 the grant total is returned.
 .Pp
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ it reuses in successive calls.
 You may call the function with
 .Fa kd
 ==
-.Dv NULL 
+.Dv NULL
 to clear the cache.
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
 If the load average was unobtainable, \-1 is returned; otherwise,
diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_open.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_open.3
index b624b3c..c22c49c 100644
--- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_open.3
+++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_open.3
@@ -58,10 +58,10 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The functions
 .Fn kvm_open
-and 
+and
 .Fn kvm_openfiles
 return a descriptor used to access kernel virtual memory
-via the 
+via the
 .Xr kvm 3
 library routines.  Both active kernels and crash dumps are accessible
 through this interface.
@@ -75,9 +75,9 @@ the currently running system is assumed,
 as determined from
 .Xr getbootfile 3 .
 .Pp
-.Fa corefile 
+.Fa corefile
 is the kernel memory device file.  It can be either /dev/mem
-or a crash dump core generated by 
+or a crash dump core generated by
 .Xr savecore 8 .
 If
 .Fa corefile
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ should indicate the swap device.  If
 from <paths.h> is used.
 .Pp
 The
-.Fa flags 
+.Fa flags
 argument indicates read/write access as in
 .Xr open 2
 and applies only to the core file.
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ and
 .Dv O_RDWR
 are permitted.
 .Pp
-There are two open routines which differ only with respect to 
+There are two open routines which differ only with respect to
 the error mechanism.
 One provides backward compatibility with the SunOS kvm library, while the
 other provides an improved error reporting framework.
@@ -116,11 +116,11 @@ function is the Sun kvm compatible open call.  Here, the
 .Fa errstr
 argument indicates how errors should be handled.  If it is
 .Dv NULL ,
-no errors are reported and the application cannot know the 
+no errors are reported and the application cannot know the
 specific nature of the failed kvm call.
 If it is not
 .Dv NULL ,
-errors are printed to stderr with 
+errors are printed to stderr with
 .Fa errstr
 prepended to the message, as in
 .Xr perror 3 .
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ argument.  This buffer should be _POSIX2_LINE_MAX characters large (from
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
 .Fn kvm_open
-and 
+and
 .Fn kvm_openfiles
 functions both return a descriptor to be used
 in all subsequent kvm library calls.
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ On failure,
 .Dv NULL
 is returned, in which case
 .Fn kvm_openfiles
-writes the error message into 
+writes the error message into
 .Fa errbuf .
 .Pp
 The
diff --git a/lib/libkvm/kvm_read.3 b/lib/libkvm/kvm_read.3
index 183df72..cfde604 100644
--- a/lib/libkvm/kvm_read.3
+++ b/lib/libkvm/kvm_read.3
@@ -66,19 +66,19 @@ for information regarding opening kernel virtual memory and crash dumps.
 The
 .Fn kvm_read
 function transfers
-.Fa nbytes 
+.Fa nbytes
 bytes of data from
 the kernel space address
 .Fa addr
 to
 .Fa buf .
-Conversely, 
+Conversely,
 .Fn kvm_write
 transfers data from
 .Fa buf
 to
 .Fa addr .
-Unlike their SunOS counterparts, these functions cannot be used to 
+Unlike their SunOS counterparts, these functions cannot be used to
 read or write process address spaces.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 Upon success, the number of bytes actually transferred is returned.
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/acos.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/acos.3
index ceff4c7..b19dde4 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/acos.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/acos.3
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ A domain error occurs for arguments not in the range [-1, +1].
 For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Xr math 3 .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-The 
+The
 .Fn acos
 function returns the arc cosine in the range
 .Bq 0 , \*(Pi
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/acosh.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/acosh.3
index a0b8498..495f3d7 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/acosh.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/acosh.3
@@ -80,5 +80,5 @@ causes a reserved operand fault.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Fn acosh
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/asinh.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/asinh.3
index a69e00f..7266dad 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/asinh.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/asinh.3
@@ -68,5 +68,5 @@ returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Fn asinh
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/atan2.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/atan2.3
index 4ad7ad5..dba32d4 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/atan2.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/atan2.3
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ the return value.
 The
 .Xr atan2
 function, if successful,
-returns the arc tangent of 
+returns the arc tangent of
 .Ar y/ Ns Ar x
 in the range
 .Bk -words
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/cos.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/cos.3
index b0a7c46..6695270 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/cos.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/cos.3
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ The
 function computes the cosine of
 .Fa x
 (measured in radians).
-A large magnitude argument may yield a result with little or no 
+A large magnitude argument may yield a result with little or no
 significance.
 For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Xr math 3 .
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/cosh.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/cosh.3
index 091dcc1..47cb320 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/cosh.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/cosh.3
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ of
 is too large; in this event, the global variable
 .Va errno
 is set to
-.Er ERANGE . 
+.Er ERANGE .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr acos 3 ,
 .Xr asin 3 ,
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/erf.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/erf.3
index 442a1b3..d0f4071 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/erf.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/erf.3
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ calculates the error function of x; where
 .if n \{\
 erf(x) = 2/sqrt(pi)\(**\|integral from 0 to x of exp(\-t\(**t) dt. \}
 .if t \{\
-erf\|(x) := 
+erf\|(x) :=
 (2/\(sr\(*p)\|\(is\d\s8\z0\s10\u\u\s8x\s10\d\|exp(\-t\u\s82\s10\d)\|dt. \}
 .Ed
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/exp.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/exp.3
index 3c8a5aa..ae54b7f 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/exp.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/exp.3
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ of
 to the exponent
 .Ar y .
 .Sh ERROR (due to Roundoff etc.)
-exp(x), log(x), expm1(x) and log1p(x) are accurate to within 
+exp(x), log(x), expm1(x) and log1p(x) are accurate to within
 an
 .Em up ,
 and log10(x) to within about 2
@@ -231,10 +231,10 @@ infinite or \*(Na) before computing x**0 cannot care
 whether 0**0 = 1 or not.
 Any program that depends
 upon 0**0 to be invalid is dubious anyway since that
-expression's meaning and, if invalid, its consequences 
+expression's meaning and, if invalid, its consequences
 vary from one computer system to another.
 .It
-Some Algebra texts (e.g. Sigler's) define x**0 = 1 for 
+Some Algebra texts (e.g. Sigler's) define x**0 = 1 for
 all x, including x = 0.
 This is compatible with the convention that accepts a[0]
 as the value of polynomial
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ The reason for setting 0**0 = 1 anyway is this:
 If x(z) and y(z) are
 .Em any
 functions analytic (expandable
-in power series) in z around z = 0, and if there 
+in power series) in z around z = 0, and if there
 x(0) = y(0) = 0, then x(z)**y(z) \(-> 1 as z \(-> 0.
 .Ed
 .It
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/ieee.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/ieee.3
index c918418..c0e0474 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/ieee.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/ieee.3
@@ -46,15 +46,15 @@
 .Lb libm
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <math.h>
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn copysign "double x" "double y"
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn drem "double x" "double y"
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn finite "double x"
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn logb "double x"
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn scalb "double x" "int n"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 These functions are required for, or recommended by the
@@ -167,11 +167,11 @@ and
 .Fn drem \\*(If y
 to be invalid operations that produce a \*(Na.
 On the
-.Tn VAX , 
+.Tn VAX ,
 .Fn drem x 0
 generates a reserved operand fault.  No \*(If
 exists on a
-.Tn VAX . 
+.Tn VAX .
 .Pp
 .Tn IEEE
 754 defines
@@ -182,17 +182,17 @@ exists on a
 = \-\*(If, and
 requires the latter to signal Division\-by\-Zero.
 But on a
-.Tn VAX , 
+.Tn VAX ,
 .Fn logb 0
 = 1.0 \- 2.0**31 = \-2,147,483,647.0.
 And if the correct value of
 .Fn scalb
 would overflow on a
-.Tn VAX , 
+.Tn VAX ,
 it generates a reserved operand fault and sets the global variable
 .Va errno
 to
-.Er ERANGE . 
+.Er ERANGE .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr floor 3 ,
 .Xr infnan 3 ,
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ to
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Nm ieee
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
 .Sh BUGS
 Should
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ and
 .Fn logb 0
 on a
 .Tn VAX
-signal invalidity 
+signal invalidity
 by setting
 .Va errno No = Er EDOM ?
 Should
@@ -221,12 +221,12 @@ return  \-1.7e38?
 .Fn logb "denormalized no.\&"
 =
 .Fn logb "tiniest normalized no. > 0"
-but the consensus has changed to the specification in the new 
+but the consensus has changed to the specification in the new
 proposed
 .Tn IEEE
 standard p854, namely that
 .Fn logb x
-satisfy 
+satisfy
 .Bd -ragged -offset indent
 1 \(<=
 .Fn scalb \\*(Bax\\*(Ba \-logb(x)
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ for
 754
 .Ed
 .Pp
-for every x except 0, 
+for every x except 0,
 \*(If
 and \*(Na.
 Almost every program that assumes 754's specification will work
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ similar in spirit to the
 .Tn VAX Ns 's
 reserved operand, but very
 different in important details.  Since the sign bit of a
-reserved operand makes it look negative,  
+reserved operand makes it look negative,
 .Bd -ragged -offset indent
 .Fn copysign x "reserved operand"
 =
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/infnan.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/infnan.3
index e4ca774..d3361ac 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/infnan.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/infnan.3
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
 .Lb libm
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <math.h>
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn infnan "int iarg"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 At some time in the future, some of the useful properties of
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ in appropriate places in
 .Xr libm 3 .
 When
 better exception\-handling is implemented in
-.Tn UNIX , 
+.Tn UNIX ,
 only
 .Fn infnan
 among the codes in
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ when they
 invoke
 .Fn infnan iarg
 under analogous circumstances on a
-.Tn VAX . 
+.Tn VAX .
 Currently
 .Fn infnan
 stops computation under all those
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ and a value for a
 revised
 .Fn infnan
 to return.  And a C program to
-implement that suggestion follows. 
+implement that suggestion follows.
 .Bl -column "IEEE Signal" "IEEE Default" XXERANGE ERANGEXXorXXEDOM
 .It "IEEE Signal	IEEE Default	" Fa iarg Ta Va errno Ta Fn infnan
 .It "Invalid	\*(Na	" Er "EDOM	EDOM	0"
@@ -173,5 +173,5 @@ and
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Fn infnan
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/j0.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/j0.3
index 430619e..5bfb9a7 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/j0.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/j0.3
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ the function
 computes the
 .Em "Bessel function of the second kind for the integer order"
 .Fa n
-for the positive 
+for the positive
 .Em integer
 value
 .Fa x
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/lgamma.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/lgamma.3
index feb5a86..24f769e 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/lgamma.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/lgamma.3
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ will underflow.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Fn lgamma
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
 The
 .Fn gamma
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/math.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/math.3
index 2e26575..4bc1ff3 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/math.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/math.3
@@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ correctly through multiplication and division, and
 .If (finite)/\(+- \0=\0\(+-0
 (nonzero)/0 =
 .If \(+- .
-But 
+But
 .if n \
 Infinity\-Infinity, Infinity\(**0 and Infinity/Infinity
 .if t \
diff --git a/lib/libm/common_source/sinh.3 b/lib/libm/common_source/sinh.3
index 3009473..a5cfbee 100644
--- a/lib/libm/common_source/sinh.3
+++ b/lib/libm/common_source/sinh.3
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ function computes the hyperbolic sine of
 The
 .Fn sinh
 function returns the hyperbolic sine value unless
-the  magnitude 
+the  magnitude
 of
 .Fa x
 is too large; in this event, the global variable
diff --git a/lib/libmd/mdX.3 b/lib/libmd/mdX.3
index 2363200..9dfe187 100644
--- a/lib/libmd/mdX.3
+++ b/lib/libmd/mdX.3
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 The MDX functions calculate a 128-bit cryptographic checksum (digest)
 for any number of input bytes.  A cryptographic checksum is a one-way
 hash-function, that is, you cannot find (except by exhaustive search)
-the input corresponding to a particular output.  This net result is 
+the input corresponding to a particular output.  This net result is
 a ``fingerprint'' of the input-data, which doesn't disclose the actual
 input.
 .Pp
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ which converts the return value to a 33-character
 string which represents the 128 bits in hexadecimal.
 .Pp
 .Fn MDXFile
-calculates the digest of a file, and uses 
+calculates the digest of a file, and uses
 .Fn MDXEnd
 to return the result.
 If the file cannot be opened, a null pointer is returned.
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ When using
 .Fn MDXFile ,
 or
 .Fn MDXData ,
-the 
+the
 .Fa buf
 argument can be a null pointer, in which case the returned string
 is allocated with
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ is allocated with
 and subsequently must be explicitly deallocated using
 .Xr free 3
 after use.
-If the 
+If the
 .Fa buf
 argument is non-null it must point to at least 33 characters of buffer space.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ argument is non-null it must point to at least 33 characters of buffer space.
 .%O RFC 1321
 .Re
 .Rs
-.%A RSA Laboratories 
+.%A RSA Laboratories
 .%T Frequently Asked Questions About today's Cryptography
 .%O \&<http://www.rsa.com/rsalabs/faq/>
 .Re
diff --git a/lib/libmd/ripemd.3 b/lib/libmd/ripemd.3
index 273a3bf..2e2abc8 100644
--- a/lib/libmd/ripemd.3
+++ b/lib/libmd/ripemd.3
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ The
 functions calculate a 160-bit cryptographic checksum (digest)
 for any number of input bytes.  A cryptographic checksum is a one-way
 hash function; that is, it is computationally impractical to find
-the input corresponding to a particular output.  This net result is 
+the input corresponding to a particular output.  This net result is
 a ``fingerprint'' of the input-data, which doesn't disclose the actual
 input.
 .Pp
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ which converts the return value to a 41-character
 string which represents the 160 bits in hexadecimal.
 .Pp
 .Fn RIPEMD160_File
-calculates the digest of a file, and uses 
+calculates the digest of a file, and uses
 .Fn RIPEMD160_End
 to return the result.
 If the file cannot be opened, a null pointer is returned.
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ When using
 .Fn RIPEMD160_File ,
 or
 .Fn RIPEMD160_Data ,
-the 
+the
 .Fa buf
 argument can be a null pointer, in which case the returned string
 is allocated with
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ is allocated with
 and subsequently must be explicitly deallocated using
 .Xr free 3
 after use.
-If the 
+If the
 .Fa buf
 argument is non-null it must point to at least 41 characters of buffer space.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/lib/libmd/sha.3 b/lib/libmd/sha.3
index 16bf68e..1f69450 100644
--- a/lib/libmd/sha.3
+++ b/lib/libmd/sha.3
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ and
 functions calculate a 160-bit cryptographic checksum (digest)
 for any number of input bytes.  A cryptographic checksum is a one-way
 hash function; that is, it is computationally impractical to find
-the input corresponding to a particular output.  This net result is 
+the input corresponding to a particular output.  This net result is
 a ``fingerprint'' of the input-data, which doesn't disclose the actual
 input.
 .Pp
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ which converts the return value to a 41-character
 string which represents the 160 bits in hexadecimal.
 .Pp
 .Fn SHA1_File
-calculates the digest of a file, and uses 
+calculates the digest of a file, and uses
 .Fn SHA1_End
 to return the result.
 If the file cannot be opened, a null pointer is returned.
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ When using
 .Fn SHA1_File ,
 or
 .Fn SHA1_Data ,
-the 
+the
 .Fa buf
 argument can be a null pointer, in which case the returned string
 is allocated with
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ is allocated with
 and subsequently must be explicitly deallocated using
 .Xr free 3
 after use.
-If the 
+If the
 .Fa buf
 argument is non-null it must point to at least 41 characters of buffer space.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/lib/libnetgraph/netgraph.3 b/lib/libnetgraph/netgraph.3
index 92640fb..feff469 100644
--- a/lib/libnetgraph/netgraph.3
+++ b/lib/libnetgraph/netgraph.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996-1999 Whistle Communications, Inc.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Subject to the following obligations and disclaimer of warranty, use and
 .\" redistribution of this software, in source or object code forms, with or
 .\" without modifications are expressly permitted by Whistle Communications;
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
 .\"    Communications, Inc. trademarks, including the mark "WHISTLE
 .\"    COMMUNICATIONS" on advertising, endorsements, or otherwise except as
 .\"    such appears in the above copyright notice or in the software.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED BY WHISTLE COMMUNICATIONS "AS IS", AND
 .\" TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, WHISTLE COMMUNICATIONS MAKES NO
 .\" REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THIS SOFTWARE,
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_attr.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_attr.3
index c34df1e..6707b0a 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_attr.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_attr.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 28, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_ATTR 3
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ functions set the attribute that corresponds to each function name.
 The
 .Fn pthread_attr_get*
 functions copy the value of the attribute that corresponds to each function name
-to the location pointed to by the second function parameter. 
+to the location pointed to by the second function parameter.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, these functions return 0.
 Otherwise, an error number is returned to indicate the error.
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_condattr.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_condattr.3
index 5b0200f..d117c75 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_condattr.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_condattr.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 28, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_CONDATTR 3
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_detach.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_detach.3
index 75c9d42..a3b660f 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_detach.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_detach.3
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ If
 has not terminated,
 .Fn pthread_detach
 will not cause it to terminate.
-The effect of multiple 
+The effect of multiple
 .Fn pthread_detach
 calls on the same target thread is unspecified.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_exit.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_exit.3
index 5f6f75b..1eabc9b 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_exit.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_exit.3
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ is undefined if called from a cancellation handler or destructor function
 that was invoked as the result of an implicit or explicit call to
 .Fn pthread_exit .
 .Pp
-After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto) 
+After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto)
 variables of the thread is undefined.
 Thus, references to local variables
 of the exiting thread should not be used for the
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_kill.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_kill.3
index b5bb859..a18a969 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_kill.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_kill.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 27, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_KILL 3
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_mutexattr.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_mutexattr.3
index ec79518..555cdd4 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_mutexattr.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_mutexattr.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd May 1, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR 3
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_once.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_once.3
index 736e32e..72a1322 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_once.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_once.3
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ is not a cancellation point.
 However, if
 .Fn init_routine
 is a cancellation point and is cancelled, the effect on
-.Fa once_control is as if 
+.Fa once_control is as if
 .Fn pthread_once
 was never called.
 .Pp
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3
index bd1bfe8..70acf92 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn pthread_rwlock_destroy
-function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with 
+function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with
 .Fn pthread_rwlock_init .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, the
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3
index 80db1a9..ab6a6e1 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 The
 .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_destroy
 function is used to destroy a read/write lock attribute object
-previously created with 
+previously created with
 .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_init .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, the
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_schedparam.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_schedparam.3
index 3e2e32e..96287e5 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_schedparam.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_schedparam.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd May 1, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_SCHEDPARAM 3
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_sigmask.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_sigmask.3
index a335107..6af3464 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_sigmask.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/pthread_sigmask.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 27, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_SIGMASK 3
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_destroy.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_destroy.3
index 4074adc..0de4691 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_destroy.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_destroy.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_DESTROY 3
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_getvalue.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_getvalue.3
index e9ac2a6..3ee947a 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_getvalue.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_getvalue.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_GETVALUE 3
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_init.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_init.3
index a727fe2..5f43c08 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_init.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_init.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_INIT 3
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_open.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_open.3
index 22229b3..eec5a57 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_open.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_open.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,14 +24,14 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_OPEN 3
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm sem_open , 
-.Nm sem_close , 
+.Nm sem_open ,
+.Nm sem_close ,
 .Nm sem_unlink
 .Nd named semaphore operations
 .Sh LIBRARY
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_post.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_post.3
index 970550d..0c8dea4 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_post.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_post.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_POST 3
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_wait.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_wait.3
index beff2e3..397cbfe 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/sem_wait.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/sem_wait.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,13 +24,13 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd February 15, 2000
 .Dt SEM_WAIT 3
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm sem_wait , 
+.Nm sem_wait ,
 .Nm sem_trywait
 .Nd decrement (lock) a semaphore
 .Sh LIBRARY
diff --git a/lib/libpthread/man/sigwait.3 b/lib/libpthread/man/sigwait.3
index 818a623..bd46b1c 100644
--- a/lib/libpthread/man/sigwait.3
+++ b/lib/libpthread/man/sigwait.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 27, 2000
 .Dt SIGWAIT 3
diff --git a/lib/libstand/libstand.3 b/lib/libstand/libstand.3
index 860438e..b8a5643 100644
--- a/lib/libstand/libstand.3
+++ b/lib/libstand/libstand.3
@@ -35,13 +35,13 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm
 provides a set of supporting functions for standalone
-applications, mimicking where possible the standard BSD programming 
+applications, mimicking where possible the standard BSD programming
 environment.  The following sections group these functions by kind.
 Unless specifically described here, see the corresponding section 3
 manpages for the given functions.
 .Sh STRING FUNCTIONS
 String functions are available as documented in
-.Xr string 3 
+.Xr string 3
 and
 .Xr bstring 3 .
 .Sh MEMORY ALLOCATION
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ These functions behave similarly to their standard library counterparts.
 .Fn env_getenv "const char *name"
 .Xc
 .Pp
-Looks up a variable in the environment and returns its entire 
+Looks up a variable in the environment and returns its entire
 data structure.
 .It Xo
 .Ft int
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ data structure.
 .Pp
 Creates a new or sets an existing environment variable called
 .Fa name .
-If creating a new variable, the 
+If creating a new variable, the
 .Fa sethook
 and
 .Fa unsethook
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ again with EV_NOHOOK set to actually save the value.  The predefined function
 may be specified to refuse all attempts to set a variable.
 .Pp
 The unset hook is invoked when an attempt is made to unset a variable.
-If it 
+If it
 returns zero, the  variable will be unset.  The predefined function
 .Fa env_nounset
 may be used to prevent a variable being unset.
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Requires
 .Pp
 Defined as
 .Fn _setjmp
-and 
+and
 .Fn _lonjmp
 respectively as there is no signal state to manipulate.  Requires
 .Fd #include <setjmp.h>
@@ -245,8 +245,8 @@ if successful, or -1 if a read error occurs.
 .Pp
 The *printf functions implement a subset of the standard
 .Fn printf
-family functionality and some extensions.  The following standard conversions 
-are supported: c,d,n,o,p,s,u,x.  The following modifiers are supported: 
+family functionality and some extensions.  The following standard conversions
+are supported: c,d,n,o,p,s,u,x.  The following modifiers are supported:
 +,-,#,*,0,field width,precision,l.
 .Pp
 The
@@ -254,9 +254,9 @@ The
 conversion is provided to decode error registers.  Its usage is:
 .Pp
 .Bd -ragged -offset indent
-printf( 
-.Qq reg=%b\en , 
-regval, 
+printf(
+.Qq reg=%b\en ,
+regval,
 .Qq <base><arg>*
 );
 .Ed
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ printf(
 .Qq %6D ,
 ptr,
 .Qq \&:
-);  gives  
+);  gives
 .Qq XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
 .Ed
 .Bd -ragged -offset indent
@@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ printf(
 len,
 ptr,
 .Qq "\ "
-);  gives  
+);  gives
 .Qq XX XX XX ...
 .Ed
 .El
@@ -398,9 +398,9 @@ and
 .Fn fstat
 functions only fill out the following fields in the
 .Fa sb
-structure: st_mode,st_nlink,st_uid,st_gid,st_size.  The 
+structure: st_mode,st_nlink,st_uid,st_gid,st_size.  The
 .Nm tftp
-filesystem cannot provide meaningful values for this call, and the 
+filesystem cannot provide meaningful values for this call, and the
 .Nm cd9660
 filesystem always reports files having uid/gid of zero.
 .El
@@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ Returns -1 on error, 0 at EOF, or 1 if the user elects to quit while reading.
 .Fn twiddle void
 .Xc
 .Pp
-Successive calls emit the characters in the sequence |,/,-,\\ followed by a 
+Successive calls emit the characters in the sequence |,/,-,\\ followed by a
 backspace in order to provide reassurance to the user.
 .El
 .Sh REQUIRED LOW-LEVEL SUPPORT
@@ -464,9 +464,9 @@ functions can be invoked.  Stack requirements vary depending on the functions
 and filesystems used by the consumer and the support layer functions detailed
 below.
 .Pp
-The heap must be established before calling 
+The heap must be established before calling
 .Fn alloc
-or 
+or
 .Fn open
 by calling
 .Fn setheap .
@@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ Heap usage will vary depending on the number of simultaneously open files,
 as well as client behaviour.  Automatic decompression will allocate more
 than 64K of data per open file.
 .Pp
-Console access is performed via the 
+Console access is performed via the
 .Fn getchar ,
 .Fn putchar
 and
@@ -515,9 +515,9 @@ Returns nonzero if a character is waiting from the console.
 .Xc
 .Pp
 Write a character to the console, used by
-.Fn gets , 
-.Fn ngets , 
-.Fn *printf , 
+.Fn gets ,
+.Fn ngets ,
+.Fn *printf ,
 .Fn panic
 and
 .Fn twiddle
@@ -531,11 +531,11 @@ Open the appropriate device for the file named in
 .Fa name ,
 returning in
 .Fa file
-a pointer to the remaining body of 
+a pointer to the remaining body of
 .Fa name
 which does not refer to the device.  The
 .Va f_dev
-field in 
+field in
 .Fa of
 will be set to point to the
 .Vt devsw
@@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ The lack of detailed memory usage data is unhelpful.
 .Nm
 contains contributions from many sources, including:
 .Bl -bullet -compact
-.It 
+.It
 .Nm libsa
 from
 .Nx
diff --git a/lib/libtacplus/libtacplus.3 b/lib/libtacplus/libtacplus.3
index 713db01..ccea628d 100644
--- a/lib/libtacplus/libtacplus.3
+++ b/lib/libtacplus/libtacplus.3
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ initial authentication request.
 .Pp
 When it receives the CONTINUE packet, the server may again request
 more information by returning
-.Dv TAC_AUTHEN_STATUS_GETDATA , 
+.Dv TAC_AUTHEN_STATUS_GETDATA ,
 .Dv TAC_AUTHEN_STATUS_GETUSER ,
 or
 .Dv TAC_AUTHEN_STATUS_GETPASS .
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ can be retrieved by calling
 .Fn tac_strerror .
 The message text is overwritten on each new error for the given
 .Va struct tac_handle * .
-Thus the message must be copied if it is to be preserved through 
+Thus the message must be copied if it is to be preserved through
 subsequent library calls using the same handle.
 .Sh CLEANUP
 To free the resources used by the TACACS+ library, call
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ they detect an error, they return -1 and record an error message
 which can be retrieved using
 .Fn tac_strerror .
 .Pp
-.Bl -item -offset indent -compact 
+.Bl -item -offset indent -compact
 .It
 .Fn tac_add_server
 .It
diff --git a/lib/libutil/auth.3 b/lib/libutil/auth.3
index b575bcf..68539db 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/auth.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/auth.3
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jordan Hubbard
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\" "
 .Dd October 7, 1998
diff --git a/lib/libutil/login.3 b/lib/libutil/login.3
index ed6d728..41612fb 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/login.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/login.3
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Joerg Wunsch
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\" "
 .Dd December 29, 1996
diff --git a/lib/libutil/login.conf.5 b/lib/libutil/login.conf.5
index 64d49ab..37580b6 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/login.conf.5
+++ b/lib/libutil/login.conf.5
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ for a more in-depth description of the format of a capability database.
 Fields within each record in the database follow the
 .Xr getcap 3
 conventions for boolean, type string
-.Ql \&= 
+.Ql \&=
 and type numeric
 .Ql \&# ,
 although type numeric is depreciated in favour of the string format and
diff --git a/lib/libutil/login_auth.3 b/lib/libutil/login_auth.3
index 0499b89..0144f5c 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/login_auth.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/login_auth.3
@@ -29,9 +29,9 @@
 .\" .Nm auth_scan
 .\" .Nm auth_rmfiles
 .Nm auth_checknologin ,
-.Nm auth_cat 
-.\" .Nm auth_ttyok 
-.\" .Nm auth_hostok 
+.Nm auth_cat
+.\" .Nm auth_ttyok
+.\" .Nm auth_hostok
 .\" .Nm auth_timesok
 .Nd "authentication style support library for login class capabilities database"
 .Sh LIBRARY
diff --git a/lib/libutil/login_cap.3 b/lib/libutil/login_cap.3
index 97f7f54..12f6412 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/login_cap.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/login_cap.3
@@ -152,10 +152,10 @@ functions will search for a record with an id of "default",
 with that name returned in the
 .Ar lc_class
 field.
-In addition, if the referenced user has a UID of 0 (normally,                  
-"root", although the user name is not considered) then                         
-.Fn login_getpwclass                                                           
-will search for a record with an id of "root" before it searches               
+In addition, if the referenced user has a UID of 0 (normally,
+"root", although the user name is not considered) then
+.Fn login_getpwclass
+will search for a record with an id of "root" before it searches
 for the record with the id of "default".
 .Pp
 The
@@ -196,11 +196,11 @@ contained within it may override the system defaults.
 This scheme allows users to override some login settings from
 those in the system login class database by creating class records
 for their own private class with a record id of `me'.
-In the context of a 
+In the context of a
 .Em login ,
 it should be noted that some options cannot by overridden by
 users for two reasons; many options, such as resource settings
-and default process priorities, require root privileges 
+and default process priorities, require root privileges
 in order to take effect, and other fields in the user's file are
 not be consulted at all during the early phases of login for
 security or administrative reasons.
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ The manpage for
 .Xr login.conf 5
 deals in specific tags and their type.
 .Pp
-Note that with all functions in this group, you should not call 
+Note that with all functions in this group, you should not call
 .Xr free 3
 on any pointers returned.
 Memory allocated during retrieval or processing of capability
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ If in the first format, then the value given may be "inf" or
 "infinity" which results in a return value of RLIM_INFINITY.
 If the given capability tag cannot be found, the
 .Ar def
-parameter is returned, and if an error occurs, the 
+parameter is returned, and if an error occurs, the
 .Ar error
 parameter is returned.
 .It Fn login_getcapsize
diff --git a/lib/libutil/login_ok.3 b/lib/libutil/login_ok.3
index 817cc6b..c25049a 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/login_ok.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/login_ok.3
@@ -46,17 +46,17 @@ class capability entries in the login database,
 .Pp
 .Fn auth_ttyok
 checks to see if the named tty is available to users of a specific
-class, and is either in the 
+class, and is either in the
 .Em ttys.allow
 access list, and not in
-the 
+the
 .Em ttys.deny
 access list.
-An empty 
+An empty
 .Em ttys.allow
 list (or if no such capability exists for
 the give login class) logins via any tty device are allowed unless
-the 
+the
 .Em ttys.deny
 list exists and is non-empty, and the device or its
 tty group (see
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ name, a device name which includes a wildcard (e.g. ttyD* or cuaD*),
 or may name a ttygroup, when group=<name> tags have been assigned in
 .Pa /etc/ttys .
 Matching of ttys and ttygroups is case sensitive.
-Passing a 
+Passing a
 .Dv NULL
 or empty string as the
 .Ar tty
@@ -76,9 +76,9 @@ parameter causes the function to return a non-zero value.
 .Fn auth_hostok
 checks for any host restrictions for remote logins.
 The function checks on both a host name and IP address (given in its
-text form, typically n.n.n.n) against the 
+text form, typically n.n.n.n) against the
 .Em host.allow
-and 
+and
 .Em host.deny
 login class capabilities.
 As with ttys and their groups, wildcards and character classes may be
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ is in its canonical form.
 No hostname or address lookups are attempted.
 .Pp
 It is possible to call this function with either the hostname or
-the IP address missing (i.e. 
+the IP address missing (i.e.
 .Dv NULL )
 and matching will be performed
 only on the basis of the parameter given.
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ function checks to see that a given time value is within the
 login class capability and not within the
 .Em times.deny
 access lists.
-An empty or non-existent 
+An empty or non-existent
 .Em times.allow
 list allows access at any
 time, except if a given time is falls within a period in the
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ manual page.
 A non-zero return value from any of these functions indicates that
 login access is granted.
 A zero return value means either that the item being tested is not
-in the 
+in the
 .Em allow
 access list, or is within the
 .Em deny
diff --git a/lib/libutil/login_times.3 b/lib/libutil/login_times.3
index fff232a..28afbfa 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/login_times.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/login_times.3
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ parameter to the function is not NULL, the time at which the
 period ends relative to the time passed is returned.
 .Pp
 The
-.Fn in_ltms 
+.Fn in_ltms
 function is similar to
 .Fn in_ltm
 except that the first parameter must be a pointer to an array
diff --git a/lib/libutil/login_tty.3 b/lib/libutil/login_tty.3
index 84a39e1..8cbb200 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/login_tty.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/login_tty.3
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Joerg Wunsch
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\" "
 .Dd December 29, 1996
diff --git a/lib/libutil/logout.3 b/lib/libutil/logout.3
index dd083ab..a129e54 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/logout.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/logout.3
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Joerg Wunsch
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\" "
 .Dd December 29, 1996
diff --git a/lib/libutil/logwtmp.3 b/lib/libutil/logwtmp.3
index 1ba4347..f8fa4b6 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/logwtmp.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/logwtmp.3
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Joerg Wunsch
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\" "
 .Dd December 29, 1996
diff --git a/lib/libutil/property.3 b/lib/libutil/property.3
index 174665c..f945bd5 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/property.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/property.3
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1998 Jordan Hubbard
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -22,14 +22,14 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\" "
 .Dd October 7, 1998
 .Os
 .Dt PROPERTIES 3
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm properties_read , 
+.Nm properties_read ,
 .Nm propery_find ,
 .Nm properties_free
 .Nd "functions to allow creating simple property lists from ASCII file data"
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Each property in the file is assumed to have the format of
 .Fa name = value
 where
 .Fa name
-is an alphanumeric string (and any punctuation not including the `=' character) 
+is an alphanumeric string (and any punctuation not including the `=' character)
 and
 .Fa value
 is an arbitary string of text terminated by a newline character.  If newlines
diff --git a/lib/libutil/pty.3 b/lib/libutil/pty.3
index cb2e461..3284968 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/pty.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/pty.3
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Joerg Wunsch
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -22,14 +22,14 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\" "
 .Dd December 29, 1996
 .Os
 .Dt PTY 3
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm openpty , 
+.Nm openpty ,
 .Nm forkpty
 .Nd auxiliary functions to obtain a pseudo-terminal
 .Sh LIBRARY
diff --git a/lib/libutil/uucplock.3 b/lib/libutil/uucplock.3
index 404834b..ad801cc 100644
--- a/lib/libutil/uucplock.3
+++ b/lib/libutil/uucplock.3
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1996 Brian Somers <brian@awfulhak.demon.co.uk>
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -22,14 +22,14 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .\" "
 .Dd March 30, 1997
 .Os
 .Dt UUCPLOCK 3
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm uu_lock , 
+.Nm uu_lock ,
 .Nm uu_unlock ,
 .Nm uu_lockerr
 .Nd acquire and release control of a serial device
diff --git a/lib/libvgl/vgl.3 b/lib/libvgl/vgl.3
index 19a4a39..a65aa00 100644
--- a/lib/libvgl/vgl.3
+++ b/lib/libvgl/vgl.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (c) 1997 Søren Schmidt
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
 .\" 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
 .\"    derived from this software withough specific prior written permission.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
 .\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
 .\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
 .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd November 7, 1999
 .Dt VGL 3
@@ -71,11 +71,11 @@
 .Fd #include <vgl.h>
 .Ft int
 .Fn VGLInit "int mode"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLEnd "void"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLCheckSwitch "void"
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn VGLTextSetFontFile "char *filename"
 .Ft int
 .Fn VGLKeyboardInit "int code"
@@ -83,29 +83,29 @@
 .Fn VGLKeyboardEnd "void"
 .Ft int
 .Fn VGLKeyboardGetCh "void"
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn VGLMouseInit "int mode"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLMouseMode "int mode"
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn VGLMouseStatus "int *x" "int *y" "char *buttons"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLMouseSetImage "VGLBitmap *AndMask" "VGLBitmap *OrMask"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLMouseSetStdImage "void"
-.Ft byte 
+.Ft byte
 .Fn VGLGetXY "VGLBitmap *object" "int x" "int y"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLSetXY "VGLBitmap *object" "int x" "int y" "byte color"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLLine "VGLBitmap *object" "int x1" "int y1" "int x2" "int y2" "byte color"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLBox "VGLBitmap *object" "int x1" "int y1" "int x2" "int y2" "byte color"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLFilledBox "VGLBitmap *object" "int x1" "int y1" "int x2" "int y2" "byte color"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLEllipse "VGLBitmap *object" "int xc" "int yc" "int a" "int b" "byte color"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLFilledEllipse "VGLBitmap *object" "int xc" "int yc" "int a" "int b" "byte color"
 .Ft VGLBitmap *
 .Fn VGLBitmapCreate "int type" "int xsize" "int ysize" "byte *bits"
@@ -113,25 +113,25 @@
 .Fn VGLBitmapDestroy "VGLBitmap *object"
 .Ft int
 .Fn VGLBitmapAllocateBits "VGLBitmap *object"
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn VGLBitmapCopy "VGLBitmap *src" "int srcx" "int srcy" "VGLBitmap *dst" "int dstx" "int dsty" "int width" "int hight"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLBitmapPutChar "VGLBitmap *Object" "int x" "int y" "byte ch" "byte fgcol" "byte bgcol" "int fill" "int dir"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLBitmapString "VGLBitmap *Object" "int x" "int y" "char *str" "byte fgcol" "byte bgcol" "int fill" "int dir"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLClear "VGLBitmap *object" "byte color"
 .Ft void
 .Fn VGLSetPalette "byte *red" "byte *green" "byte *blue"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLSetPaletteIndex "byte color" "byte red" "byte green" "byte blue"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLSetBorder "byte color"
 .Ft int
 .Fn VGLSetVScreenSize "VGLBitmap *object" "int vxsize" "int vysize"
 .Ft int
 .Fn VGLPanScreen "VGLBitmap *object" "int x" "int y"
-.Ft void 
+.Ft void
 .Fn VGLBlankDisplay "int blank"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Libvgl
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ mouse via the standard mouse system in
 see
 .Xr mouse 4 ,
 including the ability to transparently have a mouse pointer superimposed on
-the graphic image currently being worked on. 
+the graphic image currently being worked on.
 The library takes care of screen switching by storing the current image in
 memory before switching to another virtual console, and restoring when the
 user switches back.
@@ -165,10 +165,10 @@ was called.
 .Pp
 .Fn VGLCheckSwitch
 if the program goes into longer periods of processing without doing
-any graphics output, calling this function occasionally will allow 
+any graphics output, calling this function occasionally will allow
 the system to switch screens.
 .Pp
-.Fn VGLTextSetFontFile 
+.Fn VGLTextSetFontFile
 instruct the char/string functions to use the font in file
 .Pa filename
 instead of the builtin font.
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ must be
 .Dv VGL_CODEKEYS ,
 or
 .Dv VGL_RAWKEYS .
-When 
+When
 .Dv VGL_XLATEKEYS
 is specified, the keyboard translate the raw keyboard scan code into
 a character code.
@@ -204,10 +204,10 @@ read one byte from the keyboard.  As the keyboard I/O is in the
 input mode, the function will not block even if there is no input data,
 and returns 0.
 .Pp
-.Fn VGLMouseInit 
+.Fn VGLMouseInit
 initialize the mouse.
 The optional on-screen mouse pointer is shown if the
-argument is 
+argument is
 .Dv VGL_MOUSESHOW .
 .Pp
 .Fn VGLMouseMode
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ or hides the mouse pointer if the argument is
 returns the current mouse pointer coordinates and button state in
 .Va x , y ,
 buttons.
-The return value reflects if the mouse pointer 
+The return value reflects if the mouse pointer
 is currently shown on screen or not.
 .Pp
 .Fn VGLMouseSetImage
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ argument to
 .Va color
 byte value.
 .Pp
-.Fn VGLLine 
+.Fn VGLLine
 draw a line from
 .Va x1 , y1
 to
@@ -270,29 +270,29 @@ and lower right hand corner at
 in color
 .Va color .
 .Pp
-.Fn VGLEllipse 
-draw an ellipse centered at 
+.Fn VGLEllipse
+draw an ellipse centered at
 .Va xc , yc
-make it 
+make it
 .Va a
-pixels wide, and 
+pixels wide, and
 .Va b
 pixels high in color
 .Va color .
 .Pp
 .Fn VGLFilledEllipse
-draw a filled (solid) ellipse centered at 
+draw a filled (solid) ellipse centered at
 .Va xc , yc
-make it 
+make it
 .Va a
-pixels wide, and 
+pixels wide, and
 .Va b
 pixels high in color
 .Va color .
 .Pp
 .Fn VGLBitmapCreate
-create a bitmap object and initialize it with the specified 
-values and bit data. 
+create a bitmap object and initialize it with the specified
+values and bit data.
 .Va type
 must be
 .Dv MEMBUF
@@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ for the in-memory bitmap.
 .Va bits
 may be NULL so that bitmap data may be associated later.
 .Pp
-There also is a macro, 
+There also is a macro,
 .Fn VGLBITMAP_INITIALIZER "type" "xsize" "ysize" "bits"
 to initialize a statically declared bitmap object.
 .Pp
@@ -313,11 +313,11 @@ allocate a bit data buffer for the specified object.
 .Fn VGLBitmapCopy
 copy a rectangle of pixels from bitmap
 .Va src
-upper left hand corner at 
+upper left hand corner at
 .Va srcx , srcy
 to bitmap
 .Va dst
-at 
+at
 .Va dstx , dsty
 of the size
 .Va width , height .
@@ -327,9 +327,9 @@ write the character
 .Va ch
 at position
 .Va x , y
-in foreground color 
+in foreground color
 .Va fgcol .
-If 
+If
 .Va fill
 is != 0, use the color
 .Va bgcol
@@ -342,9 +342,9 @@ write the string
 .Va str
 at position
 .Va x , y
-in foreground color 
+in foreground color
 .Va fgcol .
-If 
+If
 .Va fill
 is != 0, use the color
 .Va bgcol
@@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ this function sets the palette used, the arguments
 should point to byte arrays of 256 positions each.
 .Pp
 .Fn VGLSetPaletteIndex
-set the palette index 
+set the palette index
 .Va color
 to the specified RGB value.
 .Pp
@@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ set the border color to color
 .Pp
 .Fn VGLSetVScreenSize
 change the virtual screen size of the display.  Note that this
-function must be called when our vty is in the foreground.  
+function must be called when our vty is in the foreground.
 And
 .Va object
 must be
@@ -382,11 +382,11 @@ Passing a in-memory bitmap to this function results in error.
 The desired virtual screen width may not be achievable because
 of the video card hardware.  In such case the video driver (and
 underlaying video BIOS) may choose the next largest values.
-Always examine 
-.Va object->VXsize 
-and 
-.Va VYsize 
-after calling this function, in order to see how the virtual screen 
+Always examine
+.Va object->VXsize
+and
+.Va VYsize
+after calling this function, in order to see how the virtual screen
 is actually set up.
 .Pp
 In order to set up the largest possible virtual screen, you may
@@ -396,8 +396,8 @@ call this function with arbitrary large values.
 .Pp
 .Fn VGLPanSreen
 change the origin of the displayed screen in the virtual screen.
-Note that this function must be called when our vty is in the 
-foreground.  
+Note that this function must be called when our vty is in the
+foreground.
 .Va object
 must be
 .Va VGLDisplay .
@@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ the user should first see when it's done.
 .Sh AUTHORS
 .An S\(/oren Schmidt Aq sos@FreeBSD.org
 .Sh HISTORY
-The 
+The
 .Nm vgl
 library appeared in
 .Fx 3.0 .
diff --git a/lib/libz/zlib.3 b/lib/libz/zlib.3
index 7ecaf6d..1c29509 100644
--- a/lib/libz/zlib.3
+++ b/lib/libz/zlib.3
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ The zlib home page is:
 http://www.cdrom.com/pub/infozip/zlib/
 .LP
 The data format used by the zlib library is described by RFC
-(Request for Comments) 1950 to 1952 in the files: 
+(Request for Comments) 1950 to 1952 in the files:
 .IP
 ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc1950.txt (zlib format)
 .br
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/acos.3 b/lib/msun/man/acos.3
index 2776bbe..582e1c0 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/acos.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/acos.3
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ A domain error occurs for arguments not in the range [-1, +1].
 For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Xr math 3 .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
-The 
+The
 .Fn acos
 and the
 .Fn acosf
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/acosh.3 b/lib/msun/man/acosh.3
index 0b4961f..1b423ab 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/acosh.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/acosh.3
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn acosh
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn acoshf
 functions compute the inverse hyperbolic cosine
 of the real
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
 .Fn acosh
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn acoshf
 functions
 return the inverse hyperbolic cosine of
@@ -84,5 +84,5 @@ causes a reserved operand fault.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Fn acosh
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/asin.3 b/lib/msun/man/asin.3
index 8b26bd2..6515fbd 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/asin.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/asin.3
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn asin
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn asinf
 functions compute the principal value of the arc sine of
 .Fa x .
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
 .Fn asin
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn asinf
 functions return the arc sine in the range
 .Bk -words
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ a reserved operand fault generated.
 .Xr atan2 3 ,
 .Xr cos 3 ,
 .Xr cosh 3 ,
-.Xr math 3 , 
+.Xr math 3 ,
 .Xr sin 3 ,
 .Xr sinh 3 ,
 .Xr tan 3 ,
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/asinh.3 b/lib/msun/man/asinh.3
index 00e4313..09450f9 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/asinh.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/asinh.3
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn asinh
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn asinhf
 functions compute the inverse hyperbolic sine
 of the real
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
 .Fn asinh
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn asinhf
 functions
 return the inverse hyperbolic sine of
@@ -72,5 +72,5 @@ return the inverse hyperbolic sine of
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Fn asinh
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/atan.3 b/lib/msun/man/atan.3
index c5e360d..4c6fd64 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/atan.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/atan.3
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
 .Fn atan
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn atanf
 function returns the arc tangent in the range
 .Bk -words
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/atan2.3 b/lib/msun/man/atan2.3
index 457ab08..0c124e7 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/atan2.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/atan2.3
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ The
 and the
 .Fn atan2f
 functions, if successful,
-return the arc tangent of 
+return the arc tangent of
 .Fa y/ Ns Ar x
 in the range
 .Bk -words
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/atanh.3 b/lib/msun/man/atanh.3
index 95cea4d..bff082b 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/atanh.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/atanh.3
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn  atanh
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn  atanhf
 functions compute the inverse hyperbolic tangent
 of the real
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
 .Fn atanh
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn atanhf
 functions
 return the inverse hyperbolic tangent of
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/cos.3 b/lib/msun/man/cos.3
index 32a3762..bd1b313 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/cos.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/cos.3
@@ -53,14 +53,14 @@ and the
 functions compute the cosine of
 .Fa x
 (measured in radians).
-A large magnitude argument may yield a result with little or no 
+A large magnitude argument may yield a result with little or no
 significance.
 For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Xr math 3 .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
 .Fn cos
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn cosf
 functions return the cosine value.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/cosh.3 b/lib/msun/man/cosh.3
index 4c9d9b3..7646772 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/cosh.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/cosh.3
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn cosh
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn coshf
 functions compute the hyperbolic cosine of
 .Fa x .
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ of
 is too large; in this event, the global variable
 .Va errno
 is set to
-.Er ERANGE . 
+.Er ERANGE .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr acos 3 ,
 .Xr asin 3 ,
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/erf.3 b/lib/msun/man/erf.3
index ba66892..6157fd8 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/erf.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/erf.3
@@ -57,20 +57,20 @@ These functions calculate the error function of
 .Pp
 The
 .Fn erf
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn erff
 functions calculate the error function of x; where
 .Bd -ragged -offset indent
 .if n \{\
 erf(x) = 2/sqrt(pi)\(**\|integral from 0 to x of exp(\-t\(**t) dt. \}
 .if t \{\
-erf\|(x) := 
+erf\|(x) :=
 (2/\(sr\(*p)\|\(is\d\s8\z0\s10\u\u\s8x\s10\d\|exp(\-t\u\s82\s10\d)\|dt. \}
 .Ed
 .Pp
 The
 .Fn erfc
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn erfcf
 functions calculate the complementary error function of
 .Fa x ;
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/exp.3 b/lib/msun/man/exp.3
index 2ebaeb2..7885eed 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/exp.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/exp.3
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ functions compute the exponential value of the given argument
 .Pp
 The
 .Fn expm1
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn expm1f
 functions compute the value exp(x)\-1 accurately even for tiny argument
 .Fa x .
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ The
 .Fn log
 and the
 .Fn logf
-functions compute the value of the natural logarithm of argument 
+functions compute the value of the natural logarithm of argument
 .Fa x .
 .Pp
 The
@@ -131,12 +131,12 @@ to the exponent
 .Fn log x ,
 .Fn expm1 x
 and
-.Fn log1p x 
-are accurate to within 
+.Fn log1p x
+are accurate to within
 an
 .Em ulp ,
 and
-.Fn log10 x 
+.Fn log10 x
 to within about 2
 .Em ulps ;
 an
@@ -268,10 +268,10 @@ infinite or \*(Na) before computing x**0 cannot care
 whether 0**0 = 1 or not.
 Any program that depends
 upon 0**0 to be invalid is dubious anyway since that
-expression's meaning and, if invalid, its consequences 
+expression's meaning and, if invalid, its consequences
 vary from one computer system to another.
 .It
-Some Algebra texts (e.g. Sigler's) define x**0 = 1 for 
+Some Algebra texts (e.g. Sigler's) define x**0 = 1 for
 all x, including x = 0.
 This is compatible with the convention that accepts a[0]
 as the value of polynomial
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ The reason for setting 0**0 = 1 anyway is this:
 If x(z) and y(z) are
 .Em any
 functions analytic (expandable
-in power series) in z around z = 0, and if there 
+in power series) in z around z = 0, and if there
 x(0) = y(0) = 0, then x(z)**y(z) \(-> 1 as z \(-> 0.
 .Ed
 .It
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/floor.3 b/lib/msun/man/floor.3
index 29d2283..3932383 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/floor.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/floor.3
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ The
 .Fn floor
 and the
 .Fn floorf
-function returns the largest integral value 
+function returns the largest integral value
 (represented as a double precision number)
 less than or equal to
 .Fa x .
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/ieee.3 b/lib/msun/man/ieee.3
index c989bda..f0186e2 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/ieee.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/ieee.3
@@ -51,19 +51,19 @@
 .Nd functions for IEEE arithmetic
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <math.h>
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn copysign "double x" "double y"
-.Ft float 
+.Ft float
 .Fn copysignf "float x" "float y"
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn finite "double x"
-.Ft int 
+.Ft int
 .Fn finitef "float x"
 .Ft int
 .Fn ilogb "double x"
 .Ft int
 .Fn ilogbf "float x"
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn nextafter "double x" "double y"
 .Ft float
 .Fn nextafterf "float x" "float y"
@@ -71,12 +71,12 @@
 .Fn remainder "double x" "double y"
 .Ft float
 .Fn remainderf "float x" "float y"
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn scalbn "double x" "int n"
-.Ft float 
+.Ft float
 .Fn scalbnf "float x" "int n"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-These functions are required or recommended by 
+These functions are required or recommended by
 .St -ieee754 .
 .Pp
 .Fn copysign
@@ -109,18 +109,18 @@ return
 .Fa x Ns 's exponent
 .Fa n ,
 in integer format.
-.Fn ilogb \*(Pm\*(If 
-returns 
+.Fn ilogb \*(Pm\*(If
+returns
 .Dv INT_MAX
 and
 .Fn ilogb 0
-returns 
+returns
 .Dv INT_MIN .
 .Pp
-.Fn nextafter 
+.Fn nextafter
 and
 .Fn nextafterf
-return the next machine representable number from 
+return the next machine representable number from
 .Fa x
 in direction
 .Fa y .
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ computed by exponent manipulation.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Nm ieee
-functions appeared in 
+functions appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
 .Sh STANDARDS
 .St -ieee754
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/ieee_test.3 b/lib/msun/man/ieee_test.3
index 61b6418..84f78a5 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/ieee_test.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/ieee_test.3
@@ -45,20 +45,20 @@
 .Nd IEEE test functions
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Fd #include <math.h>
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn logb "double x"
-.Ft float 
+.Ft float
 .Fn logbf "float x"
-.Ft double 
+.Ft double
 .Fn scalb "double x" "double n"
-.Ft float 
+.Ft float
 .Fn scalbf "float x" "float n"
 .Ft double
 .Fn significand "double x"
 .Ft float
 .Fn significandf "float x"
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-These functions allow users to test conformance to 
+These functions allow users to test conformance to
 .St -ieee754 .
 Their use is not otherwise recommended.
 .Pp
@@ -81,22 +81,22 @@ return
 .Fa x Ns \(**(2** Ns Fa n )
 computed by exponent manipulation.
 .Pp
-.Fn significand x 
+.Fn significand x
 and
-.Fn significandf x 
+.Fn significandf x
 return
 .Fa sig ,
-where 
-.Fa x 
-:= 
+where
+.Fa x
+:=
 .Fa sig No \(** 2** Ns Fa n
-with 1 \(<= 
+with 1 \(<=
 .Fa sig
 < 2.
 .Fn significand x
 and
 .Fn significandf x
-are not defined when 
+are not defined when
 .Fa x
 is 0, \*(Pm\*(If, or \*(Na.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/j0.3 b/lib/msun/man/j0.3
index e743149..dfd58b7 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/j0.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/j0.3
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ compute the
 .Em Bessel function of the second kind for the integer
 .Em order
 .Fa n
-for the positive 
+for the positive
 .Em real
 value
 .Fa x .
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/lgamma.3 b/lib/msun/man/lgamma.3
index eb3d34b..0b7e31b 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/lgamma.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/lgamma.3
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ will underflow.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Fn lgamma
-function appeared in 
+function appeared in
 .Bx 4.3 .
 The
 .Fn gamma
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/math.3 b/lib/msun/man/math.3
index d0633e5..73e8d7b 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/math.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/math.3
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Declarations for these functions may be obtained from the include file
 .SH "LIST OF FUNCTIONS"
 Each of the following double functions has a float counterpart with the
 name ending in f, as an example the float counterpart of double acos(double
-x) is float acosf(float x). 
+x) is float acosf(float x).
 .sp 2
 .nf
 .ta \w'copysign'u+2n +\w'infnan.3m'u+10n +\w'inverse trigonometric func'u
@@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ correctly through multiplication and division, and
 .If (finite)/\(+- \0=\0\(+-0
 (nonzero)/0 =
 .If \(+- .
-But 
+But
 .if n \
 Infinity\-Infinity, Infinity\(**0 and Infinity/Infinity
 .if t \
@@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ listed below in declining order of probable importance.
 .ta \w'Invalid Operation'u+6n +\w'Gradual Underflow'u+2n
 Exception	Default Result
 .tc \(ru
-		
+
 .tc
 Invalid Operation	\*(nn, or FALSE
 .if n \{\
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/rint.3 b/lib/msun/man/rint.3
index c8e320d..d4b7aeb 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/rint.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/rint.3
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ The
 .Fn rint
 and the
 .Fn rintf
-functions return the integral value (represented as a double or float 
+functions return the integral value (represented as a double or float
 precision number) nearest to
 .Fa x
 according to the prevailing rounding mode.
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/sinh.3 b/lib/msun/man/sinh.3
index c7921c9..78995a0 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/sinh.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/sinh.3
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ The
 and the
 .Fn sinhf
 functions return the hyperbolic sine value unless
-the  magnitude 
+the  magnitude
 of
 .Fa x
 is too large; in this event, the global variable
diff --git a/lib/msun/man/tanh.3 b/lib/msun/man/tanh.3
index 4659366..e17ed38 100644
--- a/lib/msun/man/tanh.3
+++ b/lib/msun/man/tanh.3
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ For a discussion of error due to roundoff, see
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 The
 .Fn tanh
-and the 
+and the
 .Fn tanhf
 functions return the hyperbolic tangent value.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/libexec/bootpd/bootpd.8 b/libexec/bootpd/bootpd.8
index 82c7b40..b06b4f6 100644
--- a/libexec/bootpd/bootpd.8
+++ b/libexec/bootpd/bootpd.8
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 .Oc
 .Nm bootpgw
 .Op Fl i
-.Op Fl s      
+.Op Fl s
 .Op Fl t Ar timeout
 .Op Fl d Ar level
 .Ar server
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ it does not read a configuration file.
 .Pp
 Either program automatically detects whether it was invoked from inetd
 or from a shell and automatically selects the appropriate mode.
-The 
+The
 .Fl s
 or
 .Fl i
diff --git a/libexec/fingerd/fingerd.8 b/libexec/fingerd/fingerd.8
index 30d09d0..f4cd685 100644
--- a/libexec/fingerd/fingerd.8
+++ b/libexec/fingerd/fingerd.8
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ closes its connections as soon as the output is finished.
 .Pp
 If the line is null (i.e. just a
 .Aq Tn CRLF
-is sent) then 
+is sent) then
 .Xr finger
 returns a
 .Dq default
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Use an alternate program as the local information provider.
 The default local program
 executed by
 .Nm
-is 
+is
 .Xr finger 1 .
 By specifying a customized local server,
 this option allows a system manager
diff --git a/libexec/ftpd/ftpd.8 b/libexec/ftpd/ftpd.8
index 8af58f2..dd32934 100644
--- a/libexec/ftpd/ftpd.8
+++ b/libexec/ftpd/ftpd.8
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Available options:
 .It Fl d
 Debugging information is written to the syslog using LOG_FTP.
 .It Fl l
-Each successful and failed 
+Each successful and failed
 .Xr ftp 1
 session is logged using syslog with a facility of LOG_FTP.
 If this option is specified twice, the retrieve (get), store (put), append,
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ will revert to historical behavior with regard to security checks on
 user operations and restrictions on PORT requests.
 Currently,
 .Nm
-will only honor PORT commands directed to unprivileged ports on the 
+will only honor PORT commands directed to unprivileged ports on the
 remote user's host (which violates the FTP protocol specification but
 closes some security holes).
 .It Fl S
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ If the file
 .Pa /etc/ftpwelcome
 exists,
 .Nm
-prints it before issuing the 
+prints it before issuing the
 .Dq ready
 message.
 If the file
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ in the anonymous user's case.
 .Pp
 The ftp server currently supports the following ftp requests.
 The case of the requests is ignored.  Requests marked [RW] are
-disabled if 
+disabled if
 .Fl r
 is specified.
 .Bl -column "Request" -offset indent
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ This allows users to utilize the metacharacters
 .Dq Li \&*?[]{}~ .
 .Pp
 .Nm Ftpd
-authenticates users according to six rules. 
+authenticates users according to six rules.
 .Pp
 .Bl -enum -offset indent
 .It
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Entries in this file interpreted as group names are prefixed by an "at"
 .Ql \&@
 sign.
 .It
-The user must have a standard shell returned by 
+The user must have a standard shell returned by
 .Xr getusershell 3 .
 .It
 If the user name appears in the file
@@ -344,10 +344,10 @@ When the
 option is set, all transfers are logged as well.
 .El
 .Pp
-In the last case, 
+In the last case,
 .Nm
 takes special measures to restrict the client's access privileges.
-The server performs a 
+The server performs a
 .Xr chroot 2
 to the home directory of the
 .Dq ftp
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ The files pwd.db (see
 .Xr passwd 5 )
 and
 .Xr group 5
-must be present for the 
+must be present for the
 .Xr ls
 command to be able to produce owner names rather than numbers.
 The password field in
@@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ It defaults to
 .Pa /etc/ftpmotd .
 .El
 .Pp
-Lines beginning with a '#' are ignored and can be used to include 
+Lines beginning with a '#' are ignored and can be used to include
 comments.
 .Pp
 Defining a virtual host for the primary IP address or hostname
diff --git a/libexec/getNAME/getNAME.1 b/libexec/getNAME/getNAME.1
index 0c65f15..a6de373 100644
--- a/libexec/getNAME/getNAME.1
+++ b/libexec/getNAME/getNAME.1
@@ -36,10 +36,10 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Nm
-utility 
+utility
 get name sections from manual pages.
 Without options
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 building
 .Xr apropos 1
 database entries.
diff --git a/libexec/getty/getty.8 b/libexec/getty/getty.8
index 3418ca7..fe9d879 100644
--- a/libexec/getty/getty.8
+++ b/libexec/getty/getty.8
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .Nd set terminal mode
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm
-.Oo 
+.Oo
 .Ar type
 .Op Ar tty
 .Oc
diff --git a/libexec/getty/ttys.5 b/libexec/getty/ttys.5
index b4a5219..3f00428 100644
--- a/libexec/getty/ttys.5
+++ b/libexec/getty/ttys.5
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ and control the use of terminal special files.
 This information is read with the
 .Xr getttyent 3
 library routines.
-There is one line in the 
+There is one line in the
 .Nm
 file per special device file.
 Fields are separated by tabs and/or spaces.
diff --git a/libexec/pppoed/pppoed.8 b/libexec/pppoed/pppoed.8
index a1a7cd9..9529675 100644
--- a/libexec/pppoed/pppoed.8
+++ b/libexec/pppoed/pppoed.8
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ offers service
 and waits for a
 .Dv SUCCESS
 indication from the PPPoE node.  On receipt of the SUCCESS indication,
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 will execute
 .Pp
 .D1 Ic exec /usr/sbin/ppp -direct Ar provider
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ does not currently allow node chaining.  This may change in the future.
 .Sh HISTORY
 The
 .Nm
-program was written by 
+program was written by
 .An Brian Somers Aq brian@Awfulhak.org
 and first appeared in
 .Fx 3.4 .
diff --git a/libexec/rexecd/rexecd.8 b/libexec/rexecd/rexecd.8
index 66bd406..753c06d 100644
--- a/libexec/rexecd/rexecd.8
+++ b/libexec/rexecd/rexecd.8
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
 .Op Fl i
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Rexecd
-is the server for the 
+is the server for the
 .Xr rexec 3
 routine.  The server provides remote execution facilities
 with authentication based on user names and
@@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ byte.  The resultant string is
 interpreted as an
 .Tn ASCII
 number, base 10.
-.It 
+.It
 If the number received in step 1 is non-zero,
 it is interpreted as the port number of a secondary
-stream to be used for the 
+stream to be used for the
 .Em stderr .
 A second connection is then created to the specified
 port on the client's machine.
@@ -76,12 +76,12 @@ A NUL terminated user name of at most 16 characters
 is retrieved on the initial socket.
 .It
 A NUL terminated, unencrypted password of at most
-16 characters is retrieved on the initial socket.  
+16 characters is retrieved on the initial socket.
 .It
 A NUL terminated command to be passed to a
 shell is retrieved on the initial socket.  The length of
 the command is limited by the upper bound on the size of
-the system's argument list.  
+the system's argument list.
 .It
 .Nm Rexecd
 then validates the user as is done at login time
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ No password file entry for the user name existed.
 .It Sy Password incorrect.
 The wrong password was supplied.
 .It Sy \&No remote directory.
-The 
+The
 .Xr chdir
 command to the home directory failed.
 .It Sy Try again.
diff --git a/libexec/rlogind/rlogind.8 b/libexec/rlogind/rlogind.8
index cd44748..9f30fd8 100644
--- a/libexec/rlogind/rlogind.8
+++ b/libexec/rlogind/rlogind.8
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
 .Op Fl Daln
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Rlogind
-is the server for the 
+is the server for the
 .Xr rlogin 1
 program.  The server provides a remote login facility
 with authentication based on privileged port numbers from trusted hosts.
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Enable Kerberos authentication.
 .It Fl v
 Enable vacuous mode.
 .It Fl x
-Enable 
+Enable
 .Tn DES
 encryption for all data passed via the rlogin
 session.  This may impact response time
@@ -112,14 +112,14 @@ verifying that the name and address correspond.
 Normal authentication is bypassed if the address verification fails.
 .El
 .Pp
-Once the source port and address have been checked, 
+Once the source port and address have been checked,
 .Nm
 proceeds with the authentication process described in
 .Xr rshd 8 .
-It then allocates a pseudo terminal (see 
+It then allocates a pseudo terminal (see
 .Xr pty 4 ) ,
 and manipulates file descriptors so that the slave
-half of the pseudo terminal becomes the 
+half of the pseudo terminal becomes the
 .Em stdin ,
 .Em stdout ,
 and
diff --git a/libexec/rpc.rquotad/rpc.rquotad.8 b/libexec/rpc.rquotad/rpc.rquotad.8
index cbaa4db..9d3c8af 100644
--- a/libexec/rpc.rquotad/rpc.rquotad.8
+++ b/libexec/rpc.rquotad/rpc.rquotad.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Theo de Raadt
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
 .Dt RPC.RQUOTAD 8
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm rpc.rquotad 
-.Nd remote quota server 
+.Nm rpc.rquotad
+.Nd remote quota server
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm /usr/libexec/rpc.rquotad
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
 is a
 .Xr rpc 3
 server which returns quotas for a user of a local filesystem
-which is NFS-mounted onto a remote machine. 
+which is NFS-mounted onto a remote machine.
 .Xr Quota 1
 uses the results to display user quotas for remote filesystems.
 .Nm Rpc.rquotad
diff --git a/libexec/rpc.rstatd/rpc.rstatd.8 b/libexec/rpc.rstatd/rpc.rstatd.8
index dac9694..ade5bbd 100644
--- a/libexec/rpc.rstatd/rpc.rstatd.8
+++ b/libexec/rpc.rstatd/rpc.rstatd.8
@@ -37,14 +37,14 @@
 .Dt RPC.RSTATD 8
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm rpc.rstatd 
+.Nm rpc.rstatd
 .Nd kernel statistics server
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm /usr/libexec/rpc.rstatd
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Rpc.rstatd
 is a server which returns performance statistics obtained from the kernel.
-These statistics are read using the 
+These statistics are read using the
 .Xr rup 1
 command.
 The
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ daemon is normally invoked by
 .Nm Rpc.rstatd
 uses an
 .Tn RPC
-protocol defined in 
+protocol defined in
 .Pa /usr/include/rpcsvc/rstat.x .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr rup 1 ,
diff --git a/libexec/rpc.rusersd/rpc.rusersd.8 b/libexec/rpc.rusersd/rpc.rusersd.8
index 6c35a8f..e5bbe2f 100644
--- a/libexec/rpc.rusersd/rpc.rusersd.8
+++ b/libexec/rpc.rusersd/rpc.rusersd.8
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 .Dt RPC.RUSERSD 8
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm rpc.rusersd 
+.Nm rpc.rusersd
 .Nd logged in users server
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm /usr/libexec/rpc.rusersd
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ daemon is normally invoked by
 .Nm Rpc.rusersd
 uses an
 .Tn RPC
-protocol defined in 
+protocol defined in
 .Pa /usr/include/rpcsvc/rnusers.x .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr rusers 1 ,
diff --git a/libexec/rpc.rwalld/rpc.rwalld.8 b/libexec/rpc.rwalld/rpc.rwalld.8
index 94f4e95..6846e2e 100644
--- a/libexec/rpc.rwalld/rpc.rwalld.8
+++ b/libexec/rpc.rwalld/rpc.rwalld.8
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 .Dt RPC.RWALLD 8
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm rpc.rwalld 
+.Nm rpc.rwalld
 .Nd write messages to users currently logged in server
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm /usr/libexec/rpc.rwalld
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
 .Nm Rpc.rwalld
 is a server which will send a message to users
 currently logged in to the system. This server
-invokes the 
+invokes the
 .Xr wall 1
 command to actually write the messages to the
 system.
@@ -60,18 +60,18 @@ is not invoked by
 .Xr inetd 8 .
 .El
 .Pp
-Messages are sent to this server by the 
+Messages are sent to this server by the
 .Xr rwall 1
 command.
 The
 .Nm
-daemon is normally invoked by 
+daemon is normally invoked by
 .Xr inetd 8 .
 .Pp
 .Nm Rpc.rwalld
 uses an
 .Tn RPC
-protocol defined in 
+protocol defined in
 .Pa /usr/include/rpcsvc/rwall.x .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr rwall 1 ,
diff --git a/libexec/rpc.sprayd/rpc.sprayd.8 b/libexec/rpc.sprayd/rpc.sprayd.8
index 566c7e3..5ca9d88 100644
--- a/libexec/rpc.sprayd/rpc.sprayd.8
+++ b/libexec/rpc.sprayd/rpc.sprayd.8
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994 Christos Zoulas
 .\" All rights reserved.
 .\"
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
 .Dt RPC.SPRAYD 8
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
-.Nm rpc.sprayd 
+.Nm rpc.sprayd
 .Nd spray server
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm /usr/libexec/rpc.sprayd
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ daemon is normally invoked by
 .Nm Rpc.sprayd
 uses an
 .Tn RPC
-protocol defined in 
+protocol defined in
 .Pa /usr/include/rpcsvc/spray.x .
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr spray 8
diff --git a/libexec/rshd/rshd.8 b/libexec/rshd/rshd.8
index 622633d..81eac4f 100644
--- a/libexec/rshd/rshd.8
+++ b/libexec/rshd/rshd.8
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
 The
 .Nm
 server
-is the server for the 
+is the server for the
 .Xr rcmd 3
 routine and, consequently, for the
 .Xr rsh 1
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ number, base 10.
 .It
 If the number received in step 2 is non-zero,
 it is interpreted as the port number of a secondary
-stream to be used for the 
+stream to be used for the
 .Em stderr .
 A second connection is then created to the specified
 port on the client's machine.  The source port of this
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ machine.
 A null terminated command to be passed to a
 shell is retrieved on the initial socket.  The length of
 the command is limited by the upper bound on the size of
-the system's argument list.  
+the system's argument list.
 .It
 .Nm Rshd
 then validates the user using
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ from doing any validation based on the user's
 file,
 unless the user is the superuser.
 .It
-If the file 
+If the file
 .Pa /var/run/nologin
 exists and the user is not the superuser,
 the connection is closed.
@@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ list (as configured into the system).
 No password file entry for the user name existed
 or the authentication procedure described above failed.
 .It Sy Remote directory.
-The 
+The
 .Xr chdir 2
 function to the home directory failed.
 .It Sy Logins not available right now.
@@ -206,10 +206,10 @@ was attempted outside the allowed hours defined in
 .Pa /etc/login.conf
 for the local user's login class.
 .It Sy Can't make pipe.
-The pipe needed for the 
+The pipe needed for the
 .Em stderr ,
 wasn't created.
-.It Sy Can't fork; try again. 
+.It Sy Can't fork; try again.
 A
 .Xr fork 2
 by the server failed.
diff --git a/libexec/telnetd/telnetd.8 b/libexec/telnetd/telnetd.8
index 173dbef..d6fcae9 100644
--- a/libexec/telnetd/telnetd.8
+++ b/libexec/telnetd/telnetd.8
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ option may be used to start up
 .Nm
 manually, instead of through
 .Xr inetd 8 .
-If started up this way, 
+If started up this way,
 .Ar port
 may be specified to run
 .Nm
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ to print out debugging information
 to the connection, allowing the user to see what
 .Nm
 is doing.
-There are several possible values for 
+There are several possible values for
 .Ar debugmode :
 .Bl -tag -width exercise
 .It Cm options
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Print information about the negotiation of
 .Tn TELNET
 options.
 .It Cm report
-Print the 
+Print the
 .Cm options
 information, plus some additional information
 about what processing is going on.
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ a specific authentication type without having to recompile
 operates by allocating a pseudo-terminal device (see
 .Xr pty 4 )
 for a client, then creating a login process which has
-the slave side of the pseudo-terminal as 
+the slave side of the pseudo-terminal as
 .Dv stdin ,
 .Dv stdout
 and
@@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ between the remote client and the login process.
 .Pp
 When a
 .Tn TELNET
-session is started up, 
+session is started up,
 .Nm
 sends
 .Tn TELNET
diff --git a/libexec/tftpd/tftpd.8 b/libexec/tftpd/tftpd.8
index f6116da..ef8be4a 100644
--- a/libexec/tftpd/tftpd.8
+++ b/libexec/tftpd/tftpd.8
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ The server is normally started by
 The use of
 .Xr tftp 1
 does not require an account or password on the remote system.
-Due to the lack of authentication information, 
+Due to the lack of authentication information,
 .Nm
 will allow only publicly readable files to be
 accessed.
@@ -86,12 +86,12 @@ as server program arguments in
 .Pa /etc/inetd.conf .
 In this case access is restricted to files whose
 names are prefixed by the one of the given directories.
-The given directories are also treated as a search path for 
+The given directories are also treated as a search path for
 relative filename requests.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Fl s
-option provides additional security by changing 
+option provides additional security by changing
 .Nm Ns No 's
 root directory, thereby prohibiting accesses outside of the specified
 .Ar directory .
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ The
 .Fl s
 option is required for
 .Fl c
-and the specified 
+and the specified
 .Ar directory
 is used as a base.
 .It Fl C
@@ -134,8 +134,8 @@ except it falls back to
 if a directory does not exist for the client's IP.
 .It Fl l
 Log all requests using
-.Xr syslog 3 
-with the facility of 
+.Xr syslog 3
+with the facility of
 .Dv LOG_FTP .
 Note: Logging of
 .Dv LOG_FTP
diff --git a/libexec/xtend/xtend.8 b/libexec/xtend/xtend.8
index 38527e9..75f23b3 100644
--- a/libexec/xtend/xtend.8
+++ b/libexec/xtend/xtend.8
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ is issued, otherwise a single-line response containing
 .Sy ERROR
 is produced.
 .It Ic dump
-causes 
+causes
 .Nm
 to dump the current status of all devices to an
 .Tn ASCII
diff --git a/sbin/atm/atm/atm.8 b/sbin/atm/atm/atm.8
index 6776405..3988daa 100644
--- a/sbin/atm/atm/atm.8
+++ b/sbin/atm/atm/atm.8
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ IP management subcommands:
 [<netif>] <host>
 .ti -5
 .B atm set arpserver
-<netif> <ATM address> | local [<IP prefix> ...] 
+<netif> <ATM address> | local [<IP prefix> ...]
 .ti -5
 .B atm show ARP
 [<host>]
diff --git a/sbin/badsect/badsect.8 b/sbin/badsect/badsect.8
index 5aa4b01..7ac3e72 100644
--- a/sbin/badsect/badsect.8
+++ b/sbin/badsect/badsect.8
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ currently requires the running of the standard
 formatter.
 Thus to deal with a newly bad block
 or on disks where the drivers
-do not support the bad-blocking standard 
+do not support the bad-blocking standard
 .Nm
 may be used to good effect.
 .Pp
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ and run
 on the file system.  The bad sectors should show up in two files
 or in the bad sector files and the free list.  Have
 .Xr fsck
-remove files containing the offending bad sectors, but 
+remove files containing the offending bad sectors, but
 .Em do not
 have it remove the
 .Pa BAD/ Ns Em nnnnn
@@ -103,11 +103,11 @@ works by giving the specified sector numbers in a
 system call,
 creating an illegal file whose first block address is the block containing
 bad sector and whose name is the bad sector number.
-When it is discovered by 
+When it is discovered by
 .Xr fsck 8
 it will ask
 .Dq Li "HOLD BAD BLOCK \&?" .
-A positive response will cause 
+A positive response will cause
 .Xr fsck 8
 to convert the inode to a regular file containing the bad block.
 .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/sbin/bsdlabel/bsdlabel.5 b/sbin/bsdlabel/bsdlabel.5
index fcd4b0d..efd31df 100644
--- a/sbin/bsdlabel/bsdlabel.5
+++ b/sbin/bsdlabel/bsdlabel.5
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ A copy of the in-core label for a disk can be obtained with the
 .Xr ioctl 2 ;
 this works with a file descriptor for a block or character (``raw'') device
 for any partition of the disk.
-The in-core copy of the label is set by the 
+The in-core copy of the label is set by the
 .Dv DIOCSDINFO
 .Xr ioctl 2 .
 The offset of a partition cannot generally be changed while it is open,
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ nor can it be made smaller while it is open.
 One exception is that any change is allowed if no label was found
 on the disk, and the driver was able to construct only a skeletal label
 without partition information.
-Finally, the 
+Finally, the
 .Dv DIOCWDINFO
 .Xr ioctl 2
 operation sets the in-core label and then updates the on-disk label;
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ struct disklabel {
 	u_int16_t d_subtype;		/* controller/d_type specific */
 	char	  d_typename[16];	/* type name, e.g. "eagle" */
 
-	/* 
+	/*
 	 * d_packname contains the pack identifier and is returned when
 	 * the disklabel is read off the disk or in-core copy.
 	 * d_boot0 and d_boot1 are the (optional) names of the
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ struct dos_partition {
     	unsigned char	dp_mid;
 #define DOSMID_386BSD		(0x14|0x80) /* 386bsd|bootable */
 	unsigned char	dp_sid;
-#define DOSSID_386BSD		(0x44|0x80) /* 386bsd|active */	
+#define DOSSID_386BSD		(0x44|0x80) /* 386bsd|active */
 	unsigned char	dp_dum1;
 	unsigned char	dp_dum2;
 	unsigned char	dp_ipl_sct;
diff --git a/sbin/bsdlabel/bsdlabel.8 b/sbin/bsdlabel/bsdlabel.8
index 8c7e69d..8432686 100644
--- a/sbin/bsdlabel/bsdlabel.8
+++ b/sbin/bsdlabel/bsdlabel.8
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ is described under each command.
 .Pp
 .Ss Disk device name
 .Pp
-All 
+All
 .Nm
 forms require a disk device name, which should always be the raw
 device name representing the disk or slice.  For example
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ will automatically prepend it.
 .Ss Reading the disk label
 .Pp
 To examine or save the label on a disk drive, use
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 without options:
 .Pp
 .Nm
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ if the disk has no label, or the partition types on the disk are incorrect,
 the kernel may have constructed or modified the label.
 If the
 .Fl r
-flag is given, 
+flag is given,
 .Nm
 reads the label from the raw disk and displays it.  Both versions are usually
 identical except in the case where a label has not yet been initialized or
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ You should never use this command on a base disk unless you intend to create a
 .Dq dangerously-dedicated
 disk, such as
 .Ar da0 .
-This command is typically run on a slice such as 
+This command is typically run on a slice such as
 .Ar da0s1 .
 .Pp
 .Nm
@@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ This command is typically run on a slice such as
 .Pp
 This form corresponds to the
 .Dq write label
-command described above.  
+command described above.
 In addition to writing a new volume label, it also installs the bootstrap.
 If run on a base disk this command will create a
 .Dq dangerously-dedicated
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ disklabel that would have been written will be printed to stdout.
 .Pp
 This form corresponds to the
 .Dq restore label
-command described above.  
+command described above.
 In addition to restoring the volume label, it also installs the bootstrap.
 If run on a base disk this command will create a
 .Dq dangerously-dedicated
@@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Specify the names explicitly with the
 .Fl b
 and
 .Fl s
-flags. 
+flags.
 .Fl b
 indicates the primary boot program and
 .Fl s
@@ -427,11 +427,11 @@ If the
 .Fl b
 and
 .Fl s
-flags are not specified, but 
+flags are not specified, but
 .Ar disktype
-was specified, the names of the programs are taken from the 
+was specified, the names of the programs are taken from the
 .Dq b0
-and 
+and
 .Dq b1
 parameters of the
 .Xr disktab 5
@@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ to edit your newly created label, adding appropriate partitions.
 Finally newfs the filesystem partitions you created in the label.  A typical
 disklabel partitioning scheme would be to have an
 .Dq a
-partition 
+partition
 of approximately 128MB to hold the root filesystem, a
 .Dq b
 partition for
@@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ label.  The format is:
 # /dev/da1c:
 type: SCSI
 disk: da0s1
-label: 
+label:
 flags:
 bytes/sector: 512
 sectors/track: 51
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ trackskew: 0
 cylinderskew: 0
 headswitch: 0           # milliseconds
 track-to-track seek: 0  # milliseconds
-drivedata: 0 
+drivedata: 0
 
 8 partitions:
 #        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize bps/cpg]
@@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ option when writing a label.
 .It Nm flags
 Flags may be
 .Ar removable ,
-.Ar ecc 
+.Ar ecc
 or
 .Ar badsect .
 .Ar removable
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ is set for removable media drives, but no current
 driver evaluates this
 flag.
 .Ar ecc
-is no longer supported; 
+is no longer supported;
 .Ar badsect
 specifies that the drive can perform bad sector remapping.
 .It Nm sectors/unit
@@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ use.
 See the definitions starting with
 .Dv FS_UNUSED
 in
-.Pa /usr/include/sys/disklabel.h 
+.Pa /usr/include/sys/disklabel.h
 for more details.
 .It fsize
 For
@@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ cylinder boundary.
 .Sh EXAMPLES
 .Dl disklabel da0
 .Pp
-Display the in-core label for 
+Display the in-core label for
 .Pa da0s1
 as obtained via
 .Pa /dev/da0s1 .
@@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ label.  Normally you specify the slice.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel da0s1 > savedlabel
 .Pp
-Save the in-core label for 
+Save the in-core label for
 .Pa da0s1
 into the file
 .Pa savedlabel .
@@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ flag to restore the label at a later date.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -w -r /dev/da0s1 da2212 foo
 .Pp
-Create a label for 
+Create a label for
 .Pa da0s1
 based on information for
 .Dq da2212
@@ -713,28 +713,28 @@ Any existing bootstrap code will be clobbered.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -e -r da0s1
 .Pp
-Read the on-disk label for 
+Read the on-disk label for
 .Pa da0s1 ,
 edit it and reinstall in-core as well as on-disk.  Existing bootstrap code is
 unaffected.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -e -r -n da0s1
 .Pp
-Read the on-disk label for 
+Read the on-disk label for
 .Pa da0s1 ,
 edit it, and display what the new label would be (in sectors).  It does
 NOT install the new label either in-core or on-disk.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -r -w da0s1 auto
 .Pp
-Try to auto-detect the required information from 
+Try to auto-detect the required information from
 .Pa da0s1 ,
 and write a new label to the disk.  Use another disklabel -e command to edit the
 partitioning and file system information.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -R da0s1 savedlabel
 .Pp
-Restore the on-disk and in-core label for 
+Restore the on-disk and in-core label for
 .Pa da0s1
 from information in
 .Pa savedlabel .
@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Existing bootstrap code is unaffected.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -R -n da0s1 label_layout
 .Pp
-Display what the label would be for 
+Display what the label would be for
 .Pa da0s1
 using the partition layout in
 .Pa label_layout .
@@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ partition sizes.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -B da0s1
 .Pp
-Install a new bootstrap on 
+Install a new bootstrap on
 .Pa da0s1 .
 The boot code comes from
 .Pa /boot/boot1
@@ -801,7 +801,7 @@ which could be used as a source file for
 # /dev/ad0s1c:
 type: ESDI
 disk: ad0s1
-label: 
+label:
 flags:
 bytes/sector: 512
 sectors/track: 63
@@ -815,16 +815,16 @@ trackskew: 0
 cylinderskew: 0
 headswitch: 0		# milliseconds
 track-to-track seek: 0	# milliseconds
-drivedata: 0 
+drivedata: 0
 
 8 partitions:
 #        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize bps/cpg]
   a:   400M        0    4.2BSD     4096 16384    75 	# (Cyl.    0 - 812*)
-  b:     1G        *      swap  
-  c:      *        *    unused  
-  e: 204800        *    4.2BSD  
-  f:     5g        *    4.2BSD  
-  g:      *        *    4.2BSD  
+  b:     1G        *      swap
+  c:      *        *    unused
+  e: 204800        *    4.2BSD
+  f:     5g        *    4.2BSD
+  g:      *        *    4.2BSD
 .Ed
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr ccd 4 ,
@@ -837,7 +837,7 @@ drivedata: 0
 The kernel device drivers will not allow the size of a disk partition
 to be decreased or the offset of a partition to be changed while it is open.
 Some device drivers create a label containing only a single large partition
-if a disk is unlabeled; thus, the label must be written to the 
+if a disk is unlabeled; thus, the label must be written to the
 .Dq a
 partition of the disk while it is open.  This sometimes requires the desired
 label to be set in two steps, the first one creating at least one other
diff --git a/sbin/camcontrol/camcontrol.8 b/sbin/camcontrol/camcontrol.8
index 7038d2a..4b537a3 100644
--- a/sbin/camcontrol/camcontrol.8
+++ b/sbin/camcontrol/camcontrol.8
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
 .Op device id
 .Op generic args
 .Nm
-.Ic inquiry 
+.Ic inquiry
 .Op device id
 .Op generic args
 .Op Fl D
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ that is to be written.  If the format is
 bytes of data will be read from standard input and written to the device.
 .El
 .It Ic debug
-Turn on CAM debugging printfs in the kernel.  This requires options CAMDEBUG 
+Turn on CAM debugging printfs in the kernel.  This requires options CAMDEBUG
 in your kernel config file.  WARNING:  enabling debugging printfs currently
 causes an EXTREME number of kernel printfs.  You may have difficulty
 turning off the debugging printfs once they start, since the kernel will be
@@ -607,14 +607,14 @@ variable allows the user to specify an alternate mode page format file.
 .Pp
 The
 .Ev EDITOR
-variable determines which text editor 
+variable determines which text editor
 .Nm
 starts when editing mode pages.
 .Sh FILES
 .Bl -tag -width /usr/share/misc/scsi_modes -compact
 .It Pa /usr/share/misc/scsi_modes
 is the SCSI mode format database.
-.It Pa /dev/xpt0 
+.It Pa /dev/xpt0
 is the transport layer device.
 .It Pa /dev/pass*
 are the CAM application passthrough devices.
@@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ utility and
 .Xr scsi 3
 library, written by Julian Elischer and Peter Dufault.  The
 .Xr scsi 8
-program first appeared in 386BSD 0.1.2.4, and first appeared in 
+program first appeared in 386BSD 0.1.2.4, and first appeared in
 .Fx
 in
 .Fx 2.0.5 .
@@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ camcontrol cmd -n da -u 1 -c "00 00 00 00 00 v" 0x00 -v
 The sense information from the test unit ready command would not get
 printed out, since the first
 .Xr getopt 3
-call in 
+call in
 .Nm
 bails out when it sees the second argument to
 .Fl c
diff --git a/sbin/ccdconfig/ccdconfig.8 b/sbin/ccdconfig/ccdconfig.8
index 6134148..2b77862 100644
--- a/sbin/ccdconfig/ccdconfig.8
+++ b/sbin/ccdconfig/ccdconfig.8
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ argument is optional.
 ccd0            16      none    /dev/da2e /dev/da3e
 .Ed
 .Pp
-The component devices need to name partitions of type 
+The component devices need to name partitions of type
 .Li FS_BSDFFS
 (or
 .Dq 4.2BSD
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ as shown by
 .Sh EXAMPLES
 A number of ccdconfig examples are shown below.  The arguments passed
 to ccdconfig are exactly the same as you might place in the
-.Pa /etc/ccd.conf 
+.Pa /etc/ccd.conf
 configuration file.  The first example creates a 4-disk stripe out of
 four scsi disk partitions.  The stripe uses a 64 sector interleave.
 The second example is an example of a complex stripe/mirror combination.
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ mirror.  /dev/da2e is mirrored with /dev/da4e and assigned to ccd0.
 .Pp
 When you create a new ccd disk you generally want to
 .Nm disklabel
-it before doing anything else.  Once you create the initial label you can 
+it before doing anything else.  Once you create the initial label you can
 edit it, adding additional partitions.  The label itself takes up the first
 16 sectors of the ccd disk.  If all you are doing is creating filesystems
 with newfs, you do not have to worry about this as newfs will skip the
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ device list making up the ccd disk, will usually destroy any prior
 data on that ccd disk.  If this occurs it is usually a good idea to
 reinitialize the label before [re]constructing your ccd disk.
 .Sh RECOVERY
-An error on a ccd disk is usually unrecoverable unless you are using the 
+An error on a ccd disk is usually unrecoverable unless you are using the
 mirroring option.  But mirroring has its own perils:  It assumes that
 both copies of the data at any given sector are the same.  This holds true
 until a write error occurs or until you replace either side of the mirror.
diff --git a/sbin/cxconfig/cxconfig.8 b/sbin/cxconfig/cxconfig.8
index a6701fe..40ebf79 100644
--- a/sbin/cxconfig/cxconfig.8
+++ b/sbin/cxconfig/cxconfig.8
@@ -10,17 +10,17 @@
 .Op Fl a
 .Op Ar <channel> Op Ar <option>...
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 utility is used for configuring the channel options of
 the Cronyx-Sigma adapter.
 .Pp
 To change channel options the channel should be free: the corresponding
-network interface in ``down'' state, the asynchronous terminal device 
+network interface in ``down'' state, the asynchronous terminal device
 .Pa /dev/tty*
 closed.
 Generally, the channel options are set up during the operating
-system startup, for example from the 
+system startup, for example from the
 .Pa /etc/rc
 file.
 .Pp
@@ -76,15 +76,15 @@ Set the zero channel hardware interface type.
 .Bl -tag -width 10n
 .It "nrz, nrzi, manchester"
 Set the data line signal encoding.
-In the case of 
+In the case of
 .Em NRZ
 encoding the zero bit is transmitted by the zero signal
 level, the one bit - by the positive signal level.
-In the case of 
+In the case of
 .Em NRZI
 encoding the zero bit is transmitted by the change of
 the signal level, the one bit - by the constant signal level.
-In the case of 
+In the case of
 .Em Manchester
 encoding the zero bit is encoded as 01 value,
 the one bit - as 10 value.
@@ -96,9 +96,9 @@ is derived from the received data.
 Set the local loopback mode.
 .It "+extclock, -extclock"
 Set the timing clock source of synchronous channels.  There are
-two possible variants: 
+two possible variants:
 .Em "external clock"
-source or 
+source or
 .Em "internal clock"
 generation.
 .Pp
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ external modem hardware.  In this mode the external timing
 signal is received on TXCIN pin of the connector, and it is
 used as a synchronization clock for transmitting data (TXD).
 .Pp
-In the case of 
+In the case of
 .Em "internal clock"
 mode the transmitted data (TXD)
 are synchronized using the internal on-board timing generator,
diff --git a/sbin/disklabel/disklabel.5 b/sbin/disklabel/disklabel.5
index fcd4b0d..efd31df 100644
--- a/sbin/disklabel/disklabel.5
+++ b/sbin/disklabel/disklabel.5
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ A copy of the in-core label for a disk can be obtained with the
 .Xr ioctl 2 ;
 this works with a file descriptor for a block or character (``raw'') device
 for any partition of the disk.
-The in-core copy of the label is set by the 
+The in-core copy of the label is set by the
 .Dv DIOCSDINFO
 .Xr ioctl 2 .
 The offset of a partition cannot generally be changed while it is open,
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ nor can it be made smaller while it is open.
 One exception is that any change is allowed if no label was found
 on the disk, and the driver was able to construct only a skeletal label
 without partition information.
-Finally, the 
+Finally, the
 .Dv DIOCWDINFO
 .Xr ioctl 2
 operation sets the in-core label and then updates the on-disk label;
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ struct disklabel {
 	u_int16_t d_subtype;		/* controller/d_type specific */
 	char	  d_typename[16];	/* type name, e.g. "eagle" */
 
-	/* 
+	/*
 	 * d_packname contains the pack identifier and is returned when
 	 * the disklabel is read off the disk or in-core copy.
 	 * d_boot0 and d_boot1 are the (optional) names of the
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ struct dos_partition {
     	unsigned char	dp_mid;
 #define DOSMID_386BSD		(0x14|0x80) /* 386bsd|bootable */
 	unsigned char	dp_sid;
-#define DOSSID_386BSD		(0x44|0x80) /* 386bsd|active */	
+#define DOSSID_386BSD		(0x44|0x80) /* 386bsd|active */
 	unsigned char	dp_dum1;
 	unsigned char	dp_dum2;
 	unsigned char	dp_ipl_sct;
diff --git a/sbin/disklabel/disklabel.8 b/sbin/disklabel/disklabel.8
index 8c7e69d..8432686 100644
--- a/sbin/disklabel/disklabel.8
+++ b/sbin/disklabel/disklabel.8
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ is described under each command.
 .Pp
 .Ss Disk device name
 .Pp
-All 
+All
 .Nm
 forms require a disk device name, which should always be the raw
 device name representing the disk or slice.  For example
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ will automatically prepend it.
 .Ss Reading the disk label
 .Pp
 To examine or save the label on a disk drive, use
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 without options:
 .Pp
 .Nm
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ if the disk has no label, or the partition types on the disk are incorrect,
 the kernel may have constructed or modified the label.
 If the
 .Fl r
-flag is given, 
+flag is given,
 .Nm
 reads the label from the raw disk and displays it.  Both versions are usually
 identical except in the case where a label has not yet been initialized or
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ You should never use this command on a base disk unless you intend to create a
 .Dq dangerously-dedicated
 disk, such as
 .Ar da0 .
-This command is typically run on a slice such as 
+This command is typically run on a slice such as
 .Ar da0s1 .
 .Pp
 .Nm
@@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ This command is typically run on a slice such as
 .Pp
 This form corresponds to the
 .Dq write label
-command described above.  
+command described above.
 In addition to writing a new volume label, it also installs the bootstrap.
 If run on a base disk this command will create a
 .Dq dangerously-dedicated
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ disklabel that would have been written will be printed to stdout.
 .Pp
 This form corresponds to the
 .Dq restore label
-command described above.  
+command described above.
 In addition to restoring the volume label, it also installs the bootstrap.
 If run on a base disk this command will create a
 .Dq dangerously-dedicated
@@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Specify the names explicitly with the
 .Fl b
 and
 .Fl s
-flags. 
+flags.
 .Fl b
 indicates the primary boot program and
 .Fl s
@@ -427,11 +427,11 @@ If the
 .Fl b
 and
 .Fl s
-flags are not specified, but 
+flags are not specified, but
 .Ar disktype
-was specified, the names of the programs are taken from the 
+was specified, the names of the programs are taken from the
 .Dq b0
-and 
+and
 .Dq b1
 parameters of the
 .Xr disktab 5
@@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ to edit your newly created label, adding appropriate partitions.
 Finally newfs the filesystem partitions you created in the label.  A typical
 disklabel partitioning scheme would be to have an
 .Dq a
-partition 
+partition
 of approximately 128MB to hold the root filesystem, a
 .Dq b
 partition for
@@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ label.  The format is:
 # /dev/da1c:
 type: SCSI
 disk: da0s1
-label: 
+label:
 flags:
 bytes/sector: 512
 sectors/track: 51
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ trackskew: 0
 cylinderskew: 0
 headswitch: 0           # milliseconds
 track-to-track seek: 0  # milliseconds
-drivedata: 0 
+drivedata: 0
 
 8 partitions:
 #        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize bps/cpg]
@@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ option when writing a label.
 .It Nm flags
 Flags may be
 .Ar removable ,
-.Ar ecc 
+.Ar ecc
 or
 .Ar badsect .
 .Ar removable
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ is set for removable media drives, but no current
 driver evaluates this
 flag.
 .Ar ecc
-is no longer supported; 
+is no longer supported;
 .Ar badsect
 specifies that the drive can perform bad sector remapping.
 .It Nm sectors/unit
@@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ use.
 See the definitions starting with
 .Dv FS_UNUSED
 in
-.Pa /usr/include/sys/disklabel.h 
+.Pa /usr/include/sys/disklabel.h
 for more details.
 .It fsize
 For
@@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ cylinder boundary.
 .Sh EXAMPLES
 .Dl disklabel da0
 .Pp
-Display the in-core label for 
+Display the in-core label for
 .Pa da0s1
 as obtained via
 .Pa /dev/da0s1 .
@@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ label.  Normally you specify the slice.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel da0s1 > savedlabel
 .Pp
-Save the in-core label for 
+Save the in-core label for
 .Pa da0s1
 into the file
 .Pa savedlabel .
@@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ flag to restore the label at a later date.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -w -r /dev/da0s1 da2212 foo
 .Pp
-Create a label for 
+Create a label for
 .Pa da0s1
 based on information for
 .Dq da2212
@@ -713,28 +713,28 @@ Any existing bootstrap code will be clobbered.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -e -r da0s1
 .Pp
-Read the on-disk label for 
+Read the on-disk label for
 .Pa da0s1 ,
 edit it and reinstall in-core as well as on-disk.  Existing bootstrap code is
 unaffected.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -e -r -n da0s1
 .Pp
-Read the on-disk label for 
+Read the on-disk label for
 .Pa da0s1 ,
 edit it, and display what the new label would be (in sectors).  It does
 NOT install the new label either in-core or on-disk.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -r -w da0s1 auto
 .Pp
-Try to auto-detect the required information from 
+Try to auto-detect the required information from
 .Pa da0s1 ,
 and write a new label to the disk.  Use another disklabel -e command to edit the
 partitioning and file system information.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -R da0s1 savedlabel
 .Pp
-Restore the on-disk and in-core label for 
+Restore the on-disk and in-core label for
 .Pa da0s1
 from information in
 .Pa savedlabel .
@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Existing bootstrap code is unaffected.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -R -n da0s1 label_layout
 .Pp
-Display what the label would be for 
+Display what the label would be for
 .Pa da0s1
 using the partition layout in
 .Pa label_layout .
@@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ partition sizes.
 .Pp
 .Dl disklabel -B da0s1
 .Pp
-Install a new bootstrap on 
+Install a new bootstrap on
 .Pa da0s1 .
 The boot code comes from
 .Pa /boot/boot1
@@ -801,7 +801,7 @@ which could be used as a source file for
 # /dev/ad0s1c:
 type: ESDI
 disk: ad0s1
-label: 
+label:
 flags:
 bytes/sector: 512
 sectors/track: 63
@@ -815,16 +815,16 @@ trackskew: 0
 cylinderskew: 0
 headswitch: 0		# milliseconds
 track-to-track seek: 0	# milliseconds
-drivedata: 0 
+drivedata: 0
 
 8 partitions:
 #        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize bps/cpg]
   a:   400M        0    4.2BSD     4096 16384    75 	# (Cyl.    0 - 812*)
-  b:     1G        *      swap  
-  c:      *        *    unused  
-  e: 204800        *    4.2BSD  
-  f:     5g        *    4.2BSD  
-  g:      *        *    4.2BSD  
+  b:     1G        *      swap
+  c:      *        *    unused
+  e: 204800        *    4.2BSD
+  f:     5g        *    4.2BSD
+  g:      *        *    4.2BSD
 .Ed
 .Sh SEE ALSO
 .Xr ccd 4 ,
@@ -837,7 +837,7 @@ drivedata: 0
 The kernel device drivers will not allow the size of a disk partition
 to be decreased or the offset of a partition to be changed while it is open.
 Some device drivers create a label containing only a single large partition
-if a disk is unlabeled; thus, the label must be written to the 
+if a disk is unlabeled; thus, the label must be written to the
 .Dq a
 partition of the disk while it is open.  This sometimes requires the desired
 label to be set in two steps, the first one creating at least one other
diff --git a/sbin/dump/dump.8 b/sbin/dump/dump.8
index da013d8..e1b9f51 100644
--- a/sbin/dump/dump.8
+++ b/sbin/dump/dump.8
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ filesystem name,
 increment level
 and
 .Xr ctime 3
-format dump date. 
+format dump date.
 There may be only one entry per filesystem at each level.
 The
 .Pa dumpdates
diff --git a/sbin/dumpon/dumpon.8 b/sbin/dumpon/dumpon.8
index ab33336..011ec17 100644
--- a/sbin/dumpon/dumpon.8
+++ b/sbin/dumpon/dumpon.8
@@ -50,21 +50,21 @@
 is used to specify a device where the kernel can save a crash dump in
 the case of a panic.
 .Pp
-Calls to 
+Calls to
 .Nm
 normally occur from the system multi-user initialization file
 .Pa /etc/rc ,
 controlled by the
 .Dq dumpdev
-variable in the boot time configuration file 
+variable in the boot time configuration file
 .Pa /etc/rc.conf .
 .Pp
-The size of the specified dump device must be at least 64 KB greater the 
+The size of the specified dump device must be at least 64 KB greater the
 size of physical memory.
 .Pp
 The
 .Fl v
-flag causes 
+flag causes
 .Nm
 to be verbose about its activity.
 .Sh NOTES
@@ -79,13 +79,13 @@ and
 a device containing a filesystem,
 should be used as the dump device.
 .Pp
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 program operates by setting the
 .Xr sysctl 3
 MIB variable
 .Dq kern.dumpdev
-to the device number of the designated 
+to the device number of the designated
 .Ar special_file
 or to
 .Dv NODEV
diff --git a/sbin/fdisk/fdisk.8 b/sbin/fdisk/fdisk.8
index 0c98b7d..b6f1ad8 100644
--- a/sbin/fdisk/fdisk.8
+++ b/sbin/fdisk/fdisk.8
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ An example follows:
 
 	parameters to be used for BIOS calculations are:
 	cylinders=769 heads=15 sectors/track=33 (495 blks/cyl)
-		
+
 	Warning: BIOS sector numbering starts with sector 1
 	Information from DOS bootblock is:
 	The data for partition 1 is:
diff --git a/sbin/fdisk_pc98/fdisk.8 b/sbin/fdisk_pc98/fdisk.8
index 56fc6cf..0b80ea0 100644
--- a/sbin/fdisk_pc98/fdisk.8
+++ b/sbin/fdisk_pc98/fdisk.8
@@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ An example follows:
 	******* Working on device /dev/rda0 *******
 	parameters extracted from in-core disklabel are:
 	cylinders=33075 heads=8 sectors/track=32 (256 blks/cyl)
-	
+
 	parameters to be used for BIOS calculations are:
 	cylinders=33075 heads=8 sectors/track=32 (256 blks/cyl)
-	
+
 	Media sector size is 512
 	Warning: BIOS sector numbering starts with sector 1
 	Information from DOS bootblock is:
diff --git a/sbin/ffsinfo/ffsinfo.8 b/sbin/ffsinfo/ffsinfo.8
index a8c0d46..a2b5f83 100644
--- a/sbin/ffsinfo/ffsinfo.8
+++ b/sbin/ffsinfo/ffsinfo.8
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 .\" Copyright (c) 2000 Christoph Herrmann, Thomas-Henning von Kamptz
 .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
 .\" Christoph Herrmann and Thomas-Henning von Kamptz, Munich and Frankfurt.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 .\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
 .\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
 .\"    without specific prior written permission.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
 .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
 .Ar special | file
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Ffsinfo
-extends the 
+extends the
 .Xr dumpfs 8
 program.
 .Pp
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ will dump
 with all available information.
 .Sh BUGS
 Currently
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 can only dump unmounted file systems.
 Do not try dumping a mounted file system, your system may panic and you will
 not be able to use the file system any longer.
diff --git a/sbin/fsck/fsck.8 b/sbin/fsck/fsck.8
index 8de9f22..4244ad2 100644
--- a/sbin/fsck/fsck.8
+++ b/sbin/fsck/fsck.8
@@ -39,14 +39,14 @@
 .Op Fl dvplfyn
 .Op Fl B | F
 .Op Fl l Ar maxparallel
-.Op Fl t Ar fstype 
-.Op Fl T Ar fstype : Ns Ar fsoptions 
+.Op Fl t Ar fstype
+.Op Fl T Ar fstype : Ns Ar fsoptions
 .Op Ar special | node ...
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Nm
 command invokes filesystem-specific programs to check
-the special devices listed in the 
+the special devices listed in the
 .Xr fstab 5
 file or in the command line for consistency.
 .Pp
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Enter preen mode.
 In preen mode, only a restricted class of innocuous
 filesystem inconsistencies will be corrected.
 If unexpected inconsistencies caused by hardware or
-software failures are encounted, the check program 
+software failures are encounted, the check program
 will exit with a failure.
 See the manual pages for the individual check programs
 for a list of the sorts of failures that they correct
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Causes
 .Nm
 to assume yes
 as the answer to all operator questions.
-.It Fl T Ar fstype : Ns Ar fsoptions 
+.It Fl T Ar fstype : Ns Ar fsoptions
 List of comma separated file system specific options for the specified
 file system type, in the same format as
 .Xr mount 8 .
diff --git a/sbin/fsck_ffs/fsck_ffs.8 b/sbin/fsck_ffs/fsck_ffs.8
index 6a0aae1..2486b49 100644
--- a/sbin/fsck_ffs/fsck_ffs.8
+++ b/sbin/fsck_ffs/fsck_ffs.8
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Without the
 .Fl p
 option,
 .Nm
-audits and interactively repairs inconsistent conditions for filesystems. 
+audits and interactively repairs inconsistent conditions for filesystems.
 If the filesystem is inconsistent the operator is prompted for concurrence
 before each correction is attempted.
 It should be noted that some of the corrective actions which are not
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ or
 .Li no .
 If the operator does not have write permission on the filesystem
 .Nm
-will default to a 
+will default to a
 .Fl n
 action.
 .Pp
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ The filesystem is in the old (static table) format.
 The filesystem is in the new (dynamic table) format.
 .It 2
 The filesystem supports 32-bit uid's and gid's,
-short symbolic links are stored in the inode, 
+short symbolic links are stored in the inode,
 and directories have an added field showing the file type.
 .It 3
 If maxcontig is greater than one,
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ possible without user interaction.
 Conversion in preen mode is best used when all the filesystems
 are being converted at once.
 The format of a filesystem can be determined from the
-first line of output from 
+first line of output from
 .Xr dumpfs 8 .
 .It Fl f
 Force
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ In particular, systems that do not wish to have lost files accessible
 by all users on the system should use a more restrictive
 set of permissions such as 700.
 .It Fl n
-Assume a no response to all questions asked by 
+Assume a no response to all questions asked by
 .Nm
 except for
 .Ql CONTINUE? ,
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ do not open the filesystem for writing.
 .It Fl p
 Preen filesystems (see above).
 .It Fl y
-Assume a yes response to all questions asked by 
+Assume a yes response to all questions asked by
 .Nm ;
 this should be used with great caution as this is a free license
 to continue after essentially unlimited trouble has been encountered.
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Incorrect link counts.
 .It
 Size checks:
 .Bl -item -offset indent -compact
-.It 
+.It
 Directory size not a multiple of DIRBLKSIZ.
 .It
 Partially truncated file.
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Blocks not accounted for anywhere.
 .It
 Directory checks:
 .Bl -item -offset indent -compact
-.It 
+.It
 File pointing to unallocated inode.
 .It
 Inode number out of range.
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ or having the wrong inode number.
 .It
 Super Block checks:
 .Bl -item -offset indent -compact
-.It 
+.It
 More blocks for inodes than there are in the filesystem.
 .It
 Bad free block map format.
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Total free block and/or free inode count incorrect.
 .Pp
 Orphaned files and directories (allocated but unreferenced) are,
 with the operator's concurrence, reconnected by
-placing them in the 
+placing them in the
 .Pa lost+found
 directory.
 The name assigned is the inode number.
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ If there is insufficient space its size is increased.
 contains default list of filesystems to check.
 .El
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-The diagnostics produced by 
+The diagnostics produced by
 .Nm
 are fully enumerated and explained in Appendix A of
 .Rs
diff --git a/sbin/fsck_ifs/fsck_ifs.8 b/sbin/fsck_ifs/fsck_ifs.8
index 6cee3fc..23f7f09 100644
--- a/sbin/fsck_ifs/fsck_ifs.8
+++ b/sbin/fsck_ifs/fsck_ifs.8
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Without the
 .Fl p
 option,
 .Nm
-audits and interactively repairs inconsistent conditions for filesystems. 
+audits and interactively repairs inconsistent conditions for filesystems.
 If the filesystem is inconsistent the operator is prompted for concurrence
 before each correction is attempted.
 It should be noted that some of the corrective actions which are not
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ or
 .Li no .
 If the operator does not have write permission on the filesystem
 .Nm
-will default to a 
+will default to a
 .Fl n
 action.
 .Pp
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ The filesystem is in the old (static table) format.
 The filesystem is in the new (dynamic table) format.
 .It 2
 The filesystem supports 32-bit uid's and gid's,
-short symbolic links are stored in the inode, 
+short symbolic links are stored in the inode,
 and directories have an added field showing the file type.
 .It 3
 If maxcontig is greater than one,
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ possible without user interaction.
 Conversion in preen mode is best used when all the filesystems
 are being converted at once.
 The format of a filesystem can be determined from the
-first line of output from 
+first line of output from
 .Xr dumpfs 8 .
 .It Fl f
 Force
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ In particular, systems that do not wish to have lost files accessible
 by all users on the system should use a more restrictive
 set of permissions such as 700.
 .It Fl n
-Assume a no response to all questions asked by 
+Assume a no response to all questions asked by
 .Nm
 except for
 .Ql CONTINUE? ,
@@ -231,13 +231,13 @@ do not open the filesystem for writing.
 .It Fl p
 Preen filesystems (see above).
 .It Fl y
-Assume a yes response to all questions asked by 
+Assume a yes response to all questions asked by
 .Nm ;
 this should be used with great caution as this is a free license
 to continue after essentially unlimited trouble has been encountered.
 .El
 .Pp
-If no filesystems are given to 
+If no filesystems are given to
 .Nm
 then a default list of filesystems is read from
 the file
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Incorrect link counts.
 .It
 Size checks:
 .Bl -item -offset indent -compact
-.It 
+.It
 Directory size not a multiple of DIRBLKSIZ.
 .It
 Partially truncated file.
@@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Blocks not accounted for anywhere.
 .It
 Directory checks:
 .Bl -item -offset indent -compact
-.It 
+.It
 File pointing to unallocated inode.
 .It
 Inode number out of range.
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ or having the wrong inode number.
 .It
 Super Block checks:
 .Bl -item -offset indent -compact
-.It 
+.It
 More blocks for inodes than there are in the filesystem.
 .It
 Bad free block map format.
@@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Total free block and/or free inode count incorrect.
 .Pp
 Orphaned files and directories (allocated but unreferenced) are,
 with the operator's concurrence, reconnected by
-placing them in the 
+placing them in the
 .Pa lost+found
 directory.
 The name assigned is the inode number.
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ the raw device should always be used.
 contains default list of filesystems to check.
 .El
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-The diagnostics produced by 
+The diagnostics produced by
 .Nm
 are fully enumerated and explained in Appendix A of
 .Rs
diff --git a/sbin/fsdb/fsdb.8 b/sbin/fsdb/fsdb.8
index 1e4ef60..e5fdd7f 100644
--- a/sbin/fsdb/fsdb.8
+++ b/sbin/fsdb/fsdb.8
@@ -37,12 +37,12 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm
 .Op Fl d
-.Op Fl f 
+.Op Fl f
 .Op Fl r
 .Ar fsname
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Fsdb
-opens 
+opens
 .Ar fsname
 (usually a raw disk partition) and runs a command loop
 allowing manipulation of the file system's inode data.  You are prompted
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Open the filesystem read/only, and disables all commands that would
 write to it.
 .El
 .Sh COMMANDS
-Besides the built-in 
+Besides the built-in
 .Xr editline 3
 commands,
 .Nm
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ as the new current inode.
 Revert to the previously current inode.
 .Pp
 .It Cm clri Ar i-number
-Clear 
+Clear
 .Ar i-number .
 .Pp
 .It Cm lookup Ar name
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Set the active inode's link count to
 .Pp
 .It Cm ls
 List the current inode's directory entries.  This command is valid only
-if the current inode is a directory. 
+if the current inode is a directory.
 .Pp
 .It Cm rm Ar name
 .It Cm del Ar name
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Change the generation number of the current inode to
 .It Cm ctime Ar time
 .It Cm atime Ar time
 Change the modification, change, or access time (respectively) on the
-current inode to 
+current inode to
 .Ar time .
 .Ar Time
 should be in the format
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ is an optional nanosecond specification.  If no nanoseconds are specified, the
 .Va mtimensec ,
 .Va ctimensec ,
 or
-.Va atimensec 
+.Va atimensec
 field will be set to zero.
 .Pp
 .It Cm quit , q , exit , Em <EOF>
@@ -239,4 +239,4 @@ ported it to
 Use this tool with extreme caution--you can damage an FFS file system
 beyond what
 .Xr fsck 8
-can repair. 
+can repair.
diff --git a/sbin/growfs/growfs.8 b/sbin/growfs/growfs.8
index fc527aa..5651324 100644
--- a/sbin/growfs/growfs.8
+++ b/sbin/growfs/growfs.8
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 .\" Copyright (c) 2000 Christoph Herrmann, Thomas-Henning von Kamptz
 .\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
 .\" Christoph Herrmann and Thomas-Henning von Kamptz, Munich and Frankfurt.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
 .\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
 .\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
 .\"    without specific prior written permission.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
 .\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
@@ -50,19 +50,19 @@
 .Ar special
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm
-extends the 
+extends the
 .Xr newfs 8
 program.
-Before running 
+Before running
 .Nm
-the disk must be labeled to a bigger size using 
+the disk must be labeled to a bigger size using
 .Xr disklabel 8 .
-If you are using volumes you must grow them using 
+If you are using volumes you must grow them using
 .Xr vinum 8 .
 .Nm
 extends the size of the file system on the specified special file.
 Currently
-.Nm 
+.Nm
 can only grow unmounted file systems.
 Do not try growing a mounted file system, your system may panic and you will
 not be able to use the file system any longer.
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Most of the options you have used with
 .Xr newfs 8
 once can not be changed.
 In fact you can only increase the size of the file system.
-Use 
+Use
 .Xr tunefs 8
 for other changes.
 .Pp
@@ -81,11 +81,11 @@ Cause the new file system parameters to be printed out without actually growing
 the file system.
 .It Fl y
 .Dq Expert mode .
-Normally 
-.Nm 
+Normally
+.Nm
 will ask you, if you took a backup of your data before and will do some tests
-if 
-.Ar special 
+if
+.Ar special
 is currently mounted or if there are any active snapshots on the filesystem
 specified.
 This will be suppressed.
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ The
 .Ar size
 of the file system after growing in sectors.
 This value defaults to the size of the raw partition specified in
-.Ar special 
+.Ar special
 (in other words,
 .Nm
 will grow the file system to the size of the entire partition).
@@ -105,15 +105,15 @@ will grow the file system to the size of the entire partition).
 .Pp
 will grow
 .Pa /dev/vinum/testvol
-up to 2GB if there is enough space in 
+up to 2GB if there is enough space in
 .Pa /dev/vinum/testvol .
 .Sh BUGS
 In some cases on
 .Fx
 3.x it is possible, that
 .Nm
-did not recognize exactly, if the file system is mounted or not and 
-exits with an error message, then use 
+did not recognize exactly, if the file system is mounted or not and
+exits with an error message, then use
 .Nm
 .Fl y
 if you are sure, that the file system is not mounted.
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ every 2 GB of total filesystem size.
 .Xr ffsinfo 8 ,
 .Xr fsck 8 ,
 .Xr newfs 8 ,
-.Xr tunefs 8 , 
+.Xr tunefs 8 ,
 .Xr vinum 8
 .Sh AUTHORS
 .An Christoph Herrmann Aq chm@FreeBSD.org
diff --git a/sbin/i386/cxconfig/cxconfig.8 b/sbin/i386/cxconfig/cxconfig.8
index a6701fe..40ebf79 100644
--- a/sbin/i386/cxconfig/cxconfig.8
+++ b/sbin/i386/cxconfig/cxconfig.8
@@ -10,17 +10,17 @@
 .Op Fl a
 .Op Ar <channel> Op Ar <option>...
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .Nm
 utility is used for configuring the channel options of
 the Cronyx-Sigma adapter.
 .Pp
 To change channel options the channel should be free: the corresponding
-network interface in ``down'' state, the asynchronous terminal device 
+network interface in ``down'' state, the asynchronous terminal device
 .Pa /dev/tty*
 closed.
 Generally, the channel options are set up during the operating
-system startup, for example from the 
+system startup, for example from the
 .Pa /etc/rc
 file.
 .Pp
@@ -76,15 +76,15 @@ Set the zero channel hardware interface type.
 .Bl -tag -width 10n
 .It "nrz, nrzi, manchester"
 Set the data line signal encoding.
-In the case of 
+In the case of
 .Em NRZ
 encoding the zero bit is transmitted by the zero signal
 level, the one bit - by the positive signal level.
-In the case of 
+In the case of
 .Em NRZI
 encoding the zero bit is transmitted by the change of
 the signal level, the one bit - by the constant signal level.
-In the case of 
+In the case of
 .Em Manchester
 encoding the zero bit is encoded as 01 value,
 the one bit - as 10 value.
@@ -96,9 +96,9 @@ is derived from the received data.
 Set the local loopback mode.
 .It "+extclock, -extclock"
 Set the timing clock source of synchronous channels.  There are
-two possible variants: 
+two possible variants:
 .Em "external clock"
-source or 
+source or
 .Em "internal clock"
 generation.
 .Pp
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ external modem hardware.  In this mode the external timing
 signal is received on TXCIN pin of the connector, and it is
 used as a synchronization clock for transmitting data (TXD).
 .Pp
-In the case of 
+In the case of
 .Em "internal clock"
 mode the transmitted data (TXD)
 are synchronized using the internal on-board timing generator,
diff --git a/sbin/i386/fdisk/fdisk.8 b/sbin/i386/fdisk/fdisk.8
index 0c98b7d..b6f1ad8 100644
--- a/sbin/i386/fdisk/fdisk.8
+++ b/sbin/i386/fdisk/fdisk.8
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ An example follows:
 
 	parameters to be used for BIOS calculations are:
 	cylinders=769 heads=15 sectors/track=33 (495 blks/cyl)
-		
+
 	Warning: BIOS sector numbering starts with sector 1
 	Information from DOS bootblock is:
 	The data for partition 1 is:
diff --git a/sbin/i386/nextboot/nextboot.8 b/sbin/i386/nextboot/nextboot.8
index 192eb31..b57c4b0 100644
--- a/sbin/i386/nextboot/nextboot.8
+++ b/sbin/i386/nextboot/nextboot.8
@@ -20,14 +20,14 @@ program
 .Nm
 controls the actions of the boot blocks at the time of the next boot.
 If compiled with the correct option,
-the boot blocks will check the nameblock for a magic number and a 
+the boot blocks will check the nameblock for a magic number and a
 default name to use for booting.
-If compiled to do so they will also 
+If compiled to do so they will also
 delete the name from the block, ensuring that if the boot should fail,
 then it will not be tried again.
 It is the job of
 .Pa /etc/rc
-to use 
+to use
 .Nm
 to re-install the string if that boot is found to have succeeded.
 This allows a one-time only boot string to be used for such applications
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ The following options are available:
 .It Fl b
 Is used for bootstrapping (initially configuring) the nameblock.
 Without
-this, 
+this,
 .Nm
 will refuse to write to a block that does not already contain the magic
 number.
@@ -59,13 +59,13 @@ and
 flags are mutually exclusive.
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Nextboot
-first checks that the disk has an fdisk table and checks that none of the 
+first checks that the disk has an fdisk table and checks that none of the
 partitions defined in that table include the nameblock.
-If the name block is 
+If the name block is
 shown to be unused, it will install the bootstrings given as arguments,
 one after the other, each preceded by a small magic number, and NULL
 terminated.
-The end of the list of strings is delimited by a sequence of 
+The end of the list of strings is delimited by a sequence of
 0xff bytes.
 If the boot blocks are compiled to write back the nameblock
 after each boot, it will zero out the supplied names as it uses them,
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ An example of usage might be:
 .Pp
 Which would instruct the boot blocks at the next boot,
 to try boot the experimental kernel off the SCSI disk.
-If for any reason this failed, the next boot attempt would 
+If for any reason this failed, the next boot attempt would
 boot the kernel
 .Pa /kernel.old
 off the IDE drive.  (Assuming the write-back option were enabled) If this
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ to change the default boot string.
 Note, that should the file specified in
 the nameblock be non-existent, then the name compiled into the boot blocks
 will be used for the boot rather than the next name in the nameblock.
-The 
+The
 nameblock is only consulted
 .Em once
 per boot.
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ This program works only in conjunction with the legacy boot code.
 The entire program should be made more user-friendly.
 The option of whether to write back or not should be stored on the
 disk and not a compile time option.
-I want to rethink this at some 
+I want to rethink this at some
 later stage to make it co-exist with disks that do not have
 a fdisk partitioning table (i.e. purely disklabel'd systems).
 .Pp
diff --git a/sbin/init/init.8 b/sbin/init/init.8
index d50133c..ce4e10a 100644
--- a/sbin/init/init.8
+++ b/sbin/init/init.8
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ then
 .Nm
 will require that the super-user password be
 entered before the system will start a single-user shell.
-The password check is skipped if the 
+The password check is skipped if the
 .Em console
 is marked as
 .Dq secure .
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ This is the default initial value.
 Insecure mode \- immutable and append-only flags may be turned off.
 All devices may be read or written subject to their permissions.
 .It Ic 1
-Secure mode \- the system immutable and system append-only flags may not 
+Secure mode \- the system immutable and system append-only flags may not
 be turned off;
 disks for mounted filesystems,
 .Pa /dev/mem ,
@@ -150,11 +150,11 @@ it can be set before going multi-user, e.g., by the startup script
 .Xr rc 8 ,
 using
 .Xr sysctl 8
-to set the 
+to set the
 .Dq kern.securelevel
 variable to the required security level.
 .Pp
-In multi-user operation, 
+In multi-user operation,
 .Nm
 maintains
 processes for the terminal ports found in the file
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ file and are now on,
 executes the command specified in the second field.
 If the command or window field for a line is changed,
 the change takes effect at the end of the current
-login session (e.g., the next time 
+login session (e.g., the next time
 .Nm
 starts a process on the line).
 If a line is commented out or deleted from
@@ -389,10 +389,10 @@ Systems without
 .Xr sysctl
 behave as though they have security level \-1.
 .Pp
-Setting the security level above 1 too early in the boot sequence can 
-prevent 
-.Xr fsck 8 
-from repairing inconsistent filesystems.  The 
-preferred location to set the security level is at the end of 
-.Pa /etc/rc 
+Setting the security level above 1 too early in the boot sequence can
+prevent
+.Xr fsck 8
+from repairing inconsistent filesystems.  The
+preferred location to set the security level is at the end of
+.Pa /etc/rc
 after all multi-user startup actions are complete.
diff --git a/sbin/kget/kget.8 b/sbin/kget/kget.8
index c40cdca..ae79e65 100644
--- a/sbin/kget/kget.8
+++ b/sbin/kget/kget.8
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Usage:
 .Nm
 .Ar filename
 .Pp
-where 
+where
 .Ar filename
 is either a regular file (which is overwritten) or -, indicating that
 standard output should be used.
diff --git a/sbin/md5/md5.1 b/sbin/md5/md5.1
index 49f1347..50bd126 100644
--- a/sbin/md5/md5.1
+++ b/sbin/md5/md5.1
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Quiet mode - only the MD5 sum is printed out.  Overrides the
 option.
 .It Fl r
 Reverses the format of the output.  This helps with visual diffs.  Does nothing
-when combined with the 
+when combined with the
 .Fl ptx
 options.
 .It Fl t
diff --git a/sbin/mdconfig/mdconfig.8 b/sbin/mdconfig/mdconfig.8
index 08c0597..6ed7e8a 100644
--- a/sbin/mdconfig/mdconfig.8
+++ b/sbin/mdconfig/mdconfig.8
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm
 .Fl a
-.Fl t Ar type 
+.Fl t Ar type
 .Oo
 .Fl o
 .Oo Cm no Oc Ns Ar option
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Nm
-command configures and enables 
+command configures and enables
 .Xr md 4
 devices.
 .Pp
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ This will configure and attach a memory disk with the
 parameters specified and attach it to the system.
 .It Fl d
 Detach a memory disk from the system and release all resources.
-.It Fl t Ar type 
+.It Fl t Ar type
 Select the type of the memory disk.
 .Bl -tag -width "preload"
 .It Cm malloc
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Storage for this type of memory disk is allocated with
 .Xr malloc 9 .
 This limits the size to the malloc bucket limit in the kernel.
 .It Cm vnode
-A file specified with 
+A file specified with
 .Fl f Ar file
 becomes the backingstore for this memory disk.
 .It Cm swap
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ first appeared in
 .Fx 5.0
 as a cleaner replacement for the
 .Xr vn 4
-and 
+and
 .Xr vnconfig 8
 combo.
 .Sh AUTHORS
diff --git a/sbin/mknod/mknod.8 b/sbin/mknod/mknod.8
index 71b5606..ade5fc7 100644
--- a/sbin/mknod/mknod.8
+++ b/sbin/mknod/mknod.8
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ user name.
 The
 .Ar group
 may be either a numeric group ID or a group name.
-Similar to the user name, 
+Similar to the user name,
 if a group name is also a numeric group ID, the operand is used as a
 group name.
 .El
diff --git a/sbin/mount_nfs/mount_nfs.8 b/sbin/mount_nfs/mount_nfs.8
index 9e467a3..97600b5 100644
--- a/sbin/mount_nfs/mount_nfs.8
+++ b/sbin/mount_nfs/mount_nfs.8
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ compatibility with historic versions of
 Same as
 .Fl b .
 .It conn
-Same as not specifying 
+Same as not specifying
 .Fl c .
 .It dumbtimer
 Same as
diff --git a/sbin/mount_ntfs/mount_ntfs.8 b/sbin/mount_ntfs/mount_ntfs.8
index ca2d601..265e966 100644
--- a/sbin/mount_ntfs/mount_ntfs.8
+++ b/sbin/mount_ntfs/mount_ntfs.8
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ contains the file system).
 The options are as follows:
 .Bl -tag -width Ds
 .It Fl a
-Force behaviour to return MS-DOS 8.3 names also on 
+Force behaviour to return MS-DOS 8.3 names also on
 .Fn readdir .
 .It Fl i
 Make name lookup case insensitive for all names except POSIX names.
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Default is $DATA.
 is an attribute name.
 Default is none.
 .Sh EXAMPLES
-To mount an ntfs volume located in 
+To mount an ntfs volume located in
 .Pa /dev/ad1s1 :
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
 # mount_ntfs /dev/ad1s1 /mnt
diff --git a/sbin/mount_nullfs/mount_nullfs.8 b/sbin/mount_nullfs/mount_nullfs.8
index b0ff132..c94cd0f 100644
--- a/sbin/mount_nullfs/mount_nullfs.8
+++ b/sbin/mount_nullfs/mount_nullfs.8
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ The
 .Nm
 filesystem differs from a traditional
 loopback file system in two respects: it is implemented using
-a stackable layers techniques, and it's 
+a stackable layers techniques, and it's
 .Do null-node Dc Ns s
 stack above
 all lower-layer vnodes, not just over directory vnodes.
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ for constructing new layers.
 .\"
 .\"
 .Sh INSTANTIATING NEW NULL LAYERS
-New null layers are created with 
+New null layers are created with
 .Nm .
 .Nm Mount_nullfs
 takes two arguments, the pathname
@@ -126,8 +126,8 @@ on the lower layer.  Finally, it replaces the null-nodes
 in the arguments and, if a vnode is returned by the operation,
 stacks a null-node on top of the returned vnode.
 .Pp
-Although bypass handles most operations, 
-.Em vop_getattr , 
+Although bypass handles most operations,
+.Em vop_getattr ,
 .Em vop_inactive ,
 .Em vop_reclaim ,
 and
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ are created as a result of vnode operations on
 this or other null vnode stacks.
 .Pp
 New vnode stacks come into existence as a result of
-an operation which returns a vnode.  
+an operation which returns a vnode.
 The bypass routine stacks a null-node above the new
 vnode before returning it to the caller.
 .Pp
@@ -164,24 +164,24 @@ For example, imagine mounting a null layer with
 .Bd -literal -offset indent
 mount_nullfs /usr/include /dev/layer/null
 .Ed
-Changing directory to 
+Changing directory to
 .Pa /dev/layer/null
 will assign
 the root null-node (which was created when the null layer was mounted).
-Now consider opening 
+Now consider opening
 .Pa sys .
 A vop_lookup would be
 done on the root null-node.  This operation would bypass through
-to the lower layer which would return a vnode representing 
-the UFS 
+to the lower layer which would return a vnode representing
+the UFS
 .Pa sys .
 Null_bypass then builds a null-node
-aliasing the UFS 
+aliasing the UFS
 .Pa sys
 and returns this to the caller.
-Later operations on the null-node 
+Later operations on the null-node
 .Pa sys
-will repeat this 
+will repeat this
 process when constructing other vnode stacks.
 .\"
 .\"
@@ -193,12 +193,12 @@ then begin modifying the copy.
 can be used to easily rename
 all variables.
 .Pp
-The umap layer is an example of a layer descended from the 
+The umap layer is an example of a layer descended from the
 null layer.
 .\"
 .\"
 .Sh INVOKING OPERATIONS ON LOWER LAYERS
-There are two techniques to invoke operations on a lower layer 
+There are two techniques to invoke operations on a lower layer
 when the operation cannot be completely bypassed.  Each method
 is appropriate in different situations.  In both cases,
 it is the responsibility of the aliasing layer to make
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ This method is most suitable when you wish to invoke the operation
 currently being handled on the lower layer.
 It has the advantage that
 the bypass routine already must do argument mapping.
-An example of this is 
+An example of this is
 .Em null_getattrs
 in the null layer.
 .Pp
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ is that vnode arguments must be manually mapped.
 UCLA Technical Report CSD-910056,
 .Em "Stackable Layers: an Architecture for File System Development" .
 .Sh BUGS
-THIS FILESYSTEM TYPE IS NOT YET FULLY SUPPORTED (READ: IT DOESN'T WORK) 
+THIS FILESYSTEM TYPE IS NOT YET FULLY SUPPORTED (READ: IT DOESN'T WORK)
 AND USING IT MAY, IN FACT, DESTROY DATA ON YOUR SYSTEM.  USE AT YOUR
 OWN RISK.  BEWARE OF DOG.  SLIPPERY WHEN WET.
 .Pp
diff --git a/sbin/mount_nwfs/mount_nwfs.8 b/sbin/mount_nwfs/mount_nwfs.8
index 5d31ce1..fa1855b 100644
--- a/sbin/mount_nwfs/mount_nwfs.8
+++ b/sbin/mount_nwfs/mount_nwfs.8
@@ -41,14 +41,14 @@ possible to create connection without any mounts (but use it for them) with
 .Pp
 Note two forms of command line.
 In the first form, server and user specified
-via 
+via
 .Fl S
 and
 .Fl U
 options respectively.
 In the second form server and user specified in
 .Ar special
-part of 
+part of
 .Xr mount 8
 command line arguments (the
 .Fl S ,
@@ -84,22 +84,22 @@ before
 Path to mount volume.
 .It Fl c Ar case
 Select a
-.Ar case 
+.Ar case
 option which affects on name representation.
-.Ar Case 
+.Ar Case
 can be one of the following:
 .Bl -tag -width "ValueXX"
 .It Em Value
 .Em Meaning
 .It l
-All existing file names converted to lower case. 
+All existing file names converted to lower case.
 Newly created file gets a lower case under OS2 name space.
 This is the default when mounting volumes with DOS name space.
 .It L
 Same as 'l' but file system tries to be case insensitive.
 May not work well.
 .It n
-No case conversion is performed. 
+No case conversion is performed.
 .Em Warning !
 Use this option with DOS name space only as a last resort,
 because creating a lower case name in the DOS name space
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ is taken from mount point, default value for the dir mode adds execute
 permission where the file mode gives read permission.
 .Pp
 Note that these permissions can differ from the rights granted by NetWare
-server. 
+server.
 .It Fl n Ar namespace
 Don't use
 .Ar namespace .
@@ -141,21 +141,21 @@ tries to use an environment variable
 .Ev LC_* .
 .It Fl w Ar scheme
 Select a
-.Ar scheme 
+.Ar scheme
 used to convert file names between NetWare and
 .Fx .
-Currently only 
-.Ar koi2cp866 
-and 
-.Ar asis 
+Currently only
+.Ar koi2cp866
+and
+.Ar asis
 can be here.
-Please note, that scheme should be enabled at compile 
+Please note, that scheme should be enabled at compile
 time in
 .Pa config.mk
 file.
 .It Fl M Ar mode
-See 
-.Xr ncplogin 1 
+See
+.Xr ncplogin 1
 for details.
 If this option is omitted, connection permissions
 assumed the same as directory mode
diff --git a/sbin/mount_std/mount_std.8 b/sbin/mount_std/mount_std.8
index 34c793a..28fed28 100644
--- a/sbin/mount_std/mount_std.8
+++ b/sbin/mount_std/mount_std.8
@@ -58,12 +58,12 @@ The
 .Nm
 command is a generic mechanism for attaching ``standard'' filesystems to
 the filesystem.  The
-.Nm 
-command currently supports the following filesystems: 
-.Nm devfs , 
+.Nm
+command currently supports the following filesystems:
+.Nm devfs ,
 .Nm fdescfs ,
-.Nm linprocfs 
-and 
+.Nm linprocfs
+and
 .Nm procfs .
 A ``standard'' filesystem is one which:
 .Bl -enum -offset indent
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Refer to the following manual pages for detailed information
 on these file system:
 .Xr devfs 5 ,
 .Xr fdescfs 5 ,
-.Xr linprocfs 5 
+.Xr linprocfs 5
 and
 .Xr procfs 5 .
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
diff --git a/sbin/mount_umapfs/mount_umapfs.8 b/sbin/mount_umapfs/mount_umapfs.8
index c40f0a0..5524c2e 100644
--- a/sbin/mount_umapfs/mount_umapfs.8
+++ b/sbin/mount_umapfs/mount_umapfs.8
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ uid 2000 in the local environment.  The
 .Nm
 command allows the subtree from smith's original environment to be
 mapped in such a way that all files with owning uid 1000 look like
-they are actually owned by uid 2000.  
+they are actually owned by uid 2000.
 .Pp
 The options are as follows:
 .Bl -tag -width indent
@@ -79,37 +79,37 @@ flag followed by a comma separated string of options.
 See the
 .Xr mount 8
 man page for possible options and their meanings.
-.It Ar target 
+.It Ar target
 Should be the current location of the sub-tree in the
-local system's name space.  
-.It Ar mount-point 
+local system's name space.
+.It Ar mount-point
 Should be a directory
-where the mapped subtree is to be placed.  
-.It Fl u Ar uid-mapfile 
-.It Fl g Ar gid-mapfile 
+where the mapped subtree is to be placed.
+.It Fl u Ar uid-mapfile
+.It Fl g Ar gid-mapfile
 Describe the mappings to be made between identifiers.
 Briefly, the format of these files is a count of the number of
 mappings on the first line, with each subsequent line containing
 a single mapping.  Each of these mappings consists of an id in
 the local environment and the corresponding id from the original environment,
-separated by white space.  
-.Ar Uid-mapfile 
+separated by white space.
+.Ar Uid-mapfile
 should contain all uid
-mappings, and 
-.Ar gid-mapfile 
+mappings, and
+.Ar gid-mapfile
 should contain all gid mappings.
-Any uids not mapped in 
-.Ar uid-mapfile 
+Any uids not mapped in
+.Ar uid-mapfile
 will be treated as user NOBODY,
-and any gids not mapped in 
-.Ar gid-mapfile 
+and any gids not mapped in
+.Ar gid-mapfile
 will be treated as group
 NULLGROUP.  At most 64 uids can be mapped for a given subtree, and
 at most 16 groups can be mapped by a given subtree.
 .El
 .Pp
 The mapfiles can be located anywhere in the file hierarchy, but they
-must be owned by root, and they must be writable only by root.  
+must be owned by root, and they must be writable only by root.
 .Nm Mount_umapfs
 will refuse to map the sub-tree if the ownership or permissions on
 these files are improper.  It will also balk if the count of mappings
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ sophisticated.
 .Xr mount 8 ,
 .Xr mount_nullfs 8
 .Sh BUGS
-THIS FILESYSTEM TYPE IS NOT YET FULLY SUPPORTED (READ: IT DOESN'T WORK) 
+THIS FILESYSTEM TYPE IS NOT YET FULLY SUPPORTED (READ: IT DOESN'T WORK)
 AND USING IT MAY, IN FACT, DESTROY DATA ON YOUR SYSTEM.  USE AT YOUR
 OWN RISK.  BEWARE OF DOG.  SLIPPERY WHEN WET.
 .Pp
diff --git a/sbin/mount_unionfs/mount_unionfs.8 b/sbin/mount_unionfs/mount_unionfs.8
index b9c7b19..2bd06ad 100644
--- a/sbin/mount_unionfs/mount_unionfs.8
+++ b/sbin/mount_unionfs/mount_unionfs.8
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (c) 1994
 .\" The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" This code is derived from software donated to Berkeley by
 .\" Jan-Simon Pendry.
 .\"
diff --git a/sbin/mountd/netgroup.5 b/sbin/mountd/netgroup.5
index 919f1fe..ba58b2c 100644
--- a/sbin/mountd/netgroup.5
+++ b/sbin/mountd/netgroup.5
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ similar platforms.)
 .It
 If the
 .Pa /etc/netgroup
-exists and contains only local 
+exists and contains only local
 .Nm
 information (with no
 .Tn NIS
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ The interpretation of access restrictions based on the member tuples of a
 netgroup is left up to the various network applications.
 Also, it is not obvious how the domain specification
 applies to the
-.Bx 
+.Bx
 environment.
 .Pp
 The
diff --git a/sbin/newfs/newfs.8 b/sbin/newfs/newfs.8
index b17a74a..687d22e 100644
--- a/sbin/newfs/newfs.8
+++ b/sbin/newfs/newfs.8
@@ -68,9 +68,9 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Newfs
 is used to initialize and clear filesystems before first use.
-Before running 
+Before running
 .Nm
-the disk must be labeled using 
+the disk must be labeled using
 .Xr disklabel 8 .
 .Nm Newfs
 builds a file system on the specified special file.
@@ -157,8 +157,8 @@ specifies the average file size on the file system.
 .It Fl m Ar free space \&%
 The percentage of space reserved from normal users; the minimum free
 space threshold.
-The default value used is 
-defined by 
+The default value used is
+defined by
 .Dv MINFREE
 from
 .Aq Pa ufs/ffs/fs.h ,
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ for more details on how to set this option.
 .It Fl s Ar size
 The size of the file system in sectors.  This value defaults to the size of the
 raw partition specified in
-.Ar special 
+.Ar special
 (in other words,
 .Nm
 will use the entire partition for the file system).
@@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ This option is useful for synthetic disks such as
 .Nm vinum .
 .El
 .Pp
-The following options override the standard sizes for the disk geometry. 
+The following options override the standard sizes for the disk geometry.
 Their default values are taken from the disk label.
 Changing these defaults is useful only when using
 .Nm
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ to build a file system whose raw image will eventually be used on a
 different type of disk than the one on which it is initially created
 (for example on a write-once disk).
 Note that changing any of these values from their defaults will make
-it impossible for 
+it impossible for
 .Xr fsck 8
 to find the alternate superblocks if the standard superblock is lost.
 .Bl -tag -width indent
diff --git a/sbin/nextboot/nextboot.8 b/sbin/nextboot/nextboot.8
index 192eb31..b57c4b0 100644
--- a/sbin/nextboot/nextboot.8
+++ b/sbin/nextboot/nextboot.8
@@ -20,14 +20,14 @@ program
 .Nm
 controls the actions of the boot blocks at the time of the next boot.
 If compiled with the correct option,
-the boot blocks will check the nameblock for a magic number and a 
+the boot blocks will check the nameblock for a magic number and a
 default name to use for booting.
-If compiled to do so they will also 
+If compiled to do so they will also
 delete the name from the block, ensuring that if the boot should fail,
 then it will not be tried again.
 It is the job of
 .Pa /etc/rc
-to use 
+to use
 .Nm
 to re-install the string if that boot is found to have succeeded.
 This allows a one-time only boot string to be used for such applications
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ The following options are available:
 .It Fl b
 Is used for bootstrapping (initially configuring) the nameblock.
 Without
-this, 
+this,
 .Nm
 will refuse to write to a block that does not already contain the magic
 number.
@@ -59,13 +59,13 @@ and
 flags are mutually exclusive.
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Nextboot
-first checks that the disk has an fdisk table and checks that none of the 
+first checks that the disk has an fdisk table and checks that none of the
 partitions defined in that table include the nameblock.
-If the name block is 
+If the name block is
 shown to be unused, it will install the bootstrings given as arguments,
 one after the other, each preceded by a small magic number, and NULL
 terminated.
-The end of the list of strings is delimited by a sequence of 
+The end of the list of strings is delimited by a sequence of
 0xff bytes.
 If the boot blocks are compiled to write back the nameblock
 after each boot, it will zero out the supplied names as it uses them,
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ An example of usage might be:
 .Pp
 Which would instruct the boot blocks at the next boot,
 to try boot the experimental kernel off the SCSI disk.
-If for any reason this failed, the next boot attempt would 
+If for any reason this failed, the next boot attempt would
 boot the kernel
 .Pa /kernel.old
 off the IDE drive.  (Assuming the write-back option were enabled) If this
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ to change the default boot string.
 Note, that should the file specified in
 the nameblock be non-existent, then the name compiled into the boot blocks
 will be used for the boot rather than the next name in the nameblock.
-The 
+The
 nameblock is only consulted
 .Em once
 per boot.
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ This program works only in conjunction with the legacy boot code.
 The entire program should be made more user-friendly.
 The option of whether to write back or not should be stored on the
 disk and not a compile time option.
-I want to rethink this at some 
+I want to rethink this at some
 later stage to make it co-exist with disks that do not have
 a fdisk partitioning table (i.e. purely disklabel'd systems).
 .Pp
diff --git a/sbin/nfsd/nfsd.8 b/sbin/nfsd/nfsd.8
index 544756a..c62b7d8 100644
--- a/sbin/nfsd/nfsd.8
+++ b/sbin/nfsd/nfsd.8
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Serve
 clients.
 .El
 .Pp
-For example, 
+For example,
 .Dq Li "nfsd -u -t -n 6"
 serves
 .Tn UDP
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ RFC1094 and
 .Pp
 If
 .Nm
-detects that 
+detects that
 .Tn NFS
 is not loaded in the running kernel, it will attempt
 to load a loadable kernel module containing
diff --git a/sbin/nologin/nologin.5 b/sbin/nologin/nologin.5
index d293277..9d63c88 100644
--- a/sbin/nologin/nologin.5
+++ b/sbin/nologin/nologin.5
@@ -39,11 +39,11 @@
 .Nm nologin
 .Nd disallow logins
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-Programs such as 
+Programs such as
 .Xr login 1
-disallow logins if the file 
+disallow logins if the file
 .Pa /var/run/nologin
-exists. 
+exists.
 Programs display the contents of
 .Pa /var/run/nologin
 to the user and exit.
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ To disable logins on a per-account basis,
 investigate
 .Xr nologin 8 .
 .Sh SECURITY
-Ignored by 
+Ignored by
 .Xr login 1
 for user root.
 .Sh FILES
diff --git a/sbin/nologin/nologin.8 b/sbin/nologin/nologin.8
index 9a384f1..8903fa0 100644
--- a/sbin/nologin/nologin.8
+++ b/sbin/nologin/nologin.8
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm nologin
-.Nd politely refuse a login 
+.Nd politely refuse a login
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
diff --git a/sbin/nos-tun/nos-tun.8 b/sbin/nos-tun/nos-tun.8
index c0f15ec..e9509d9 100644
--- a/sbin/nos-tun/nos-tun.8
+++ b/sbin/nos-tun/nos-tun.8
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 .\" "THE BEER-WARE LICENSE" (Revision 42):
 .\" <phk@FreeBSD.org> wrote this file.  As long as you retain this notice you
 .\" can do whatever you want with this stuff. If we meet some day, and you think
 .\" this stuff is worth it, you can buy me a beer in return.   Poul-Henning Kamp
 .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
-.\" 
+.\"
 .Dd April 11, 1998
 .Dt NOS-TUN 8
 .Os
diff --git a/sbin/pc98/fdisk/fdisk.8 b/sbin/pc98/fdisk/fdisk.8
index 56fc6cf..0b80ea0 100644
--- a/sbin/pc98/fdisk/fdisk.8
+++ b/sbin/pc98/fdisk/fdisk.8
@@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ An example follows:
 	******* Working on device /dev/rda0 *******
 	parameters extracted from in-core disklabel are:
 	cylinders=33075 heads=8 sectors/track=32 (256 blks/cyl)
-	
+
 	parameters to be used for BIOS calculations are:
 	cylinders=33075 heads=8 sectors/track=32 (256 blks/cyl)
-	
+
 	Media sector size is 512
 	Warning: BIOS sector numbering starts with sector 1
 	Information from DOS bootblock is:
diff --git a/sbin/ping/ping.8 b/sbin/ping/ping.8
index 8173ae4..c95f231 100644
--- a/sbin/ping/ping.8
+++ b/sbin/ping/ping.8
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Outputs packets as fast as they come back or one hundred times per second,
 whichever is more.
 For every
 .Tn ECHO_REQUEST
-sent a period 
+sent a period
 .Dq .\&
 is printed, while for every
 .Tn ECHO_REPLY
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ flag was required to display such errors, but
 displays all ICMP error messages.  On a busy machine, this output can
 be overbearing.  Without the
 .Fl Q
-flag, 
+flag,
 .Nm
 prints out any ICMP error messages caused by its own ECHO_REQUEST
 messages.
@@ -213,13 +213,13 @@ Bypass the normal routing tables and send directly to a host on an attached
 network.
 If the host is not on a directly-attached network, an error is returned.
 This option can be used to ping a local host through an interface
-that has no route through it 
+that has no route through it
 .Po
 e.g., after the interface was dropped by
 .Xr routed 8
 .Pc .
 .It Fl s Ar packetsize
-Specify the number of data bytes to be sent.  
+Specify the number of data bytes to be sent.
 The default is 56, which translates into 64
 .Tn ICMP
 data bytes when combined
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ When using
 .Nm
 for fault isolation, it should first be run on the local host, to verify
 that the local network interface is up and running.
-Then, hosts and gateways further and further away should be 
+Then, hosts and gateways further and further away should be
 .Dq pinged .
 Round-trip times and packet loss statistics are computed.
 If duplicate packets are received, they are not included in the packet
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ the
 field of
 .Tn ICMP ECHO_REQUEST
 packets to 255.
-This is why you will find you can 
+This is why you will find you can
 .Dq ping
 some hosts, but not reach them with
 .Xr telnet 1
@@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ In this case the
 value in the received packet will be 255 minus the
 number of routers in the round-trip path.
 .It
-Set it to 255; this is what current 
+Set it to 255; this is what current
 .Bx
 systems do.
 In this case the
diff --git a/sbin/quotacheck/quotacheck.8 b/sbin/quotacheck/quotacheck.8
index 0881c88..fef9e02 100644
--- a/sbin/quotacheck/quotacheck.8
+++ b/sbin/quotacheck/quotacheck.8
@@ -114,10 +114,10 @@ and
 which are located at the root of the associated file system.
 These defaults may be overridden in
 .Pa /etc/fstab .
-If a file is not present, 
+If a file is not present,
 .Nm
 will create it.
-These files should be edited with the 
+These files should be edited with the
 .Xr edquota 8
 utility.
 .Pp
@@ -125,16 +125,16 @@ utility.
 is normally run at boot time from the
 .Pa /etc/rc
 file.
-The rc startup procedure is controlled by the 
+The rc startup procedure is controlled by the
 .Pa /etc/rc.conf
-variable 
+variable
 .Ar check_quotas .
-Note that to enable this functionality in 
+Note that to enable this functionality in
 .Pa /etc/rc
 you also need to enable startup quota procedures
 with the variable
-.Ar enable_quotas 
-in 
+.Ar enable_quotas
+in
 .Pa /etc/rc.conf .
 .Pp
 .Nm Quotacheck
diff --git a/sbin/reboot/boot_i386.8 b/sbin/reboot/boot_i386.8
index fca3f36..c9cd26b 100644
--- a/sbin/reboot/boot_i386.8
+++ b/sbin/reboot/boot_i386.8
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ the listing will be of the relevant subdirectory.)
 Specify boot file and flags.
 .Bl -tag -width indent
 .It Ar bios_drive
-The drive number as recognized by the BIOS. 
+The drive number as recognized by the BIOS.
 0 for the first drive, 1 for the second drive, etc.
 .It Ar interface
 The type of controller to boot from.  Note that the controller is required
@@ -179,14 +179,14 @@ commands present in the script.
 .It Fl D
 toggle single and dual console configurations.  In the single
 configuration the console will be either the internal display
-or the serial port, depending on the state of the 
+or the serial port, depending on the state of the
 .Fl h
-option below.  In the dual console configuration, 
-both the internal display and the serial port will become the console 
-at the same time, regardless of the state of the 
+option below.  In the dual console configuration,
+both the internal display and the serial port will become the console
+at the same time, regardless of the state of the
 .Fl h
 option.  However, the dual console configuration takes effect only during
-the boot prompt.  Once the kernel is loaded, the console specified 
+the boot prompt.  Once the kernel is loaded, the console specified
 by the
 .Fl h
 option becomes the only console.
@@ -197,14 +197,14 @@ as early as possible in kernel initialization.
 .It Fl g
 use the GDB remote debugging protocol.
 .It Fl h
-toggle internal and serial consoles.  You can use this to switch 
-console devices.  For instance, if you boot from the internal console, 
+toggle internal and serial consoles.  You can use this to switch
+console devices.  For instance, if you boot from the internal console,
 you can use the
 .Fl h
-option to force the kernel to use the serial port as its 
-console device.  Alternatively, if you boot from the serial port, 
-you can use this option to force the kernel to use the internal display 
-as the console instead.  
+option to force the kernel to use the serial port as its
+console device.  Alternatively, if you boot from the serial port,
+you can use this option to force the kernel to use the internal display
+as the console instead.
 The serial port driver
 .Xr sio 4
 has a flag to override this option.
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ If that flag is set, the serial port will always be used as the console,
 regardless of the
 .Fl h
 option described here.  See the man page for
-.Xr sio 4 
+.Xr sio 4
 for more details.
 .It Fl P
 probe the keyboard.  If no keyboard is found, the
diff --git a/sbin/reboot/reboot.8 b/sbin/reboot/reboot.8
index 0252fa6..a16eef1 100644
--- a/sbin/reboot/reboot.8
+++ b/sbin/reboot/reboot.8
@@ -76,11 +76,11 @@ device has previously been specified with
 The halt or reboot is
 .Em not
 logged to the system log.
-This option is intended for applications such as 
+This option is intended for applications such as
 .Xr shutdown 8 ,
 that call
 .Nm
-or 
+or
 .Nm halt
 and log this themselves.
 .It Fl n
@@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ This option should probably not be used.
 .It Fl p
 The system will turn off the power
 if it can.
-This is of course likely to make 
+This is of course likely to make
 .Nm
-rather similar to 
+rather similar to
 .Nm halt .
 .El
 .Pp
diff --git a/sbin/restore/restore.8 b/sbin/restore/restore.8
index f07a5ef..d2214b5 100644
--- a/sbin/restore/restore.8
+++ b/sbin/restore/restore.8
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ added to the extraction list
 .Fl h
 flag is specified on the command line).
 Files that are on the extraction list are prepended with a ``*''
-when they are listed by 
+when they are listed by
 .Ic ls .
 .It Ic \&cd Ar arg
 Change the current working directory to the specified argument.
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ deleted from the extraction list
 (unless the
 .Fl h
 flag is specified on the command line).
-The most expedient way to extract most of the files from a directory 
+The most expedient way to extract most of the files from a directory
 is to add the directory to the extraction list and then delete
 those files that are not needed.
 .It Ic extract
@@ -163,10 +163,10 @@ have their owner, modes, and times set;
 nothing is extracted from the dump.
 This is useful for cleaning up after a restore has been prematurely aborted.
 .It Ic verbose
-The sense of the 
+The sense of the
 .Fl v
 flag is toggled.
-When set, the verbose flag causes the 
+When set, the verbose flag causes the
 .Ic ls
 command to list the inode numbers of all entries.
 It also causes
@@ -211,9 +211,9 @@ cd /mnt
 restore rf /dev/sa0
 .Ed
 .Pp
-Note that 
+Note that
 .Nm
-leaves a file 
+leaves a file
 .Pa restoresymtable
 in the root directory to pass information between incremental
 restore passes.
@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ flag replaces the function of the old
 program.
 .It Fl x
 The named files are read from the given media.
-If a named file matches a directory whose contents 
+If a named file matches a directory whose contents
 are on the backup
 and the
 .Fl h
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Use Kerberos authentication when contacting the remote tape server.
 was compiled.)
 .Pp
 .It Fl h
-Extract the actual directory, 
+Extract the actual directory,
 rather than the files that it references.
 This prevents hierarchical restoration of complete subtrees
 from the dump.
@@ -317,9 +317,9 @@ This is useful if only a few files are being extracted,
 and one wants to avoid regenerating the complete pathname
 to the file.
 .It Fl N
-Do the extraction normally, but do not actually write any changes 
+Do the extraction normally, but do not actually write any changes
 to disk.
-This can be used to check the integrity of dump media 
+This can be used to check the integrity of dump media
 or other test purposes.
 .It Fl s Ar fileno
 Read from the specified
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ Always try to skip over the bad block(s) and continue.
 .El
 .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
 Complaints if it gets a read error.
-If 
+If
 .Fl y
 has been specified, or the user responds
 .Ql y ,
@@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ or that has too low an incremental level has been loaded.
 .Pp
 .It Incremental dump too high
 When doing incremental restore,
-a dump that does not begin its coverage where the previous incremental 
+a dump that does not begin its coverage where the previous incremental
 dump left off,
 or that has too high an incremental level has been loaded.
 .Pp
@@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ then no extracted files have been corrupted,
 though files may not be found on the tape.
 .Pp
 .It resync restore, skipped <num> blocks
-After a dump read error, 
+After a dump read error,
 .Nm
 may have to resynchronize itself.
 This message lists the number of blocks that were skipped over.
diff --git a/sbin/route/route.8 b/sbin/route/route.8
index f9d005c..b5332e7 100644
--- a/sbin/route/route.8
+++ b/sbin/route/route.8
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ The
 utility supports a limited number of general options,
 but a rich command language, enabling the user to specify
 any arbitrary request that could be delivered via the
-programmatic interface discussed in 
+programmatic interface discussed in
 .Xr route 4 .
 .Pp
 The following options are available:
@@ -113,9 +113,9 @@ The flush command has the syntax:
 .Op Ar family
 .Ed
 .Pp
-If the 
+If the
 .Cm flush
-command is specified, 
+command is specified,
 .Nm
 will ``flush'' the routing tables of all gateway entries.
 When the address family may is specified by any of the
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ The optional modifiers
 and
 .Fl host
 force the destination to be interpreted as a network or a host, respectively.
-Otherwise, if the 
+Otherwise, if the
 .Ar destination
 has a
 .Dq local address part
@@ -199,21 +199,21 @@ which is the default route.
 .Pp
 If the destination is directly reachable
 via an interface requiring
-no intermediary system to act as a gateway, the 
+no intermediary system to act as a gateway, the
 .Fl interface
 modifier should be specified;
 the gateway given is the address of this host on the common network,
 indicating the interface to be used for transmission.
 Alternately, if the interface is point to point the name of the interface
 itself may be given, in which case the route remains valid even
-if the local or remote addresses change. 
+if the local or remote addresses change.
 .Pp
 The optional modifiers
 .Fl xns ,
 .Fl osi ,
 .Fl atalk ,
 and
-.Fl link 
+.Fl link
 specify that all subsequent addresses are in the
 .Tn XNS ,
 .Tn OSI ,
@@ -253,8 +253,8 @@ specifies network mask of
 .Li ffff:ffff:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000
 to be used.
 The default value of prefixlen is 64 to get along with
-the aggregatable address. 
-But 0 is assumed if 
+the aggregatable address.
+But 0 is assumed if
 .Cm default
 is specified.
 Note that the qualifier works only for
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ These may be individually locked by preceding each such modifier to
 be locked by
 the
 .Fl lock
-meta-modifier, or one can 
+meta-modifier, or one can
 specify that all ensuing metrics may be locked by the
 .Fl lockrest
 meta-modifier.
@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ entry, as reported by
 .Pp
 All symbolic names specified for a
 .Ar destination
-or 
+or
 .Ar gateway
 are looked up first as a host name using
 .Xr gethostbyname 3 .
@@ -345,17 +345,17 @@ the routing tables.
 .It "add [host \&| network ] %s: gateway %s flags %x"
 The specified route is being added to the tables.  The
 values printed are from the routing table entry supplied
-in the 
+in the
 .Xr ioctl 2
 call.
 If the gateway address used was not the primary address of the gateway
 (the first one returned by
 .Xr gethostbyname 3 ) ,
 the gateway address is printed numerically as well as symbolically.
-.It "delete [ host \&| network ] %s: gateway %s flags %x" 
+.It "delete [ host \&| network ] %s: gateway %s flags %x"
 As above, but when deleting an entry.
 .It "%s %s done"
-When the 
+When the
 .Cm flush
 command is specified, each routing table entry deleted
 is indicated with a message of this form.
diff --git a/sbin/slattach/slattach.8 b/sbin/slattach/slattach.8
index ddc571b..83eb981 100644
--- a/sbin/slattach/slattach.8
+++ b/sbin/slattach/slattach.8
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
 .Op Fl K Ar keepalive
 .Op Fl O Ar outfill
 .Op Fl S Ar unit
-.Ar ttyname 
+.Ar ttyname
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 .Nm Slattach
 is used to assign a tty line to a network interface,
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ By default sliplogin dynamically assigns the unit number.
 .It Ar ttyname
 Specify the name of the tty device.
 .Ar Ttyname
-should be a string of the form 
+should be a string of the form
 .Ql ttyXX
 or
 .Ql /dev/ttyXX .
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ the server and log in, etc.
 To reconfigure the network interface in case the slip unit number
 changes, use the
 .Fl u Ar unit-command
-option to specify a script or executable that will be invoked as 
+option to specify a script or executable that will be invoked as
 .Ql sh \-c Ar unit-command old new
 where
 .Ar old
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_attr.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_attr.3
index c34df1e..6707b0a 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_attr.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_attr.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 28, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_ATTR 3
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ functions set the attribute that corresponds to each function name.
 The
 .Fn pthread_attr_get*
 functions copy the value of the attribute that corresponds to each function name
-to the location pointed to by the second function parameter. 
+to the location pointed to by the second function parameter.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, these functions return 0.
 Otherwise, an error number is returned to indicate the error.
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_condattr.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_condattr.3
index 5b0200f..d117c75 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_condattr.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_condattr.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 28, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_CONDATTR 3
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_detach.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_detach.3
index 75c9d42..a3b660f 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_detach.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_detach.3
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ If
 has not terminated,
 .Fn pthread_detach
 will not cause it to terminate.
-The effect of multiple 
+The effect of multiple
 .Fn pthread_detach
 calls on the same target thread is unspecified.
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_exit.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_exit.3
index 5f6f75b..1eabc9b 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_exit.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_exit.3
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ is undefined if called from a cancellation handler or destructor function
 that was invoked as the result of an implicit or explicit call to
 .Fn pthread_exit .
 .Pp
-After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto) 
+After a thread has terminated, the result of access to local (auto)
 variables of the thread is undefined.
 Thus, references to local variables
 of the exiting thread should not be used for the
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_kill.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_kill.3
index b5bb859..a18a969 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_kill.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_kill.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 27, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_KILL 3
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_mutexattr.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_mutexattr.3
index ec79518..555cdd4 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_mutexattr.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_mutexattr.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd May 1, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_MUTEXATTR 3
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_once.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_once.3
index 736e32e..72a1322 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_once.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_once.3
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ is not a cancellation point.
 However, if
 .Fn init_routine
 is a cancellation point and is cancelled, the effect on
-.Fa once_control is as if 
+.Fa once_control is as if
 .Fn pthread_once
 was never called.
 .Pp
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3
index bd1bfe8..70acf92 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_rwlock_destroy.3
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
 The
 .Fn pthread_rwlock_destroy
-function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with 
+function is used to destroy a read/write lock previously created with
 .Fn pthread_rwlock_init .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, the
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3
index 80db1a9..ab6a6e1 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_rwlockattr_destroy.3
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 The
 .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_destroy
 function is used to destroy a read/write lock attribute object
-previously created with 
+previously created with
 .Fn pthread_rwlockattr_init .
 .Sh RETURN VALUES
 If successful, the
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_schedparam.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_schedparam.3
index 3e2e32e..96287e5 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_schedparam.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_schedparam.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd May 1, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_SCHEDPARAM 3
diff --git a/share/man/man3/pthread_sigmask.3 b/share/man/man3/pthread_sigmask.3
index a335107..6af3464 100644
--- a/share/man/man3/pthread_sigmask.3
+++ b/share/man/man3/pthread_sigmask.3
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 .\" Copyright (C) 2000 Jason Evans <jasone@freebsd.org>.
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
 .\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
 .\" are met:
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .\"    notice(s), this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
 .\"    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
 .\"    distribution.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER(S) ``AS IS'' AND ANY
 .\" EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
 .\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
 .\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
 .\" OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
 .\" EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" $FreeBSD$
 .Dd April 27, 2000
 .Dt PTHREAD_SIGMASK 3
diff --git a/usr.sbin/mount_nwfs/mount_nwfs.8 b/usr.sbin/mount_nwfs/mount_nwfs.8
index 5d31ce1..fa1855b 100644
--- a/usr.sbin/mount_nwfs/mount_nwfs.8
+++ b/usr.sbin/mount_nwfs/mount_nwfs.8
@@ -41,14 +41,14 @@ possible to create connection without any mounts (but use it for them) with
 .Pp
 Note two forms of command line.
 In the first form, server and user specified
-via 
+via
 .Fl S
 and
 .Fl U
 options respectively.
 In the second form server and user specified in
 .Ar special
-part of 
+part of
 .Xr mount 8
 command line arguments (the
 .Fl S ,
@@ -84,22 +84,22 @@ before
 Path to mount volume.
 .It Fl c Ar case
 Select a
-.Ar case 
+.Ar case
 option which affects on name representation.
-.Ar Case 
+.Ar Case
 can be one of the following:
 .Bl -tag -width "ValueXX"
 .It Em Value
 .Em Meaning
 .It l
-All existing file names converted to lower case. 
+All existing file names converted to lower case.
 Newly created file gets a lower case under OS2 name space.
 This is the default when mounting volumes with DOS name space.
 .It L
 Same as 'l' but file system tries to be case insensitive.
 May not work well.
 .It n
-No case conversion is performed. 
+No case conversion is performed.
 .Em Warning !
 Use this option with DOS name space only as a last resort,
 because creating a lower case name in the DOS name space
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ is taken from mount point, default value for the dir mode adds execute
 permission where the file mode gives read permission.
 .Pp
 Note that these permissions can differ from the rights granted by NetWare
-server. 
+server.
 .It Fl n Ar namespace
 Don't use
 .Ar namespace .
@@ -141,21 +141,21 @@ tries to use an environment variable
 .Ev LC_* .
 .It Fl w Ar scheme
 Select a
-.Ar scheme 
+.Ar scheme
 used to convert file names between NetWare and
 .Fx .
-Currently only 
-.Ar koi2cp866 
-and 
-.Ar asis 
+Currently only
+.Ar koi2cp866
+and
+.Ar asis
 can be here.
-Please note, that scheme should be enabled at compile 
+Please note, that scheme should be enabled at compile
 time in
 .Pa config.mk
 file.
 .It Fl M Ar mode
-See 
-.Xr ncplogin 1 
+See
+.Xr ncplogin 1
 for details.
 If this option is omitted, connection permissions
 assumed the same as directory mode
diff --git a/usr.sbin/mountd/netgroup.5 b/usr.sbin/mountd/netgroup.5
index 919f1fe..ba58b2c 100644
--- a/usr.sbin/mountd/netgroup.5
+++ b/usr.sbin/mountd/netgroup.5
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ similar platforms.)
 .It
 If the
 .Pa /etc/netgroup
-exists and contains only local 
+exists and contains only local
 .Nm
 information (with no
 .Tn NIS
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ The interpretation of access restrictions based on the member tuples of a
 netgroup is left up to the various network applications.
 Also, it is not obvious how the domain specification
 applies to the
-.Bx 
+.Bx
 environment.
 .Pp
 The
diff --git a/usr.sbin/nfsd/nfsd.8 b/usr.sbin/nfsd/nfsd.8
index 544756a..c62b7d8 100644
--- a/usr.sbin/nfsd/nfsd.8
+++ b/usr.sbin/nfsd/nfsd.8
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Serve
 clients.
 .El
 .Pp
-For example, 
+For example,
 .Dq Li "nfsd -u -t -n 6"
 serves
 .Tn UDP
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ RFC1094 and
 .Pp
 If
 .Nm
-detects that 
+detects that
 .Tn NFS
 is not loaded in the running kernel, it will attempt
 to load a loadable kernel module containing
diff --git a/usr.sbin/nologin/nologin.5 b/usr.sbin/nologin/nologin.5
index d293277..9d63c88 100644
--- a/usr.sbin/nologin/nologin.5
+++ b/usr.sbin/nologin/nologin.5
@@ -39,11 +39,11 @@
 .Nm nologin
 .Nd disallow logins
 .Sh DESCRIPTION
-Programs such as 
+Programs such as
 .Xr login 1
-disallow logins if the file 
+disallow logins if the file
 .Pa /var/run/nologin
-exists. 
+exists.
 Programs display the contents of
 .Pa /var/run/nologin
 to the user and exit.
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ To disable logins on a per-account basis,
 investigate
 .Xr nologin 8 .
 .Sh SECURITY
-Ignored by 
+Ignored by
 .Xr login 1
 for user root.
 .Sh FILES
diff --git a/usr.sbin/nologin/nologin.8 b/usr.sbin/nologin/nologin.8
index 9a384f1..8903fa0 100644
--- a/usr.sbin/nologin/nologin.8
+++ b/usr.sbin/nologin/nologin.8
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 .Os
 .Sh NAME
 .Nm nologin
-.Nd politely refuse a login 
+.Nd politely refuse a login
 .Sh SYNOPSIS
 .Nm
 .Sh DESCRIPTION